Sei sulla pagina 1di 800

www.pacom.

com

GMS 3.7x

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06

GMS 3.7x User Guide

Table of Contents Chapter 1 Welcome


1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 About GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 How to Create a Short-cut for Launching GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
2 3 3 3 4 7

Chapter 2 Getting Started

13

2.1 About GMS Logon/Logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.1.1 How to Logon to GMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.1.2 Click OK.How to Log Off from GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.2 Click OK to close the Operator-1 Logoff dialog box. If your password is accepted, the Operator-1 Logon dialog box will be displayed, ready for the next operator to log on.How to Close GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 3 Operator Configuration


3.1 About the Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Configure System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Logon Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Access Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Configure User Defined Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Configure an Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Configure Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Configure Privileges Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

17
17 19 19 22 26 28 30 31 38

ii
3.4.3 Configure Customize Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.4.4 Configure Partitioning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 3.5 Configure an Authorized Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Chapter 4 System Configuration


4.1 Configure Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Configure Event Priority Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Configure the Event Dispatch Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Event Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Last Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Round Robin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Alarm Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Time Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Security Level. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Workstation Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.8 Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Configure System Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Exiting the Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Optional GMS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Configure the Events Manager Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Configure the Summary Manager Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Other GMS Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Change the Authorization Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Change Your Own Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Change the Communications Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 Select a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.4 Editing System Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.5 Resize Maps Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.6 Display the Site ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.7 Change GMS Timeout Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61
62 65 72 76 79 80 81 84 87 90 93 95 100 101 101 105 111 112 113 116 118 119 120 120 120

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

iii

Chapter 5 Operating the Console


5.1 Summary Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 How to Access Summary Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 About the Summary Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Customize the Summary Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 How to Close Summary Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.5 Map View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.6 Working with Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.7 Manipulating Multi Site Guard Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Events Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Events Manager Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 How to View The Details of An Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Pending Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 How to Suspend Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 How to Move Alarms to Another Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6 Alarms Requiring No Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.7 Group Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.8 Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.9 How to Search for A Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.10 How to View Event Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.11 Using General Instructions And Canned Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.12 Viewing Workstation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.13 Viewing Workstation Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.14 Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.15 Configure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.16 Enhancement of Operator Instruction Creation And Event Handling . 5.3 Transaction Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Processing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Temporary User Support For Limited Guard Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Video Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 About the Witness Video Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123
125 125 127 142 151 151 162 184 188 188 192 195 196 197 198 199 201 205 206 207 215 216 218 228 249 255 256 262 269 289 295 297 298

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

iv
5.4.2 Witness Addresses from Site Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 How to Add Witnesses to the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 How to Connect to a Witness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Witness Right-Click Menu and Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 How to Search a Witness for Captured Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.7 How to Transfer a Clip to Your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.8 How to View Locally Stored Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.9 How to Export a Video Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.10 Viewing Live Video from the Site Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.11 Viewing Captured Video from the Transaction Manager . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.12 How to Configure the Video and Audio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.13 Two-Way Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.14 How to Configure the Witness Input and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.15 How to Setup Recording Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.16 How to Setup Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.17 About Pan Tilt and Zoom Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.18 Option Button Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.19 Right-Click Menu in Units Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.20 Right-Click Menu in Files Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.21 Right-Click Menu in the Result Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 306 308 308 311 314 315 315 316 317 317 327 329 333 338 341 347 362 364 365

Chapter 6 Access Control


6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Configure Readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Time Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 How to Create a New Time Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 How to Edit An Existing Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 How to Delete A Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Reader Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 How to Create A Reader Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 How to Add More Reader Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

371
371 374 380 382 382 384 384 387 388 389 391 395

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

6.5.3 Assigning Access to Cardholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 How to Create An Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Floor Access Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 How to Setup A Floor Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1 How to Download Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 Cardholder Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.1 Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.2 Card Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.3 Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.4 User Defined 1 Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.5 User Defined 2 Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.6 User Defined 3 Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.7 How to Rename A User Defined Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.8 How to Create A New Cardholder Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.9 Cardholder Common Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.10 Issue a Temporary Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.11 Card Type Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.12 Verify Card Database Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Video Badging Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1 How to Select A Capture Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.2 How to Capture A Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3 ID Card Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4 Magnetic Stripe Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.5 Single And Double Side Badge Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.6 How to Create Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.7 How to Work With Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.8 Common Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.9 Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.10 Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.11 Attach Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.12 Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.13 Bar Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 How to Search Cardholder Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

397 402 403 406 407 411 412 414 416 417 420 429 430 432 432 436 437 438 440 445 445 446 448 450 454 455 456 458 460 460 461 462 464 464 465 466

vi
6.11.2 Advanced Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3 How to Display A Cardholder Record After A Search . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.4 Preview And/Or Print A Report After A Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.5 Cardholder Search Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Cardholder Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.1 All Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.2 How to Change All Transactions Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.3 Traced Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.4 Traced Transactions Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.5 Muster Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.6 Cardholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.7 Importing and Exporting Cardholder Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.8 Bulk Updating Cardholder Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Customize Cardholder Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.1 How to Change The Tab Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.2 How to Change Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.3 How to Insert Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.4 How to Insert A Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.5 How to Insert A Data Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.7 Tool Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.8 Layout Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.9 How to Use The Align Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.10 How to Use The Make Same Size Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.11 How to Set The Levels Of Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.12 How to Save Customized Card Access Data Templates . . . . . . . . . . 467 471 472 474 480 481 482 492 492 497 498 501 505 508 508 509 511 513 516 517 520 521 522 523 524 524

Chapter 7 Reports
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 How to Preview A Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Print A Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Export a Report as a Data File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardholder Details Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card Access Transaction Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

533
534 536 537 541 541

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

vii

7.6 Card Holders Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.1 How to Print A Cardholder Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Hardware Configuration Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Creating Customized Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9.1 Licensing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9.2 To Design a Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9.3 Configure the Report Filters & Search Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9.4 Designing a Custom Report with Complex Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9.5 Using the Custom Report in other locations of GMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

544 546 547 550 553 553 554 555 562 562

Chapter 8 Map Editor


8.1 How to Access Map Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 About the Map Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Using the Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Using the Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 Using the Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 Using the Color Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.5 Using the Point Details Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.6 Using the Site Map Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 How to Close Map Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Working with Maps in the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 How to Create a New Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 How to Open an Existing Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 Saving a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.4 Print a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.5 How to make Backup of a Map file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.6 How to Restore a Map from Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.7 How to Delete a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.8 How to Delete a Map With Multi Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.9 How to Email a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Importing Content into a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Importing a Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

565
565 567 569 581 581 582 582 583 584 585 585 587 589 591 594 595 596 597 597 598 599

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

viii
8.5.2 Importing Site Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.3 Importing Site Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.4 Importing Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Manipulating Map Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 Site Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2 Site Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.3 Guard Tour Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.4 Operator Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Drawing Elements on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.1 How to Draw Objects on a Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.2 How to Add Elements on a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 Manipulating Drawings on a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.1 Pen Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.2 How to Specify the Font of Text on the Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.3 How to Change Color for a Group of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.4 Grid Lines on Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.5 Image Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.6 How to Move Objects on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.7 How to Delete Objects on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.8 Action on Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 Organizing Points on a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9.1 How to View Point Details of the Points on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9.2 How to Locate a Point on the Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9.3 How to Align Multiple Points on the Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9.4 Map Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10 Working with Maps with Points from Multiple Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10.1 How To Create a Site Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10.2 How to Create a Multi RTU Site Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10.3 How to View a Multi RTU Site Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 607 608 615 615 618 626 633 660 660 668 710 711 712 713 716 721 724 725 727 732 732 733 734 738 743 744 747 751

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2/06 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

Copyright Notice
This document, and the software described in it, is furnished under license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be: reproduced or translated into any language, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise,

without the prior written permission of Pacom Systems Pty Ltd. Pacom Systems Pty Ltd assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document and the content is subject to change without notice. Any reference to companies, organizations, products, people and events depicted herein are for example purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual company, organization, product, person or event. Pacom Witness is a trademark of Pacom Systems Pty Ltd. Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

ii

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

Chapter 1 Welcome
Welcome to the Pacom Graphical Management System (GMS) - the monitoring and controlling system for any integrated and networked security solution. This User Guides purpose is to support you, the end user, to operate GMS to its full capacity. This edition of the GMS User Guide contains those sections that would be required by a standard operator. Throughout the many companies that utilize GMS the definition of a standard operator and the functions they perform on a regular basis will vary. We have chosen the more common functions. System configuration - How to configure data and parameters for optimal GMS performance. Operator configuration - How to set up operators with privileges and access to GMS functions. Each operator can also setup a customized view of GMS here. Operation: Summary Manager - Graphic representation of all remote sites and their status and how to setup site details and alarm points for each site. This is also where you set the field controller parameters and card access parameters for each site. Operation: Events Manager - Displays all situations that may affect security at remote sites. How to configure and action these events. Operation: Transaction Manager - Monitors real-time network activity. How to configure the Transaction Manager to create logs for these activities on each site. Operation: Witness Video Manager - How to configure video and audio on the Pacom DVR. Access control - Management of cards and cardholders and what privileges and access they are entitled to. Reports - How to create different reports based on system information. Map editor - GMS drawing program that is used to create and edit site maps containing alarm points and device details

For functions that are not described here please refer to the GMS online help in the GMS main menu under Help or on Pacoms support web site.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

Welcome

1.1.

About GMS
The primary function of the GMS software is to provide a central point of management and control to a single or multi-site security installation. GMS integration capabilities provide Pacom users with the ability to fully integrate central station transaction management functionality, multi-site networked alarm, access control and ID management, as well as a fully integrated video monitoring and management control module. The GMS software is a native Windows NT/2000 based alarm, access control and video monitoring and management application that provides complete control and real-time system status of all facilities anywhere, anytime.

Figure 1-1. Desktop For GMS Server With Workstations All GMS transaction management and operator event processing functions provide exceptional ease of use at the monitoring end of a multi-location security network. GMS also incorporates a fully integrated access control and ID management application module that provides users with a truly seamless system infrastructure. These applications, combined with a true relational database engine (Microsoft SQL or MSDE), provide security managers easier, more intuitive access to the critical information required.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

All programmable operating parameters, which make each remote site unique, are also downloadable to remote or locally connected units from a PC via the GMS software. A simple point-and-click will download operating parameters such as alarm point and area identification, network and dial backup parameters, user and card access information, etc. Users will also enjoy an exceptionally friendly graphical user interface, which allows GMS operators to remotely control all security devices which are displayed via a graphical map format.

1.2.

Scope of Documentation
This document is written to the following hardware and software revisions:

Part
GMS Pacom Field Controller 1057

Hardware Revision
N/A REV 05

Software
V3.10 SP2 (HotFix 2) RS232 SupportV3.12 or Higher RS232 & IP SupportV4.01 or Higher

Pacom Field Controller 1058

REV 04

RS232 SupportV3.12 or Higher RS232 & IP SupportV4.01 or Higher

Witness 2000/001 (Motherboard)

REV 04

RS232 SupportV3.23 or Higher RS232 & IP SupportV3.24 or Higher

Witness 2000/201 (Daughterboard) Table 1-1.

REV 02

N/A

Some options described in this manual may not exist in your system if a previous version of GMS is used. Similarly, some options in your system may not be documented here if the version of GMS you are using is older than 3.7 SP1 and that option no longer is a part of the latest GMS version.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

Welcome

1.3.

UL Considerations
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) is a product safety standard where samples of products are tested to certain safety requirements and periodic checks are conducted of manufacturers' facilities. For detailed comments refer to Appendix A UL Compliance Considerations... Page 779.

1.4.

Installing GMS
GMS will generally be installed by one of Pacoms trained resellers to ensure the correct configuration for system operation on your network. There is also a GMS installation document supplied in PDF format on the CD itself.

1.5.

Starting GMS
You start GMS as you would any software application. To start GMS in Windows, do one of the following: Choose Start > Programs > GMS X.X > GMS Server for an application with client work stations, choose StandAlone GMS for an application without any client work stations, or Choose Start > Run, and then enter the full path name of the program executable file. For example C:\GMS\GMS32.exe + any required switches see Switches... Page 781, or Create a short-cut on your desktop, menu or other location of preference to launch the application How to Create a Short-cut for Launching GMS... Page 4.

1.5.1. How to Create a Short-cut for Launching GMS


The easiest way to launch GMS is by creating a short-cut. This short-cut can be created and left on the Windows desktop or it can be placed on the Windows task bar. Proceed as follows: 1. Right-click on your Windows desktop in an empty spot where you would like to create the short-cut.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2.

From the quick select menu that appears select New > Shortcut. The Create Short-cut dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 1-2. Create Shortcut Window 3. Do one of the following: 4. Type the path and filename of the GMS32.exe file. (e.g. C:\GMS\Gms32.exe), or click Browse to browse for the file.

Once you have entered the path or browsed for the GMS32.exe file you may need to add a GMS switch command to the end of the short-cut. How to Create a Short-cut for Launching GMS... Page 4. Click Next when all switches have been added. The Select a Title for the Program dialog will be displayed. Type in a descriptive name for the short-cut and click Finish. The short-cut will be created in the spot you clicked in Step 1. If you like you can now drag the short-cut to a convenient location on the windows task bar.

5.

6.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

Welcome

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

1.6.

Terminology
The following table consists of terminology used in GMS.

Terminology
Access Levels Alarm Anti-passback

Definition
See Global Access Group. See Event. Used interchangeably. An anti-passback alarm is generated if a card is used more than once in one direction, in or out of an area, consecutively. Backs up network interface processors. Buffers a large amount of alarm information and allows for a multiple NIP and PSTN connection to the CPU cards. A GMS module that manages what type of card each cardholder has and what areas different cards have access to. A GMS module that holds details about all card transactions, where they have been used, by whom and when. A person granted access to the premises. A secondary CPU card attached to the base station. Closed Circuit Television. A television system in which signals are not publicly distributed; cameras are connected to television monitors in a limited area such as an office building. CCTV is commonly used in surveillance systems. Communications Control Unit. A base station card which performs networking, dialup and can also interface to other special monitoring systems. The CCU will eventually replace all other base station cards other than the CPU card.

Backup card Buffer card Card Access Manager

Card Transaction Manager

Cardholder Cascaded CPU Card CCTV

CCU

Communications Buffer Card Table 1-2. GMS Terminology

Connects line/backup/dial cards to the CPU, more buffer cards enables increased number of line/backup/dial cards.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

Terminology

Terminology
CPU Card Device Line Dial Card

Definition
Receives information from the remote field controllers channelling their information to the right ports. Transmits the communications between the PCBs such as (1067 and 1064) and the field controller. Provide full duplex communication between the CPU cards and the field controllers via the telephone network. Usually used as backup to the data network. A hardware key that plugs into a parallel or serial port on a computer that a software application accesses for ensuring that only authorized users can copy or use specific software applications. Digital Video Recorder. It streams live video and records a video stream from a video source such as a surveillance camera. See Floor Access Level. An activity occurring at a site; alarms, status of elements, any occurrence that may affect security of a site. Used interchangeably with Alarm. All events have an assigned priority level to establish the order of importance or urgency so the operator knows amongst many events which ones require prior attention. A GMS module that displays the status of all events occurring at remote sites in your security network. It include alarms of differing priority and importance, the status of site elements and any occurrence that may affect the security of a remote site. Events Manager... Page 193 Enables cardholders access to elevator levels. See RTU. A Global Access Group is a collection of Reader Groups.

Dongle

DVR

Elevator Access Event

Event Priority

Events Manager

Floor Access Level Field Controller Global Access Group

Table 1-2. GMS Terminology (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

Terminology
GMS

Definition
The Graphical Monitoring System (GMS) is an alarm management and access control program. It offers complete control and real-time system status of all your facilities, anywhere, anytime and can be enabled to remotely manage the system. Users can program, monitor and manage the capabilities for alarm, access control or digital video purposes.

Global Reader Group Guard Tour

A Global Reader Group is a group of readers with associated timezones. A specific tour can be assigned for the patrolling guards to follow. The tour can consist of readers, turn stiles and other points the guard must pass through/activate to comply with the assigned guard tour. After the tour has been completed a report can be printed for viewing to confirm that the guard has followed the assigned route within the set time frame.

Hub

A device of convergence where data arrives from one or more directions and is forwarded out in one or more other directions. An on-site device connected to the GMS system that detects any activities on a site and passes on the information to the base station. Example: PIR sensor, hold up button, egress button. Interactive Voice Response. Ability of a system to respond to a human voice rather than to a command entered via keyboard. Provides two-way communication between the CPU cards and the field controllers via the existing data network. The GMS drawing program used to create and edit site maps. A map can have 16 layers. Each layer can be made to display for instance just card readers on that site while another layer displays only output points. The number of layers visible to an operator can be made restricted.

Input Point

IVR

Line Card Map Editor Map Layer

Table 1-2. GMS Terminology (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

10

Terminology

Terminology
NIP

Definition
Network Interface Processor. A NIP card can connect to a variety of different network types and pass messages to the CPU cards. Default state for two state inputs/outputs and change over relays is closed. Circuit needs to be broken to create an alarm. Default state for two state inputs/outputs and change over relays is open. Circuit needs to be closed to create an alarm. The person sitting at an alarm monitoring workstation watching the security network and actioning occurring events. A device connected to the GMS system that gives output when activated/triggered. Example: siren, strobe light, CCTV camera and recorder. Printed Circuit Board. Point Not Reset. Access level of one user, only the available actions and commands are visible. Public Switched Telephone Network. A PSTN card communicates with remote units over the telephone network. See RTU. See Global Reader Group. An additional CPU card used as a backup unit located in a different site. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) is a device that is physically on site to monitor facilities in remote locations. It stores and communicates signals from the alarm points on site to the monitoring center (base station or a transit central) over a network.

Normally Closed (NC)

Normally Open (NO) Operator

Output Point

PCB PNR Privilege Profile PSTN

RAP Reader Group Remote CPU Card RTU

Table 1-2. GMS Terminology (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

11

Terminology
Site Site Area SNBU

Definition
A site can typically be an office building, a warehouse or a shopping center. A site can have several areas (e.g. more than one floor). Each area has its own field controller. SNBU is short for Switched Network BackUp. The format is actually not used in GMS but was at one stage considered and the term SNBU stayed even after the format was abandoned. Wherever it is mentioned it refers to that backup communications started.

Summary Manager

A GMS module that graphically represents the status of all remote sites in your security network. Summary Manager... Page 129 Dedicated input for equipment cabinet tampers. Time zones are the times when cardholders are permitted access to readers. A GMS module that displays all alarms on your security network in message form in the Transaction Manager window. It also automatically records a log of each days event activity. Transaction Manager... Page 262 The TransIT is an intelligent stand-alone base station, a central hub for the Pacom alarm and access control communications which can communicate over a number of different communications networks. It is essential for multisite/multi-controller installations. A GMS module that displays up to 16 screens of video at once with live streams or pre-captured video. Video Manager... Page 303 Pacom Witness field controller with video, 8-16 cameras, remote listening.

Tamper Switch Time Zone Transaction Manager

TransIT

Video Manager

Witness

Table 1-2. GMS Terminology (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

12

Terminology

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

13

Chapter 2 Getting Started


2.1. About GMS Logon/Logoff
GMS is programmed with the details of each person that is authorized to operate the system (Operator Configuration... Page 17). Each operator is assigned a set of privileges which determine which GMS functions will be enabled or disabled for that operator. When you begin a shift to monitor alarms in your security network, you must identify yourself to the system by logging onto GMS using an Operator Name and Password. The Operator Name will be your; Initials, Full Name, or Display Name.

This will depend on what has been set as the Logon Using in the system parameters, Configure System Parameters... Page 19. The Logon Using is a global parameter that is the same for everyone in the system i.e. If the Logon Using is set to Full Name then everyone in the system will have to logon using their full name (even the auto logon on the server). Once you have successfully entered your operator name and password, GMS will enable or disable functions depending on the privileges that have been assigned to you by the system administrator.

2.1.1. How to Logon to GMS


When logging on to GMS the system will be in one of three states as follows: GMS may not be running at all, GMS may be running with another operator logged on, or the previous operator may already have logged off and the system is in stand-by.

To logon to GMS proceed as follows: 1. If GMS is not running already then start it. The Operator-1 Logon dialog box will be displayed automatically. (Goto Step 3)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

14

Getting Started

Figure 2-1. Operator-1 Logon Dialog Box 2. If GMS is already running click the Logon icon on the GMS main toolbar. The Operator-1 Logon dialog box will be displayed. If another operator is already logged on, the Operator-1 Logoff dialog box will be displayed so that they can log off first. Once the other operator has logged off, the Operator-1 Logon dialog box will be displayed. Click OK.How to Log Off from GMS... Page 14 In the Operator Name field type in your operator name (the default for new installations is nk). In the Password field type in your password (case sensitive). (The default for new installations is UR12.)

3.

4.

2.1.2.

Click OK.How

to Log Off from GMS

When you finish working with GMS or your shift ends for the day, you must log off so that other users and operators can log on. Leaving the GMS PC unattended while you are logged on could compromise the security of your network. If a breach of security occurs while you are logged on to the system, even if you are not present, you could be held responsible for the security breach. To log off from GMS proceed as follows: 1. Click on the Logon/Logoff icon on the main GMS toolbar. The Operator-1 Logoff dialog box will be displayed. Alternatively, from the GMS main menu select the User menu and Operator-1 Logoff.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

15

Figure 2-2. Operator-1 Logoff Dialog Box

Note: If you are logged on as Operator 2, select the Operator-2 Logoff command. Generally however, this is unnecessary as Operator 2 is purely a security operator and can only be logged on for five minutes at a time (i.e. the system will automatically log off Operator 2 five minutes after they log on).
2. In the Operator Name text box, type your operator name. About GMS Logon/Logoff... Page 13 In the Password text box, type your password (case sensitive).

3.

2.2.

Click OK to close the Operator-1 Logoff dialog box. If your password is accepted, the Operator-1 Logon dialog box will be displayed, ready for the next operator to log on.

to Close GMS

How

GMS is designed to be running all the time, but if a situation occurs that requires a shutdown (exit) of GMS you will need the authorization password. Your supervisor may need to enter this password if you do not have the required access. The authorization password can be disabled, for details please refer to Change the Authorization Password... Page 104. To exit GMS proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu under the File menu select Exit or click Authorization Logoff dialog box will be displayed. . The

Type in the Operator Name and Password. Click OK to exit and shutdown GMS.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

16

Getting Started

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

17

Chapter 3 Operator Configuration


Before you use GMS, it must be configured with the initial data and specific parameters to operate at its optimal performance. This configuration can be performed manually, or with the help of the setup wizard.

Note: For the initial configuration (i.e. the first time you configure GMS) it is necessary to configure the system in the order set out in this section, Operator Configuration, and the following section, System Configuration.
This chapter details the configurations necessary to create different operator types and the settings that allow each operator to individualize the GMS view. These sections are: System Parameters - General information required to setup operators, workstations, file and drive details. User Defined Words - Allows standardization of terminology for your organization. Operator - Details setup of the operators access rights.

For subsequent configuration and maintenance, you can manually configure any area of the system in any order.

3.1.

About the Setup Wizard


The GMS Setup Wizard is an application that takes you step by step through the different but necessary areas of system configuration. By following this step by step configuration Wizard, you can configure GMS to suit your companys individual security needs. The first time you open GMS, the Setup Wizard will be automatically displayed. For subsequent configuration or maintenance, from the GMS main menu select Setup > Wizard....

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

18

Operator Configuration

Figure 3-1. System Parameters Configuration The data and parameters that can be configured via the Wizard are listed on the right hand side of the dialog box. These configuration options are listed in a logical sequence and should be configured in this order. When using the Wizard: The highlighted option is the area of GMS that will be configured when you click Configure.... The title bar will display the name of the current highlighted option. Click Back or Next to move through the list of configurable options. To close the Wizard at any stage of the configuration process, click Cancel. All changes made prior to closing the Wizard will be saved.

Default parameters are set into the Wizard. These are the minimum configuration parameters required for GMS to operate. You can choose to either: alter these default parameters via the Wizard to suit your own unique requirements, or leave the default parameters as they are.

Further configuration can be performed at a later stage of using GMS. If you decide to do further configuration, you can choose to either manually open the Wizard and alter all system parameters, or individually open each area of configuration one at a time as required.
Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

19

3.2.

Configure System Parameters


System parameters contain general system information, such as operator, workstation, file and drive details. They also contain logon information, such as password details and logon attempts. The tabs at the top of the System Parameters Configuration dialog box indicate the different areas of the system parameters. General - Fundamental system parameters necessary to individualize GMS to suit your organization. Logon - Basic operator access requirements. Access Control - Preferences for how to display cards used by cardholders in the physical monitored area.

Note: In most cases, the default configuration for system parameters will be appropriate. System parameters can only be changed by an operator with the Edit System Parameters privilege. Do NOT change these parameters unless instructed to do so by a PACOM engineer.

3.2.1. General Tab


Under the General tab you configure general system parameters. To configure the general system parameters, proceed as follows. 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight System Parameters using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > System Parameters.... The System Parameter Configuration dialog box will be displayed, with the General system parameters tab displayed.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

20

Operator Configuration

Figure 3-2. System Parameters Configuration > General Tab

Option
User Site Access Range (First/Last) To

Description
The range of sites (field controllers) to be monitored by the system. Determined by the GMS license. Maximum amount of sites allowed with the current license. Determined by the GMS license.

Table 3-1. System Parameters Configuration > General Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

21

Option
No. of Operators

Description
The number of users with access/logon authority to GMS. Min = 1, max = 255.

No. of Workstations Permitted

The number of licensed workstations that can connect simultaneously to the server. Min = 1, max = 32.

No. of Alarm Priorities

The number of alarm priorities configured to the server. Min = 1, max = 255.

No. of Sites Permitted No. of Days to Keep the Log Files (30-365)

The number of licensed remote sites/field controllers attached to the server. Determined by the GMS license. The number of days GMS will store the log files generated by the system. The log files will be deleted after this time. Min = 30, max = 365.

Create Site Map Backup File GMS Backup Drive (c:\gms32b) Local RTU No.

When this option is selected, GMS will automatically create a site map backup file and place it where you determine in GMS Backup Drive. The path to the drive where you wish to contain all backup files automatically created by GMS. Suggested path is C:\GMS32b. Typically the field controller number is the same as the site number. (This parameter is currently not used but will be integrated in to the GMS 3.7 release.) When the disk space for GMS reaches this amount of MB, a warning is generated. When this option is selected, the location of a point within a site map will be displayed in the Transaction Manager log files and the Events Manager window. When this option is selected, operators will be prompted to enter their verification codes when an action is performed from the Events Manager. This essentially keeps a log of all Events Manager operators for security purposes.

Low Disk Space Check at (MB) Enable Point Location Display Enable Verification Codes

Table 3-1. System Parameters Configuration > General Tab (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

22

Operator Configuration

Option
Enable PNR (Point Not Reset) Task

Description
With this option selected, when a point has triggered an alarm, an event (with specific priority) is created. If that priority has configured PNR Time for two minutes, then two minutes after the operator has completed the action on the above mentioned alarm, a warning message PNR Time Out will be generated. Configure Event Priority Data... Page 67. When this option is selected, a printout of each event or transaction will be printed as soon as they occur. Click Printer Selection to setup printer parameters. Opens the standard Windows Print Setup dialog box to allow you to determine on which printer the real time log will be printed.

Enable Real Time Log Printing

Disable System Tasks Disable Auto Card Download

When this flag is ticked it disables all system tasks. For example, can be used while running system tests. When this flag is NOT ticked and an unknown card is attempted to be used, GMS will automatically search the cardholder database for the card. If found, GMS will automatically download the details to the system. The next time the card is attempted to be used, it will work. Tick this flag to NOT use the remote server as a monitoring work station. This means that at any stated time at least one work station must be running GMS. When this option is selected, a remote server is activated in the event of a field controller breakdown. You can choose to manually reset when the field controller comes online. In the event of a field controller breakdown the automatic switch to a remote server will step in after the selected amount of minutes. Min = 1, max = 255.

Dont use Remote Server as Monitoring w/ s Manual Switch from Backup to Active Mode Automatic Switch over Time (Min)

Number of Keyholders

Choose how many keyholders will be allowed for this particular site. Allowed inputs are 8, 16, 24 and 32.

Table 3-1. System Parameters Configuration > General Tab (continued) 3. Either accept the minimum default values or enter customized values.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4. Click OK to accept values or Cancel to ignore changes and exit to the Setup Wizard.

23

3.2.2. Logon Tab


Under the Logon tab you configure basic operator access requirements. To configure the logon system parameters, proceed as follows. 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight System Parameters using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > System Parameters.... The System Parameter Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Select the Logon tab. The logon system parameters will be displayed.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

24

Operator Configuration

Figure 3-3. System Parameters Configuration > Logon Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

25

Option
Operator Independence

Description
When this option is selected, the operator can customize their individual desktop's window size and colors. Parameters cannot be customized by the operator when this option is selected. When this option is selected, operators will be prompted to enter their Personal Identification Number (PIN) when a system command is performed (i.e. a command going to the field controller). This is dependent on the operator's privileges. For example, if you wish to force day mode during the normal night mode operation, your PIN will be requested to confirm that you have access to make this system command.

Operator PIN Enabled

Logon Fail Alarm Enable

When this option is selected, an alarm is generated if an operator logon fails the number of times set in Logon Attempts. Example: if Logon Attempts is set to 1 the alarm will go off immediately after the first failed logon attempt.

All types of Passwords Allowed

The stdpw.str message file contains certain passwords that are commonly guessed by system intruders. Generally, these types of passwords are not available. When this option is selected, all types of passwords are allowed, even those included in the stdpw.str file. The system automatically generates a password. When a password expires, a previous one cannot be used again. This helps to avoid security issues. An initial password is created when the system administrator creates the new user. This password can only be used once and the user must change their password when they log on the first time.

Auto Password Generation No Reuse of Password Must Change Password at First Logon

Table 3-2. System Parameters Configuration > Logon Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

26

Operator Configuration

Option
Allow Last Operator to Logoff

Description
If this box is not checked one workstation must always be running. This could be the case in a control room where several operators and shifts are monitoring the alarms. If the last operator that is logged on try to log off an error message is generated.

When this box is checked it allows the last operator to log off. An example when this is useful could be when the night alarms are overseen by an outsourced monitoring centre. Auto Logoff Time (Mins) If the user has not been active on the system for the assigned amount of time the user will be logged off automatically. This flag does not work on a stand alone system. Logon Attempts The number of attempts allowed for logging on. When this number is exceeded, the Logon Fail Actions (see below) that are selected will be activated. The minimum number of characters or digits acceptable for use in an operator's password or PIN. Min = 1, max = 8 numerical characters.

Min Password/PIN Digits

Note: Please observe that to support 8 character PINs the minimum system requirements are GMS V3.10 and field controller V3.06 or later.
Authorization Auto Logoff Time (Mins) The amount of time before the authorization password and its authority will time out. This flag does not work on a stand alone system. Enter System Password (Max 8 digits) Choose a password for the logon with a maximum of 8 digits.

Table 3-2. System Parameters Configuration > Logon Tab (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

27

Option
Logon Using

Description
Choose what details to use when logging on to the system, the Initials, example CB, Full Name, example Charles Brown, or Display Name, example Night Operator 1.

Logon Fail Actions

The selected options below will be actioned if an operator fails to successfully logon after the accepted number of attempts. See Logon Attempts above. A dialog box with the message Attempt to logon failed !! is displayed. After the configured number of allowed attempts to logon have failed, the Operator-1 Logon dialog box is closed. Go to GMS main menu User > Operator-1 Logon for further attempts. Locks any further logon attempts from the denied operator for the amount of time stated under Operator Lockup Time (hh:mm) below. Locks any further logon attempts from all and any operators for the amount of time stated under Operator Lockup Time (hh:mm) below. The time GMS will remain locked after an operator's logon attempt fails more times than stated in parameter Logon Attempts above.

Generate Warning Message Restart Logon Process

Lockup the Operator

Lockup the System

Operator Lockup Time (hh:mm)

Table 3-2. System Parameters Configuration > Logon Tab (continued) 3. 4. Either accept the minimum default values or enter customized values. Click OK to accept new values or Cancel to ignore changes and exit to the Setup Wizard.

3.2.3. Access Control Tab


Under the Access Control tab you configure access card preferences and how to display the cards used by cardholders in the physically monitored areas. To configure the access control parameters, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

28

Operator Configuration 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight System Parameters using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > System Parameters.... The System Parameter Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Select the Access Control tab. The card parameters will be displayed.

2.

Figure 3-4. System Parameters Configuration > Access Control Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

29

Option
Display Card Using Card Transaction Display Options Enable Operator Partition

Description
Choose to display card by either Card Number or Printed Number. Choose the preference of how to display the card transactions, by card details (Option 1), and/or cardholder details (Option 2) and/ or by department (Option 3). Tick this box to enable operators to view only assigned sites with their related cards and cardholders. The sites the operator is allowed to view are chosen under Configure an Operator... Page 31. Removes a prompt that appears when an operator saves a GRG, asking if you wish to save a GAG with the same name as the GRG you just created. Figure 6-26 When selected, if a card is re-issued, all Access Levels will be copied from the old card to the re-issued card.

Disable Auto Creation of GAG from GRGs Same Access Level For ReIssued Cards

Table 3-3. System Parameters Configuration > Access Control Tab 3. 4. Either accept the minimum default values or enter customized values. Click OK to accept values or Cancel to ignore changes and exit to the Setup Wizard.

3.3.

Configure User Defined Words


You can configure GMS to define words, terms and abbreviations to the standards that fit your organization. Your organization may use specific terms or abbreviations to describe elements and occurrences in your system such as actions, alarms, events, modes, etc. These can sometimes differ to the default terms used by GMS. For example, some organizations may refer to an unsealed site as being in Day Mode. Others may refer to this mode as Premises Unset. Configure GMS to display the terms and abbreviations your organization commonly uses. To define the text that is displayed by GMS, proceed as following.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

30

Operator Configuration 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight User Defined Words using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > User Defined Words.... The User Defined Words dialog box will be displayed.

2.

Figure 3-5. User Defined Words Dialog Box 3. Highlight the word you want to re-define in the Default Words list. The Default Words list contains all default words, terms and abbreviations for the various modes of operation in GMS. Each word is shown in both the full and shortened versions (separated by a comma). Full words can be up to 32 characters in length. Short words can be up to 16 characters in length. In the New Words text field enter your organizations terminology for the default term you highlighted. Enter both full and shortened version separated by comma. The new words and terms you define will instantly be displayed in the User Defined Words list. The words, terms and abbreviations displayed in this list are the words that will appear in your GMS. To view the original (default) term for a User Defined Words, highlight the word in the User Defined Words list, and the default term will be highlighted in the Default Words list. Repeat steps 3-4 for each word you want to re-define. Click OK to save the changes and exit the User Defined Words dialog box, or Cancel to exit without saving.

4.

5.

6. 7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

31

3.4.

Configure an Operator
You must set up a user account for every GMS operator. User accounts, or privilege profiles as they are also known, reflect the authority a user has within GMS and the actions they have access to perform. Privilege profiles dictate whether a user can send commands to network elements, edit files and parameters and view site maps. Only the commands and actions included in a user's privilege profile will be available while they are logged on to GMS. Other commands will be unavailable (greyed out), or will not be displayed. This protects the security of the system. A user account includes the information categories: Details - The personal details of the operator such as contact details, operator PIN and password. This is also where the operator partitioning is set, i.e. what sites this particular operator will be able to view and action. Privileges - The functions and editing privileges for each function this operator is granted. Customize - This is where the operator can customize their view of GMS. Partitioning - This is where you configure the partition the operator should be able to access. This tab is only visible if System Parameters > Access Control > Enable Operator Partition has been ticked.

You must have Edit authorization set by the top level user to configure operator details.

Note: The default initials and password (nk and UR12 respectively) identify the top level user. The top level user has access to all levels of GMS. You MUST change the default Operator-1 (default) initials and password as soon as possible. This will protect the security of your system and security network.
When configuring operator details, you can include different areas of security for GMS, such as: A PIN can be assigned to each user to control access to system commands. This is an additional security option that is set for specific commands by the supervisor at their discretion. Menus can be customized, and access to certain commands can be restricted. A site range can also be defined for each user. The site range is the number of field controllers (branches) a user will monitor or be responsible for. Typically the site range defines a state, province or region.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

32

Operator Configuration As an additional security feature any GMS command can be configured to request a second user's password and initials before the command can be executed. This is known as dual-password access. The second user is referred to as Operator-2. Operator-2 can be any user ID with command authorization. Operator-2 can only log on once an initial user (Operator-1) has logged on.

Because dual-password access is usually set for only a few critical commands which are used infrequently, the system will automatically log off Operator-2 five minutes after they log on.

Note: Access to the Operator command should be restricted to the top level user only. This is achieved by using the Operator command to set User-1 as the only password with access to this command. After this has been done, when other users log on, they will find this command faded (dimmed), thus making it unavailable for selection.

3.4.1. Configure Details Tab


The Details tab displays personal information about the operator, including passwords, expiry dates of their account, and the site ranges for which they are responsible. To configure a new or existing operators details proceed as follows. 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight Operator using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > Operator.... The Operator Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

33

Figure 3-6. Operator Configuration

Option

Description
Click to create a new operator. Highlight and click Edit to edit existing operator. Highlight and click Delete to delete existing operator. A confirmation dialog box will appear before deleting. Highlight and click Copy to use current operator as a template. It will copy that operators privileges and customized options. This is very useful when creating the same type of operator as may already exist. It reduces the risk for missing a privilege or giving too much access to a new operator. Click to close the Operator Configuration window.

Table 3-4. Operator Configuration Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

34

Operator Configuration 3. To create a new operator click Add, or to edit an existing operator click Edit. The Operator Setup window will open with the Details tab as default with either empty text fields or with some information entered, depending on whether you chose to add or edit an operator.

4.

Figure 3-7. Operator Configuration > Operator Setup > Details Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

35

Option
Operator No

Description
Automatically displays the number assigned to the operator for identification purposes. This number is automatically generated by the system. Enter the operator's surname. These will automatically display as capital letters. Min = 1, max = 20. This field is mandatory.

Last Name

Initials

Enter the operator's initials. These will automatically display as capital letters. These are the initials that an operator will use to log on to GMS. Min = 1, max = 2. This field is mandatory.

Address

Enter the operator's personal address. Type the full address, including the street number, street name, suburb and post code. Min = 0, max = 50.

Telephone

Enter the operator's contact phone number. This may be a home number or work number, this is up to the discretion of your individual organization. Min = 1, max = 20 alphanumeric characters. When a phone number is entered the dial button appears behind the text field. Click on the button to select among available numbers in the Phone Number List dialog box and click Dial to call directly from GMS.

Password

Enter a password for the operator. Passwords are case sensitive and will display as a series of asterisks. This is the password that an operator will use to log on to GMS. Ideally it should be different than the value in Initials. When you move on to the next tab or close this window a dialog box will be displayed where you will need to re-enter the password and click OK to confirm the password. Min = 1, max = 16 alphanumeric characters. This field is mandatory.

Table 3-5. Operator Configuration > Details Tab Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

36

Operator Configuration

Option
PIN

Description
This PIN is used only when Operator PIN Enabled is enabled in GMS System Parameter (Logon tab) Logon Tab... Page 23. When enabled, if an operator wishes to perform remote actions on a site on the System Summary screen (e.g. using the system keypad from a site map) then the operator will be prompted to enter this PIN. To enable the use of this PIN, in the GMS main menu select Setup > System Parameter.... The System Parameter Configuration window will be displayed. Select the Logon tab and check Operator PIN Enabled. Min = 1, max = 8 positive integers. This field is mandatory.

Password Expiry

The date the operator's password will expire. A default date is entered for a new operator that is valid one year from the creation date. If you wish to edit the existing date enter a new one in format dd/mm/yyyy. The date the operator's GMS usage will expire. A default date is entered for a new operator that is valid one year from the creation date. If you wish to edit the existing date enter a new one in format dd/mm/yyyy. Enter the name that will appear in the title bar when the operator is logged on to GMS. It can be the operators full name or a role title such as Night Operator 1. Min = 0, max = 31 alphanumeric characters.

Account Expiry

Display Name

Verification Code

Enter a verification code for the operator. Operators will be prompted to enter a verification code when they perform an action from the Events Manager module. This essentially keeps a log of all Events Manager operators for security purposes. Min = 0, max = 8 alphanumeric characters.

Table 3-5. Operator Configuration > Details Tab Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

37

Option
Mobile Phone

Description
Enter the operator's mobile phone number. This may be a personal mobile or a work mobile, this is up to the discretion of your individual organization. Min = 1, max = 20 alphanumeric characters. When a phone number is entered the dial button appears behind the text field. Click on the button to select among available numbers in the Phone Number List dialog box and click Dial to call directly from GMS.

Email

Enter the operator's email address. This should ideally be the operators work email but this is up to the discretion of your individual organization. Min = 1, max = 50 alphanumeric characters. When an email address is entered the mail button appears behind the text field. Click on the button to create a new email message from your default email application with the above mentioned email address already entered.

Logon Hours - To

Enter the hours between which this operator has access to log on to GMS in the 24 hours format hh:mm. Example, 06:00 To 19:00. Enter the Site No. in the first field, and the Area No. in the second field. The Site Map for the entered Site and Area will be displayed whenever the operator logs on to GMS. If an operator is to be allowed to view and action only certain site areas that site range is defined here. The site range is the number of field controllers (branches) a user will monitor or be responsible for. For example, you can define if the operator will only be able to access certain floor levels in a multi level building, or a geographical area such as a state or a country.

Site/Area No.

PARTITION

Table 3-5. Operator Configuration > Details Tab Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

38

Operator Configuration

Option
List of Site Groups

Description
Click on the drop-down list to choose from available site groups. If you want to edit an existing site range, click Edit.... The SITE Groups Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Create or edit a site group by entering a new site group name or choosing from existing site groups in the Enter Group Name text field. Enter the site range in the Enter Range text field, e.g. 1-5, or as singular, e.g. 10, 20. Click Apply and choose not to overwrite the current group name. To delete a site group, ensure the group name is displayed in the Enter Group Name text field, then click Delete. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Print to print the current operator account. A report will be created displaying all personal details, a list of all privileges and authorizations, the menu options available to the operator and the configured partition.

Table 3-5. Operator Configuration > Details Tab Parameters (continued) 5. Enter or edit the minimum required information such as: Last Name Initials Password PIN

Note: It is recommended to enter information for as many other fields as possible to improve security as well as communication.
6. Continue to make necessary changes to the Privileges tab and the Customize tab as described in the next two sections. Click Cancel to ignore all changes or OK to save changes and exit to Operator Configuration. Click Close to exit the Operator Configuration. The changes you have made to the operator will be saved.

7.

8.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

39

3.4.2. Configure Privileges Tab


To configure a new or existing operators authorization and privileges proceed as follows. 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight Operator using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > Operator.... The Operator Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

2.

Figure 3-8. Operator Configuration

Option

Description
Click to create a new operator. Highlight and click Edit to edit existing operator.

Table 3-6. Operator Configuration Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

40

Operator Configuration

Option

Description
Highlight and click Delete to delete existing operator. A confirmation dialog box will appear before deleting. Highlight and click Copy to use current operator as a template. It will copy that operators privileges and customized options. This is very useful when creating the same type of operator as may already exist. It reduces the risk for missing a privilege or giving too much access to a new operator. Click to close the Operator Configuration window.

Table 3-6. Operator Configuration Window 3. To create a new operator click Add, or to edit an existing operator click Edit. The Operator Setup window will open with the Details tab as default with either empty text fields or with some information entered, depending on whether you chose to add or edit an operator. Fill in the necessary fields as detailed in Configure Details Tab... Page 32 and then click on the Privileges tab.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

41

Figure 3-9. Operator Configuration > Operator Setup > Privileges Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

42

Operator Configuration

Option
Profiles

Description
From the drop-down list, select an existing profile to assign specific privileges to the operator. Min = 1, max = 31 alphanumeric characters. If an appropriate profile does not exist, create a new profile. Type a new name in the Profiles text box, choose privileges and access modes for each privilege, then click Save Profile. Alternatively, add or delete privileges from an existing profile, type a new name in the Profiles text box, then click Save Profile.

Privileges List

A list of all commands and actions that can be performed within GMS and your security network. Check desired privileges to assign specific privileges to operators. This allows you to control the access that all operators have to the commands and actions in GMS. For each privilege you can assign which access mode the operator should have for each function. Highlight the privilege to which you want to assign an access mode and check one or more of the following: View - allows an operator to view the selected privileges and commands, site maps, files, etc. within GMS. Edit - allows an operator to edit the selected privileges and commands, parameters, files, etc. within GMS. Execute - allows an operator to execute specific commands within GMS, send commands to network elements, etc. Dual Password - means that an operator must have a second operator enter a password before they can access the selected privileges and commands in GMS.

Modes

Example: Highlight the privileges in the Privileges List to which you want the operator to have View access. Check the View box. Click Apply. Repeat this procedure for each mode until all privileges assigned to the operator have one or more modes assigned. Table 3-7. Operator Configuration > Privileges Tab Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

43

Option

Description
Click to apply chosen mode to the highlighted privileges in the Privileges List. Click to select all privileges in the Privileges List. Click to de-select all privileges in the Privileges List. Click Print to print the current operator account. A report will be created displaying all personal details, a list of all privileges and authorizations, the menu options available to the operator and the configured partition.

Table 3-7. Operator Configuration > Privileges Tab Parameters (continued) 5. To create a new privilege profile or to edit an existing profile, in the Profiles drop-down list enter a new profile name or choose from the existing profiles. To assign an operator a privilege, in the Privileges List click the desired privilege name to highlight or check the boxes next to the desired privilege(s), or to assign an operator all privileges click Select All to highlight all privileges and check any box in the Privileges List. Click Deselect All to remove highlight. The checked option will remain. To assign a privilege one or more access modes, in the Privileges List click on the privilege name to highlight desired privileges. They are assigned View and Execute modes by default. Under Modes check (or uncheck) one or more of the modes View, Edit, Execute or Dual Password. Click Apply to assign highlighted privileges the combination modes you just checked. Repeat steps 7-9 for privileges that need other mode combinations. Click Save Profile. The privileges and authorizations you have assigned will be automatically saved as a new profile if you entered a new profile name in the Profiles drop-down list, or saved to a previous profile if you edited an existing profile. This profile can now be used for other operator profiles.

6.

7.

8.

9. 10. 11.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

44

Operator Configuration 12. Continue to make necessary changes to the Customize tab as described in the next section. Click Cancel to exit without assigning this profile to the current operator. If you have created or edited a profile and clicked Save Profile those changes will still remain, or click OK to assign this profile to the current operator and exit to Operator Configuration. Click Close to exit the Operator Configuration. The changes you have made to the operator will be saved.

13.

14.

3.4.3. Configure Customize Tab


The system setup module of GMS provides users with the means to configure the entire security network (i.e. the base station and the various devices attached to it). To further protect the integrity and configuration of your system, you can specify exactly which menu commands and toolbar icons users can access in all GMS modules (e.g. on a need-to-use basis). Customize specific menus for each operator to specify the menus and commands that each user may access. Only the commands you have specified will be displayed when the operator is logged on. All other commands will be unavailable to the operator. To configure a new or existing operators customized GMS menus proceed as follows. 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight Operator using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > Operator.... The Operator Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

45

Figure 3-10. Operator Configuration

Option

Description
Click to create a new operator. Highlight and click Edit to edit existing operator. Highlight and click Delete to delete existing operator. A confirmation dialog box will appear before deleting. Highlight and click Copy to use current operator as a template. It will copy that operators privileges and customized options. This is very useful when creating the same type of operator as may already exist. It reduces the risk for missing a privilege or giving too much access to a new operator. Click to close the Operator Configuration window.

Table 3-8. Operator Configuration Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

46

Operator Configuration 3. To create a new operator click Add, or to edit an existing operator click Edit. The Operator Setup window will open with the Details tab as default with either empty text fields or with some information entered, depending on whether you chose to add or edit an operator. Fill in the necessary fields as detailed in Configure Details Tab... Page 32 and Configure Privileges Tab... Page 39 then click on the Customize tab.

4.

Figure 3-11. Operator Configuration > Operator Setup > Customize Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

47

Option
Template List

Description
A list of the available templates containing different groupings of access to the module menus. Highlight one template and click Assign to give this operator this menu access. Click to assign the highlighted template in the Template List to this operator. Click to create a new template. You can copy an existing template by using the Copy Content arrows and make additional changes or create from scratch. Click to delete the highlighted template in the Template List. A confirmation box will be displayed.

Note: If you delete a template that is assigned to other operators they will be left without access to all GMS menus.
Copy Content When you create a new template you can use an existing template as a foundation creating a new. Use the Copy Content arrows to copy template contents from a template in Template List to the template in Active Template , or the other way around Active Template .

The template this operator is currently assigned. Removes the template displayed in Active Template that the operator is currently assigned. This leaves the operator without access to all GMS menus. Choose a new template to assign from the Template List.

Table 3-9. Operator Configuration > Customize Tab Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

48

Operator Configuration

Option
Available Windows

Description
A list of the GMS modules and their settings for the template displayed in Active Template. Highlight the desired module and click Customize... to tailor the menus in the Active Template text field. Click Customize... to adapt the highlighted module in Available Windows. The settings are made in the Customize Menu : [module (Operator)] dialog box. Click Print to print the current operator account. A report will be created displaying all personal details, a list of all privileges and authorizations, the menu options available to the operator and the configured partition.

Table 3-9. Operator Configuration > Customize Tab Parameters (continued) 5. To create a new template click New... and enter an appropriate name in the New Template dialog box. Click OK. In Template List make sure your new template is highlighted and click Assign to enter the template in the Active Template text field. In Available Windows highlight the GMS module you wish to add to this template and click Customize.... The Customize Menu : [module (Operator)] dialog box will be displayed.

6.

7.

Figure 3-12. Customize Tab > Customize Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

49

Option
Original Menu Customized Menu

Description
The menu options available to choose from in the current module. Click + to expand the menu and - to collapse. The menu options chosen to be accessible in the current template. Click to copy a single highlighted menu item in Original Menu to Customized Menu to become part of the template. Click to copy the highlighted main menu item and its suboptions in Original Menu to Customized Menu to become part of the template. Example: If &File is highlighted it will copy its entire dropdown list. If Site &Map|F11 (under &File) is highlighted it will copy its parent menus entire drop-down list.

Click to remove the highlighted menu item in Customized Menu from the template. Click to print the current template. The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. This will print a list of the menu options accessible in this template. Table 3-10. Customize Tab > Customize Menu 8. Add the desired menu items to the Customized Menu and click OK.

Note: A recommended minimum is to add the entire &File menu to the new template.
9. Repeat steps 7-8 with all GMS modules you wish to add to the new template.

Note: The Customized Menu list is how the GMS menu will be displayed when the operator is logged on. Take care to carefully check the menu options you have selected before you continue.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

50

Operator Configuration 10. In the Operator Setup dialog box click OK if you are satisfied with this template for this operator or Cancel to not assign this new template to the current operator. The new template you just created is however saved in the Template List. Click Close to exit the Operator Configuration. The changes you have made to the operator will be saved.

11.

3.4.4. Configure Partitioning Tab


Note: This tab is only visible if the Enable Operator Partition check box under System Parameters - Access Control tab has been ticked.
To configure a new or existing operators accessibility proceed as follows. 1. In the GMS main menu go to Setup > System Parameters > Access Control tab and make sure Enable Operator Partition is checked. Click OK. In the GMS main menu select Setup > Operator..., or in the Setup Wizard highlight Operator using Back or Next, then click Configure.... The Operator Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

2.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

51

Figure 3-13. Operator Configuration

Option

Description
Click to create a new operator. Highlight and click Edit to edit existing operator. Highlight and click Delete to delete existing operator. A confirmation dialog box will appear before deleting. Highlight and click Copy to use current operator as a template. It will copy that operators privileges and customized options. This is very useful when creating the same type of operator as may already exist. It reduces the risk for missing a privilege or giving too much access to a new operator. Click to close the Operator Configuration window.

Table 3-11. Operator Configuration Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

52

Operator Configuration 4. To create a new operator click Add, or to edit an existing operator click Edit. The Operator Setup window will open with the Details tab as default with either empty text fields or with some information entered, depending on whether you chose to add or edit an operator. Fill in the necessary fields as detailed in Configure Details Tab... Page 32 and then click on the Partitioning tab.

5.

Figure 3-14. Operator Configuration > Operator Setup > Partitioning Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

53

Option
Readers Time Zones Card Types Card Group

Description
Click on the drop-down list of existing Reader Groups to choose a reader partition for this operator. Click on the drop-down list of existing time zones to choose a time zones partition for this operator. Click on the drop-down list of existing card types to choose a card partition for this operator. Click on the drop-down list of existing card groups to choose a cardholder groups partition for this operator. Click to create a new group. Click Print to print the current operator account. The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. This will print all personal details, a list of all privileges and authorizations, the menu options available to the operator and the configured partition.

Table 3-12. Operator Configuration > Partitioning Tab Parameters 6. Choose a partition for each group in the available drop-down lists. If the desired partition has not been created you can do so here by clicking on . For the Readers, Time Zones and Card Types groups the Partition window will open.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

54

Operator Configuration

Figure 3-15. Operator Configuration > Partitioning > Partition

Option
Name

Description
Enter name of the new group you wish to create. Min = 1, max = 63 alpha numeric characters. Click to save the new group you named in Name. Click to delete the group that is currently displayed in the Name drop-down list. It will affect all operators that have been assigned a partition that includes that group. A confirmation pop-up will be displayed to give you a chance to change your mind before deleting.

Table 3-13. Operator Configuration > Partitioning > Partition

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

55

Option
Available Selected

Description
Displays all available entities that you can create a new group from. Displays the entities that you have chosen for this new group. With the arrows you can move the entities to either be part of or be removed from the group you are creating.

Table 3-13. Operator Configuration > Partitioning > Partition 7. In the Partition window enter a name for the group you wish to create in the Name drop-down list. From the Available list select the entities that will constitute the new group. Highlight an entity and copy it over to Selected by clicking the right arrow. To remove an entity from the Selected list, highlight it then click the left arrow. Click Save to save the group. To add a new partition to the Card Group click on Configuration window. to open the Cardholder Group

8.

9. 10.

11.

Choose site areas from the drop-down list. Alternatively to create a new cardholder group, enter a name in Enter Group Name then enter the range of sites in Enter Range. Click Apply and OK to exit to Operator Setup. In the Operator Setup window, click Cancel to exit without assigning any groups to the current operator. If you have created or edited a group and clicked Save, those changes will still remain, or click OK to assign these groups to the current operator and exit to the Operator Setup window.

12.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

56

Operator Configuration

3.5.

Configure an Authorized Account


An authorized operator has the permission to shut down GMS. This type of operator is also needed if another operator needs dual password to access certain GMS functions. Dual password functions are set under Operator Setup on the Privileges tab. Configure Privileges Tab... Page 39 When you first start up GMS there is a default operator, nk, with password UR12. The GMS administrator must configure the master user (authorization password) immediately after starting up GMS for the first time. This authorized operator can then create all other operators and assign their privileges and access rights. This authorized operator is generally the GMS administrator. To configure an authorized account proceed as follows. 1. In the Setup Wizard highlight Operator using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or in the GMS main menu select Setup > Operator.... The Operator Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

2.

Figure 3-16. Operator Configuration

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

57

Option

Description
Click to create a new operator. Highlight and click Edit to edit existing operator. Highlight and click Delete to delete existing operator. A confirmation dialog box will appear before deleting. Highlight and click Copy to use current operator as a template. It will copy that operators privileges and customized options. This is very useful when creating the same type of operator as may already exist. It reduces the risk for missing a privilege or giving too much access to a new operator. Click to close the Operator Configuration window.

Table 3-14. Operator Configuration Window 3. 4. To create the authorized operator click Add. The Operator Setup window will open with the Details tab as default. Fill in the necessary fields as detailed in Configure Details Tab... Page 32 then click on the Privileges tab.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

58

Operator Configuration

Figure 3-17. Operator Configuration > Operator Setup > Privileges Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

59

Option
Profiles

Description
From the drop-down list, select an existing profile to assign specific privileges to the operator. Min = 1, max = 31 alphanumeric characters. If an appropriate profile does not exist, create a new profile. Type a new name in the Profiles text box, select privileges and access modes for each privilege, then click Save Profile. Alternatively, add or delete privileges from an existing profile, type a new name in the Profiles text box, then click Save Profile.

Privileges List

A list of all commands and actions that can be performed within GMS and your security network. Check desired privileges to assign these specific privileges to operators. This allows you to control the access that all operators have to the commands and actions in GMS. For each privilege you can assign which access mode the operator should have for each function. Highlight the privilege to which you want to assign an access mode and check one or more of the following: View - allows an operator to view the selected privileges and commands, site maps, files, etc. within GMS. Edit - allows an operator to edit the selected privileges and commands, parameters, files, etc. within GMS. Execute - allows an operator to execute specific commands within GMS, send commands to network elements, etc. Dual Password - means that an operator must have a second operator enter a password before they can access the selected privileges and commands in GMS.

Modes

Example: Highlight the privileges in the Privileges List to which you want the operator to have View access. Check the View box. Click Apply. Repeat this procedure for each mode until all privileges assigned to the operator have one or more modes assigned. Table 3-15. Operator Configuration > Privileges Tab Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

60

Operator Configuration

Option

Description
Click to apply chosen mode to the highlighted privileges in the Privileges List. Click to select all privileges in the Privileges List. Click to de-select all privileges in the Privileges List. Click Print to print the current operator account. A report will be created displaying all personal details, a list of all privileges and authorizations, the menu options available to the operator and the configured partition.

Table 3-15. Operator Configuration > Privileges Tab Parameters (continued) 5. To create the authorized profile, in the Profiles drop-down list enter a new profile name. Examples can be Master or Administrator. To assign the operator all privileges click Select All to highlight all privileges. To assign the privileges full access modes, under Modes click View, Edit and Execute. Click Apply to assign the privileges the combination modes you selected. Click Save Profile. The privileges and authorizations you have assigned will be automatically saved as a new profile under the profile name you entered in the Profiles drop-down list. Continue to make necessary changes to the Customize tab as described in Configure Customize Tab... Page 44. Continue to make necessary changes to the Partitioning tab as described in Configure Partitioning Tab... Page 50. Click OK to assign the current operator this authorized profile and exit to the Operator Configuration window. Click Close to exit the Operator Configuration window. The changes you have made to the operator will be saved.

6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

This master/administrator operator can now create all other operators and assign them restricted privileges and access.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

61

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

62

Operator Configuration

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

63

Chapter 4 System Configuration


Before you use GMS, it needs to be configured with initial data and specific parameters to operate successfully and at its optimal performance. This configuration can be performed manually, or with the help of a setup wizard. For initial configuration (i.e. the first time you configure GMS) you should configure the system in the order set out by the previous chapter Operator Configuration... Page 17 followed by the order set up in this chapter. The GMS Setup Wizard will help you configure the system in this order. For subsequent configuration and maintenance, you can manually configure any area of the system in any order. This chapter details the configurations necessary to operate GMS. These settings are normally only available to an administrator type operator. The sections are: Alarm Priorities - All alarms and events in GMS are given a level of priority that presents the level of security risk it presents to a remote site. This priority indicates the type of alarm occurring. This priority is displayed in the Events Manager window when an alarm occurs. This allows operators to assess the security risk of the situation at a glance, and action the situation accordingly. Event Priority Data - After you have assigned a priority to each type of alarm in your system, you can change the appearance of these priority types to emphasize the importance of specific priority types. For example, you may choose to display alarms of a higher priority as a distinctive color (such as red) to highlight the importance of an alarm of this priority to operators. You may choose to make alarms of some priorities flash to further emphasize their importance. Configuring Event Priority Data allows you to configure the appearance of event messages displayed in Events Manager according to their priority. You can also use this command to configure the action response time required by an operator for specific events. Event Dispatch Scheme - The Event Dispatch Scheme allows you to configure the order of workstations to which events are dispatched to be actioned as they occur. This means that as soon as an alarm occurs, it is displayed on the operator screen that you have indicated in the Event Dispatch Scheme. By indicating the specific criteria used to dispatch events to operators, you can ensure that events of a higher priority and security risk are actioned by more experienced operators. Other events of less priority can be sent to any operator to be actioned.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

64

System Configuration System Tasks - Some tasks within GMS must be completed on a regular basis. You can configure GMS to automatically run these tasks, to ensure they are regularly completed. These are known as system tasks, and include such tasks as isolating points, locking card readers, and backing up system data files. Other GMS configurations - Optional GMS Configuration You can perform additional system configuration on individual operator workstations. This configuration is optional, and is operator independent (i.e. activated when a user logs on to a workstation). Individual operators can choose to change the appearance of the: Events Manager module, Summary Manager module, Operator response screen Change authorization password Change your own password Change communications baud rate Select printer Editing system data files Resizing maps automatically Display site id number Change GMS time out parameters

4.1.

Configure Alarm Priorities


All alarms and events in GMS are given a level of priority. This priority indicates the type of alarm occurring, and the level of security risk it presents to a remote site. This priority is displayed in the Events Manager window when an alarm occurs. This allows operators to assess the security risk of the situation at a glance, and action the situation accordingly. Priorities should be: 1. Industrial supervision where there is a risk of injury to persons, damage or destruction of property Hold-up or panic alarm Burglar alarm Watchman tour

2. 3. 4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 5. 6. Burglar-alarm supervision Industrial supervision where a risk of injury to persons, damage or destruction of property will not be involved. See UL 1076 for further details.

65

Note: This priority order needs to be followed for UL installations.


Configuring message priorities allows you to assign a level of priority to different types of GMS alarm messages. To configure message priorities, proceed as follows. 1. To use the Setup Wizard to configure message priorities, from the GMS main menu select Setup > Wizard. The Setup Wizard will be displayed. Click Next until Alarm Priorities is chosen, or If you are not using the Setup Wizard to configure message priorities, in the Events Manager from the Configure... button menu select the Alarm Priorities... command.

2.

Figure 4-1. Alarm Priorities

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

66

System Configuration 3. Highlight Alarm Priorities using Back or Next, then click Configure.... The Alarm Priority Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-2. Alarm Priority Configuration 4. Click the Pacom Message Category drop-down list to display a list of the available alarm message categories. These categories indicate a group of alarms and can affect the alarm priority, e.g. external alarms would be given a higher priority than status messages. By grouping messages together and giving the group a set of priorities, you make the task of setting priorities at a later stage an easier process. Select one of the categories from this list. From the Message drop-down list, select a description of the event/alarm type you want to add to the category. This description will appear in the Events Manager window, and indicates the type of alarm to the operator who can then perform the appropriate action required. From the Message Group drop-down list (if applicable), select an option. Messages are grouped together with alarms of similar types. In the Priorities section, enter the relevant Alarm, Reset and Isolate priorities for the message/alarm group in the Mode/Status boxes. If you want to use the same priorities as those displayed by another Pacom Message Category, select the Pacom Message Group from which you want to copy alarm priorities, then click Copy. Select the new Pacom Message Category to which you want to copy the priorities, then click Paste. The priorities will be displayed in the Priorities section.

5.

6.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 8.

67

In the Alarm Printers section, select the printer to which a record of the alarm will be printed when it occurs. If you want to print a copy of the priorities configured for each alarm, click Print. The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select the appropriate printer and setup. (Refer to your Windows documentation if you require further information about using this screen.) After you have printed, the Alarm Priority Configuration dialog box will be re-displayed. If you want to set alarm/message priorities for another Pacom Message Category, follow steps 3-8. Click OK to save these changes and exit the Alarm Priority Configuration dialog box, or Cancel to exit without saving. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure alarm/message priorities, it will be redisplayed. Click Next to display the next configuration option in the list. (See the following sections for further information about configuring this option.) To exit the Setup Wizard, click Cancel. The changes you have made to alarm/message priorities details will be saved.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

4.2.

Configure Event Priority Data


After you have assigned a priority to each type of alarm in your system, you can change the appearance of these priority types to emphasize the importance of specific priority types. For example, you may choose to display alarms of a higher priority as a distinctive color (such as red) to highlight the importance of an alarm of this priority to operators. You may choose to make alarms of some priorities flash to further emphasize their importance. Configuring Event Priority Data allows you to configure the appearance of event messages displayed in Events Manager according to their priority. You can also use this command to configure the action response time required by an operator for specific events. To edit the appearance of event priority data, proceed as follows. 1. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure the appearance of event priority data, from the GMS main menu select Setup > Wizard. The Setup Wizard will be displayed, or If you are not using the Setup Wizard to configure the appearance of event priority data, in the Events Manager from the Configure... button menu select the Event Priority Data... option.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

68

System Configuration

Figure 4-3. System Parameters Options 2. Highlight Event Priority Data... using Back or Next, then click Configure.... The Priority Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

69

Figure 4-4. Priority Configuration 3. The alarm priorities available in GMS are displayed in the Priority No. column. To display more alarm priority numbers in the Priority No. column, click the arrow buttons (<< and >>). The total number of priorities available is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the dialog box. By default, up to 32 priorities can be configured. This can be increased to up to 255 by going to Setup > System Parameters. To change the color of a bitmap, double click the color box next to the corresponding priority number you want to change. The Color Selection dialog box will be displayed.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

70

System Configuration

Figure 4-5. Color Selection 5. From the Color Palette, select the new color of the bitmap. The selected color will be displayed in the Foreground Color box. Click OK to assign this new color, or Cancel to exit without saving. The Priority Configuration dialog box will be re-displayed. To change the color of an event message as it will be displayed in Events Manager, click the priority message you want to change from the Message Color column. The Color Selection dialog box will be displayed. From the Color Palette, select the new color of the alarm message. The selected color will be displayed in the Foreground Color box. Click OK to assign this new color, or Cancel to exit without saving. The Priority Configuration dialog box will be redisplayed. To make an event message of a specific priority flash (this may indicate a high priority), click the Flash check box next to the corresponding priority number. A checkmark will be displayed when the Flash option is selected. To display more options for the appearance of alarm/event messages in Events Manager, click Options. The Event Summary Options dialog box will be displayed.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

71

Figure 4-6. Event Summary Options

Parameter
Event Sorting Higher the No., Higher the Priority Highlight Last Event

Description
Tick for descending order. Un-tick for ascending order. Event priorities are numbered between 1-256. Tick to set the highest event priority to 256 and the lowest to 1. Do not tick to set the highest event priority to 1 and the lowest to 256. Tick to highlight the last occurred event in the Events Manager. If the site has many events occurring at a rapid pace then the highlight will move across the screen accordingly. Tick to add displayed operator instructions for that specific event in the event log. Useful to cross check what an operator did and what they are suppose to do.

Put Operator Instructions in the Log

Table 4-1. Event Summary Options Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

72

System Configuration

Parameter
Do Not Create Separate Event for Areas

Description
A field controller can be separated into 8 areas. If this option is checked, GMS would create one event for all alarms from all areas of every site or else separate event for alarms from different areas of each site. Also, when checked, site contact and site data are not editable for area maps. When checked, the events created from card messages would display the cardholder name, rather than card number. Minimum amount of characters required in the event report is 0, maximum = 255. Timeout value within which if an event is not actioned, GMS would log that work station off. Min = 0, max = 255.

Display Cardholder Name Min Chars in Event Report / Message Text Deadman Timeout (Mins)

Show New Event Alert box for event priority greater than Informational Priority

A New Event Alert box pops up on screen for events with greater priority than or equal to the programmed value. Any alarms with this priority value would not create an event. This is useful for testing purposes. The test engineer can create alarms that the operator can monitor to see if it comes up with the correct priority allocation without the alarm actually being logged as an event. Caution: System administrator should set this value only when they know what they are doing. A separate user privilege is required to edit this field. Min = 0, max = 255.

Table 4-1. Event Summary Options Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

73

Parameter
Priority for Unconfigured Points Unsuspend Event with Alarm Priority >=

Description
If an event occurs from a point that has not been positioned on a map it receives the priority stated here. Available values are 0-255. A suspended event gets unsuspended (and added to the unactioned event list) either when an alarm with higher priority than the current event is received or when the new alarm priority is higher than or equal to this programmed value. Min = 0, max = 255.

Event Escalation Amount

If this value is non zero, then every time an event times out, its priority will be escalated by the programmed amount until reaches to the max value. Min = 0, max = 255.

Table 4-1. Event Summary Options Descriptions (continued) 10. Click the relevant options you want to use, then click OK to save these changes or Cancel to exit without saving. The Priority Configuration dialog box will be redisplayed. To place a time limit on the response time required to action an event of a specific priority, place the cursor in the appropriate Time To Action text box, then type the time (in minutes). An operator must perform the appropriate action within this time limit for events of this priority. The time limit can be set from 0 to 255 minutes. When a time is indicated in the PNR (Point Not Reset) Time text box, a warning will be generated when an alarm has timed out. If an operator fails to action an alarm within the time specified in the Time To Action text box, the warning will remind them of the need to action the alarm situation. Valid range is 0-255. A value of 0 means that the operator is not required to acknowledge the alarm. To assign a sound to alarm situations of specific priorities, click the Sound tab at the top of the dialog box. The Sound tab will be displayed.

11.

12.

13.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

74

System Configuration

Figure 4-7. Priority Configuration > Sound 14. If you want a voice message to sound during the alarm, type the text that you want sounded in the Voice Text text box next to the corresponding priority number. This requires the Microsoft text to speech engine to be installed. If you want a beep to sound during the alarm, indicate the Beep Frequency and the Beep Count in the relevant text boxes next to the corresponding priority number. This means for example that entering a 1 means 1 beep per second. If you want to print a record of the appearance of alarm message priorities in your system, click Print. The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Set the appropriate printer and format. (Refer to your Windows documentation for further information about using this dialog box.) After you have finished printing, the Priority Configuration dialog box will be re-displayed. When you have finished making the appropriate changes to the appearance and action response time of Events Manager messages, click OK to save the changes and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

15.

16.

17.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 18.

75

If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure the appearance of alarm message priorities, it will be re-displayed. Click Next to display the next configuration option in the list. (See the following sections for further information about configuring this option.) To exit the Setup Wizard, click Cancel. The changes you have made to the appearance of alarm/message priorities details will be saved.

19.

4.3.

Configure the Event Dispatch Scheme


The Event Dispatch Scheme allows you to configure the order of workstations to which events are dispatched to be actioned as they occur. This means that as soon as an alarm occurs, it is displayed on the operator screen that you have indicated in the Event Dispatch Scheme. By indicating the specific criteria used to dispatch events to operators, you can ensure that events of a higher priority and security risk are actioned by more experienced operators. Other events of less priority can be sent to any operator to be actioned. To configure the event dispatch scheme, proceed as follows. 1. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure the event dispatch scheme, from the GMS main menu select Setup > Wizard. The Setup Wizard will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

76

System Configuration

Figure 4-8. System Parameters Options 2. Highlight Event Dispatch Scheme using Back or Next, then click Configure..., or If you are not using the Setup Wizard to configure the event dispatch scheme, in the Events Manager from the Configure... button menu select the Event Dispatch Scheme... option. The Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

77

Figure 4-9. Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration 3. From the Event Dispatch Criteria list, select the criteria you want to use to dispatch events to operators as they occur. The criteria by which you can dispatch events are:

Parameter
Event Priority Last Done Round Robin Alarm Type Site Time Zone Site Security Level

Description
GMS dispatches events according to their priority number. GMS dispatches events to the last operator to action an event. GMS dispatches events evenly among the operators one at a time. GMS dispatches events according to the type of alarm. GMS dispatches events according to the time zone of the site sounding the alarm. GMS dispatches events according to the security level of the site sounding the alarm.

Table 4-2. Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

78

System Configuration

Parameter
Workstation Type

Description
GMS dispatches events according to the type of security company workstation being used such as 'ID Badging station' and 'Access control workstation' and 'Guard workstation'. GMS dispatches events according to the site group of the site sounding the alarm. Type the number of the default workstation to which events will be dispatched, if the first or next preferred consoles are unavailable or not set. When a site is set to test, all events from that test go to the workstation that is selected here.

Site Group Default Workstation No.

Test Site Workstation No. Trace Site Workstation No. Print

To print the event dispatch scheme you have configured, click Print.

Table 4-2. Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration (continued)

Note: If you select the Last Done or Round Robin criteria, there are no further configuration steps required. Click OK to be taken back to the Setup Wizard.
4. When you have finished configuring the event dispatch scheme, click OK to save the changes you have made and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure the event dispatch scheme, it will be redisplayed. Click Next to display the next configuration option in the list. To exit the Setup Wizard, click Cancel. The changes you have made to the order of workstations to which alarms are sent will be saved.

5.

6.

Refer to the following chapters for details on each event dispatch criteria.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

79

4.3.1. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Event Priority

Figure 4-10. Event Dispatch Criteria - Event Priority

Parameter
Event Priority First Preferred Workstation Next Preferred Workstation

Description
The events are processed on the criteria of their event priority. The workstation group preferred to process the event from that event priority. The workstation group that is the second choice to process the event from that event priority.

Table 4-3. Event Dispatch Criteria - Event Priority To configure the Event Priority criteria, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

80

System Configuration 1. From the First Preferred Workstation drop-down text box in the list, select the workstation group that will process the event. This is the type of workstation that the event will be dispatched to first, according to the criteria you have selected (e.g. Transaction Management, Supervisor, Maintenance). From the Next Preferred Console drop-down text box in the list, select the type of workstation group that will process the event if the First Preferred Workstation is unavailable. If you want to modify the workstation groups displayed in the First Preferred Console and Next Preferred Console text boxes, click Edit. The Workstation Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

2.

3.

Figure 4-11. Workstation Groups Configuration 4. Workstation groups are divided into groups of two or more consoles. Enter a new group name by typing it in the Enter Group Name text box and then enter a range for the new group in the Enter Range text box, or choose a previously used group from the drop-down list in the Enter Group Name text box. Click View All to see all available consoles. The CONSOLE Groups window will be displayed.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

81

Figure 4-12. CONSOLE Groups 6. Highlight the desired console and click Select. The selected console group is now entered in the Enter Group Name text box. Click OK to save and return to the Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration window. To remove the group from the CONSOLE Groups list click Delete.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

82

System Configuration

4.3.2. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Last Done

Figure 4-13. Event Dispatch Criteria - Last Done When you select the Last Done criteria, there are no further configuration steps required. Click OK to be taken back to the Setup Wizard.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

83

4.3.3. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Round Robin

Figure 4-14. Event Dispatch Criteria - Round Robin When you select the Round Robin criteria, there are no further configuration steps required. Click OK to be taken back to the Setup Wizard.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

84

System Configuration

4.3.4. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Alarm Type

Figure 4-15. Event Dispatch Criteria - Alarm Type

Parameter
Alarm Types First Preferred Workstation Next Preferred Workstation

Description
The alarm types the events can activate. The workstation group preferred to process the alarm type. The workstation group that is the second choice to process the alarm type.

Table 4-4. Event Dispatch Criteria - Alarm Type To configure the Alarm Type criteria, proceed as follows. 1. From the First Preferred Workstation drop-down text box in the list, select the workstation group that will process the alarm. This is the type of workstation that the alarm will be dispatched to first, according to the criteria you have selected (e.g. Transaction Management, Supervisor, Maintenance).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2. From the Next Preferred Console drop-down text box in the list, select the type of workstation group that will process the alarm if the First Preferred Workstation is unavailable.

85

3.

If you want to modify the workstation groups displayed in the First Preferred Console and Next Preferred Console text boxes, click Edit. The Workstation Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

Figure 4-16. Workstation Groups Configuration 4. Workstation groups are divided into groups of two or more consoles. Enter a new group name by typing it in the Enter Group Name text box and then enter a range for the new group in the Enter Range text box, or choose a previously used group from the drop-down list in the Enter Group Name text box. Click View All to see all available consoles. The CONSOLE Groups window will be displayed.

5.

Figure 4-17. CONSOLE Groups

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

86

System Configuration 6. Highlight the desired console and click Select. The selected console group is now entered in the Enter Group Name text box. Click OK to save and return to the Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration window. To remove the group from the CONSOLE Groups list click Delete.

7.

4.3.5. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Time Zone

Figure 4-18. Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Time Zone

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

87

Parameter
Site Time Zones First Preferred Workstation Next Preferred Workstation

Description
The time zones where the events can occur. The workstation group preferred to process the event from that time zone. The workstation group that is the second choice to process the event from that time zone.

Table 4-5. Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Time Zone To configure the Site Time Zone criteria, proceed as follows. 1. From the First Preferred Workstation drop-down text box in the list, select the workstation group that will process the event from that time zone. This is the type of workstation that the event will be dispatched to first, according to the criteria you have selected (e.g. Transaction Management, Supervisor, Maintenance). From the Next Preferred Console drop-down text box in the list, select the type of workstation group that will process events from that time zone if the First Preferred Workstation is unavailable. If you want to modify the workstation groups displayed in the First Preferred Console and Next Preferred Console text boxes, click Edit. The Workstation Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

2.

3.

Figure 4-19. Workstation Groups Configuration 4. Workstation groups are divided into groups of two or more consoles. Enter a new group name by typing it in the Enter Group Name text box and then enter a range for the new group in the Enter Range text box or choose a previously used group from the drop-down list in the Enter Group Name text box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

88

System Configuration 5. Click View All to see all available consoles. The CONSOLE Groups window will be displayed.

Figure 4-20. CONSOLE Groups 6. Highlight the desired console and click Select. The selected console group is now entered in the Enter Group Name text box. Click OK to save and return to the Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration window. To remove the group from the CONSOLE Groups list click Delete.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

89

4.3.6. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Security Level

Figure 4-21. Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Security Level

Parameter
Site Security Level First Preferred Workstation Next Preferred Workstation

Description
The events are processed on the criteria of their security levels. The workstation group preferred to process the event from that security level. The workstation group that is the second choice to process the event from that security level.

Table 4-6. Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Security Level To configure the Site Security Level criteria, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

90

System Configuration 1. From the First Preferred Workstation drop-down text box in the list, select the workstation group that will process the event from that security level. This is the type of workstation that the event will be dispatched to first, according to the criteria you have selected (e.g. Transaction Management, Supervisor, Maintenance). From the Next Preferred Console drop-down text box in the list, select the type of workstation group that will process events from that security level if the First Preferred Workstation is unavailable. If you want to modify the workstation groups displayed in the First Preferred Console and Next Preferred Console text boxes, click Edit. The Workstation Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

2.

3.

Figure 4-22. Workstation Groups Configuration 4. Workstation groups are divided into groups of two or more consoles. Enter a new group name by typing it in the Enter Group Name text box and then enter a range for the new group in the Enter Range text box, or choose a previously used group from the drop-down list in the Enter Group Name text box. Click View All to see all available consoles. The CONSOLE Groups window will be displayed.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

91

Figure 4-23. CONSOLE Groups 6. Highlight the desired console and click Select. The selected console group is now entered in the Enter Group Name text box. Click OK to save and return to the Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration window. To remove the group from the CONSOLE Groups list click Delete.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

92

System Configuration

4.3.7. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Workstation Type

Figure 4-24. Event Dispatch Criteria - Workstation Type

Parameter
Workstation Types First Preferred Workstation Next Preferred Workstation

Description
Events are categorized from what workstation type they are activated from. The workstation group preferred to process the event from that workstation type. The workstation group that is the second choice to process the event from that workstation type.

Table 4-7. Event Dispatch Criteria - Workstation Type To configure the Workstation Type criteria, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 1.

93

From the First Preferred Workstation drop-down text box in the list, select the workstation group that will process the event from that workstation type. This is the type of workstation that the event will be dispatched to first, according to the criteria you have selected (e.g. Transaction Management, Supervisor, Maintenance). From the Next Preferred Console drop-down text box in the list, select the type of workstation group that will process events from that workstation type if the First Preferred Workstation is unavailable. If you want to modify the workstation groups displayed in the First Preferred Console and Next Preferred Console text boxes, click Edit. The Workstation Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

2.

3.

Figure 4-25. Workstation Groups Configuration 4. Workstation groups are divided into groups of two or more consoles. Enter a new group name by typing it in the Enter Group Name text box and then enter a range for the new group in the Enter Range text box or choose a previously used group from the drop-down list in the Enter Group Name text box. Click View All to see all available consoles. The CONSOLE Groups window will be displayed.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

94

System Configuration

Figure 4-26. CONSOLE Groups 6. Highlight the desired console and click Select. The selected console group is now entered in the Enter Group Name text box. Click OK to save and return to the Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration window. To remove the group from the CONSOLE Groups list click Delete.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

95

4.3.8. Configure Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Group

Figure 4-27. Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Group

Parameter
Site Groups First Preferred Workstation Next Preferred Workstation

Description
Events are categorized in geographical groups. The workstation group preferred to process the event from that site group. The workstation group that is the second choice to process the event from that site group.

Table 4-8. Event Dispatch Criteria - Site Group To configure the Site Group criteria, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

96

System Configuration 1. From the First Preferred Workstation drop-down text box in the list, select the workstation group that will process the event from that site group. This is the type of workstation that the event will be dispatched to first, according to the criteria you have selected (e.g. Transaction Management, Supervisor, Maintenance). From the Next Preferred Console drop-down text box in the list, select the type of workstation group that will process events from that site group if the First Preferred Workstation is unavailable. If you want to modify the workstation groups displayed in the First Preferred Console and Next Preferred Console text boxes, click Edit. The Workstation Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

2.

3.

Figure 4-28. Workstation Groups Configuration 4. Workstation groups are divided into groups of two or more consoles. Enter a new group name by typing it in the Enter Group Name text box and then enter a range for the new group in the Enter Range text box, or choose a previously used group from the drop-down list in the Enter Group Name text box. Click View All to see all available consoles. The CONSOLE Groups window will be displayed.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

97

Figure 4-29. CONSOLE Groups 6. Highlight the desired console and click Select. The selected console group is now entered in the Enter Group Name text box. Click OK to save and return to the Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration window. To remove the group from the CONSOLE Groups list click Delete.

7.

4.4.

Configure System Tasks


Some tasks within GMS must be completed on a regular basis. You can configure GMS to automatically run these tasks, to ensure they are regularly completed. These are known as system tasks, and include such tasks as isolating points, locking card readers, and backing up system data files. To configure system tasks, proceed as follows. 1. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure the system tasks, from the GMS main menu select Setup > Wizard. The Setup Wizard will be displayed. Highlight System Tasks using Back or Next, then click Configure....

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

98

System Configuration

Figure 4-30. System Parameters Options 2. The Task Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

99

Figure 4-31. Task Configuration 3. From the Available Tasks drop-down text box, select the task you want to automatically activate. A new task may be programmed into this list by positioning the cursor in the Available Tasks drop-down text box, and typing the name of the new task. To disable a task, highlight the task you want to disable from the Available Tasks dropdown list, then select the Disable Task option. Indicate when you want the task to be performed, by selecting an option from the Schedule section (i.e. Yearly, Weekly, Daily, etc.): If you select the Yearly option, type the day and month you want the task to be performed each year, in the text box displayed next to this option (using a dd/mm format).

4.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

100

System Configuration If you select the Monthly option, type the day you want the task to be performed each month, in the text box displayed next to this option (using a dd format). If you select the Weekly option, highlight the day you want the task to be performed each week, in the text box displayed next to this option. If you select the Daily option, indicate whether you want the task to be performed on public holidays, by selecting the Include Holidays option displayed next to the Daily option.

6.

In the Schedule Time text box, type the time you want the task to be performed (using a HH:MM format). In the Unschedule Time text box, type the time the task must be finished (using a HH:MM format). Leaving this text box blank means that the task will not automatically end (i.e. a reverse command of he task you are performing). From the Task Type drop-down list, select the event or task that must be performed. If you select the System Commands option from this list, the System drop-down list located in the Task section will become available. Select a relevant system command from this list. Indicate the site(s) at which you want the task to be performed (if applicable): If you want the task to be performed at a single site, de-select the Group option, then type the site number in the Site No. text box. If you want the task to be performed at a group of sites, select the Group option, then select a site group from the Site Group drop-down list. To change a site group's name or range, click Select. The Site Groups Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

7.

8.

9.

Figure 4-32. Site Groups Configuration To change a site group's name, type a new name in the Enter Group Name text box. To edit the range of sites in a site group, type the new range in the Enter Range text box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

101

Click Apply to apply these changes, then OK to exit this screen, or Cancel to exit without saving. The Task Configuration dialog box will be re-displayed.

10.

Indicate the point(s) at which you want the task to be performed (if applicable): If you want the task to be performed to a single point, de-select the Group option, then type the point number in the Point No. text box. If you want the task to be performed to a group of points, select the Group option, then select a point group from the Point Group drop-down list. To change a point group's configuration, click Select. The INPUT Groups dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-33. INPUT Groups To delete a point group, highlight the point, then click Delete. To edit a point group, highlight its location from the Site Group list, then click Edit. The INPUT Groups Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Edit the point groups accordingly. Click Close to exit the INPUT Groups dialog box. The Task Configuration dialog box will be re-displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

102

System Configuration 11. If you want to save the changes you have made as a new Available Task for future use, ensure a task name is displayed in the Available Tasks drop-down text box at the top of the screen, then click Save. The task will be saved as a new system task, with its frequency indicated by a letter (i.e. Y = yearly task, M = monthly task, W = weekly task, D = daily task, and H = holiday task). If you want to delete an existing system task, ensure the task you want to delete is displayed in the Available Tasks drop-down text box, then click Delete. If you want to copy the details to create a new system task, click Copy. Type the name of the new system task and change any details accordingly. Click Save to save the new task. Click Close to close the Task Configuration dialog box. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure system tasks, it will be re-displayed. Click Next to display the next configuration option in the list. (See the following sections for further information about configuring this option.) To exit the Setup Wizard, click Cancel. The changes you have made to system tasks will be saved.

12.

13.

14. 15.

16.

4.5.

Exiting the Setup Wizard


To exit the Setup Wizard, proceed as follows. 1. If you are using the Setup Wizard to configure GMS, the Next button will change to a Finish button when you reach the last option in the configuration options list. To exit the Setup Wizard and finish the configuration process, click Finish. The Setup Wizard will close.

2.

Note: The Finish button simply finishes the configuration process and closes the Setup Wizard. It does not save changes made to your system. Changes to your system configuration are saved when you click OK within each individual configuration dialog box.
3. Alternatively, you can click Cancel in the Setup Wizard at any stage in the configuration process to exit the Setup Wizard without completing the full configuration process.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

103

Note: Clicking Cancel cancels the Setup Wizard process only. It does not cancel any changes you have already made to your system configuration.
4. Restart GMS to implement the changes you have made to system configuration.

Note: You MUST restart GMS to implement the changes you have made to the system configuration.

4.6.

Change the Authorization Password


The authorization password prevents unauthorized shutdown and restricts access to high security areas of GMS. It also restricts access to other programs and files on your PC. This is especially useful if you are sharing your GMS PC with other users. GMS requests the authorization password before the program can be shutdown (exited). You will also be prompted for the authorization password if you attempt to switch between Windows applications while GMS is running. There are three possible authorization options: a pop-up requesting authorization name and password before exiting GMS (this is the default level), a pop-up asking to confirm exiting of GMS, and instant shut-down without need of confirmations or passwords.

The authorization password can only be set by the top level user (User-1). The default initials and password are nk and UR12 respectively.

Note: You must change the default initials and password as soon as possible to protect the security of your network.

Note: Once the authorization password is entered, the additional authorized functions are only active for five minutes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

104

System Configuration To set or change the authorization password, proceed as follows. 1. In the GMS main window select File > Authorization Password. The Enter (or Edit) Authorization Password dialog box will be displayed. This is to ensure that only users with access to the current authorization password can change the password.

Note: If you do not have Edit privileges for the authorization password, the Authorization Password option will be greyed out and unavailable.
2. In the Initials text box, type the existing authorization initials (two alphabetic characters max.). In the Password text box, type the existing authorization password (8 alphanumeric characters max.). Click OK to acknowledge this existing authorization password. If this is the correct password, the Edit Authorization Password dialog box will be displayed.

3.

4.

Figure 4-34. Edit Authorization Password 5. In the Initials text box, type the new authorization initials (two alphabetic characters max.). In the Password text box, type the new authorization password (eight alphanumeric characters max.). Passwords are case sensitive and are encrypted so they will display as a series of asterisks. Click OK to save the new authorization password and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

6.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

105

Note: To disable the authorization pop-up, do not enter any details in the Edit Authorization Password dialog. Just click OK with the fields empty. This will disable the need to authorize with a name and password and enable the confirmation pop-up that only requires you to click OK or Cancel.

Note: Store the authorization password in a safe place. Possession of the authorization password in the wrong hands can compromise the security of your entire network. Contact Pacom Systems if you lose or forget your authorization password.
To disable all needs for confirmation to exit GMS, proceed as follows. 1. 2. In the GMS.ini file add the line No Message box for GMS Shutdown = 1. Save the GMS.ini file and close. Restart GMS.

4.7.

Optional GMS Configuration


You can perform additional system configuration on individual operator workstations. This configuration is optional, and is operator independent (i.e. activated when a user logs on to a workstation). Individual operators can choose to change the appearance of the: Events Manager module Summary Manager module Operator response screen

(See the sections below for further information about configuring each of these areas.)

Note: To perform the above actions, operators must be given Operator Independence, an option set in System Parameters.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

106

System Configuration

4.7.1. Configure the Events Manager Module


In the Events Manager module, you can configure: the column headers (these determine the information displayed in the main window of Events Manager) the appearance of the text for the messages displayed in Events Manager.

Column headers are displayed at the top of the Events Manager main window, and describe the information displayed in the main window, such as the Event No. and the Event Description. Individual operators can choose to change the names of these column headers, or the width of each column. When an operator logs on to a GMS PC, their individual screen configuration will be displayed. To configure column headers in the Events Manager module, proceed as follows.

1.

Click the Events Manager button in the main window toolbar to display the Events Manager module. Alternatively, select Window > Events Manager from the main window.

Figure 4-35. Events Manager 2. Click Configure... to display the drop-down list.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

107

Figure 4-36. Events Manager > Configure... Button 3. Select the Customize Event Header option from this menu. The Customize Event Manager Header dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-37. Customize Event Header 4. There are two columns displayed on the left hand side of the screen. The Standard Columns list displays the default header names, while the Customized Columns list displays the new names you choose to call the headers. From the Column Title list in the Standard Columns section, highlight the name of the header you want to customize. The headers are the names of the sections of information that are displayed in the Events Manager main window.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

108

System Configuration If you want to change the name of the header, position the cursor in the New Title text box at the bottom of the screen and type the new name. The new name will be displayed in the Customized Columns section in the Column Title list corresponding to the highlighted header, as you type. If you want to change the width of the header, position the cursor in the New Width text box at the bottom of the screen and type the new width. The new width will be displayed in the Column Width list corresponding to the highlighted header as you type. 6. Click Add to add this customized column header to your Events Manager window. The new column header will be displayed in the Selected Columns list. To customize more Events Manager column headers, repeat steps 4 -5. If you want to customize more than one column header at the same time, complete step 4 for each column header, then click Add All. All customized column headers will be displayed in the Selected Columns section. If you want to remove a column header that you have already customized, highlight the header in the Selected Columns section, then click Remove. When you have finished customizing Events Manager column headers, click OK to save these changes and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

7.

8.

9.

Next let us look at configuring text messages in Events Manager. Individual operators can choose to change the appearance of the text in the alarm messages displayed in the Events Manager main window. When an operator logs on to a GMS PC, their individual screen configuration will be displayed. To configure the font used in the Events Manager module, proceed as following.

1.

Click the Events Manager button Events Manager module.

in the main window toolbar to display the

2.

Click Configure... to display the drop-down list. Select the Font... option from this menu. The Font dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

109

Figure 4-38. Event Summary > Configure... > Font 3. 4. 5. Choose an appropriate font, font style and size from the relevant scroll down lists. Select the appropriate effects and color from the Effects options (where desired). Click OK to implement the changes to the Events Manager font style, or Cancel to exit without saving.

4.7.2. Configure the Summary Manager Module


In the Summary Manager module, you can configure: The color representing each mode, e.g. day mode. The menu options displayed in the Summary Manager module.

Let us start by configuring mode colors. You can determine the colors that represent the mode of a site, e.g. Day mode. This is the colored square that is displayed in Summary Manager. Individual operators can choose to change these colors displayed on their workstation. When an operator logs on to a GMS PC, their individual screen configuration will be displayed. To change the site mode colors in Summary Manager, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

110

System Configuration

1.

Click the Summary Manager button Summary Manager module.

in the main window toolbar to display the

Figure 4-39. System Summary Manager 2. Select the Colors option from the Summary Manager Setup menu. The Summary Screen Colors dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

111

Figure 4-40. Summary Screen Colors 3. In the Parameters section, click the colored square next to the site mode you want to change. The current color will be displayed in the Preview section. From the Color Palette, click the new color you want to assign to the site mode. The new color will be displayed in the Preview section and the colored square in the Parameters section. Repeat steps 3-4 for each site mode color you want to change. Click OK to save the changes to your Summary Manager colors, or Cancel to exit without saving.

4.

5. 6.

Next let us look at how to configure the Summary Manager menu. You can determine the menu options that are displayed in Summary Manager. To customize the menus in Summary Manager, proceed as follows.

1.

Click the Summary Manager button Summary Manager module.

in the main window toolbar to display the

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

112

System Configuration

Figure 4-41. System Summary Manager 2. Select the Customize Menu option from the Summary Manager Setup menu. The Customize Menu: Summary Manager dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-42. System Summary Manager > Customize Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3.

113

From the Original Menu list, highlight the name of the menu you want to customize. To display the options available from that menu, click the + symbol next to the menu name. The menu options will be displayed.

Figure 4-43. System Summary Manager > Customize Menu Options 4. Highlight the menu option you want to include in your customized menu, then click Add. The menu option will be displayed, together with its parent menu, in the Customized Menu list on the right hand side of the screen.

Figure 4-44. System Summary Manager > Customize Menu > Add Menu 5. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more menu options to your customized menu. If you want to add a menu and all of its options, highlight the menu name in the Original Menu list, then click Add. The menu and all of its options will be displayed in the Customized Menu section. If you want to add all menus and their options to your customized menu, click Add All. All menus and their options will be displayed in the Customized Menu section.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

114

System Configuration 8. If you want to remove a menu or option that you have already added to your customized menu, highlight the option and click Remove. If you want to print the menu you have customized, click Print Customized Menu. Click OK to save these changes to the Summary Manager menu bar and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

9. 10.

Let us now look at how to configure the Operator Response Screen. In the operator response screen (also known as the Site Map window), you can configure which sections will display when you open the screen. To configure the operator response screen, proceed as follows. 1. Left -click a site square in Summary Manager to display the Site Map window. Alternatively, double-click an event in the Events Manager main window to display the Site Map window.

Figure 4-45. Site Map Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

115

Note: The input/output map that will appear is the default screen until an operator has created a site map.
2. Select the Display Options option from the Setup menu. The Display Options dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-46. Site Map > Setup > Display Options

Option
Site Map Site Transaction Log Site Events Log Area Summary

Description
A map of the site where the event or alarm has occurred. Creates a log of all events on this particular site. A real-time log of all events and alarms that have occurred at the site. A summary of the areas within a site, and the status of each area.

Table 4-9. Site Map Display Options Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

116

System Configuration

Option
Toolbar Status Bar Site Events Q Operator Instructions (Callout List) Operator Message Shift Message Opening/Closing Times Call Status Site Details Site Contacts 2D Building View

Description
Toolbar buttons are short-cuts to commonly used functions within the Site Map window. Displays the current mode of the displayed site, i.e. Day mode. Displays any new alarms that occur while processing the current alarm. Displays the Operator Instructions screen.

Messages for the operator currently logged on to GMS. Opening and closing times of the site currently displayed. Displays the Call Status screen - displays the status of the alarm you are currently processing. Details about the displayed site, e.g. address, phone number, site ID, etc. Details about the contact people for the displayed site.

Table 4-9. Site Map Display Options Parameters (continued) 3. Select the appropriate sections of the Site Map window you want to display when it opens. A checkmark will be displayed to indicate that an option is selected. Click OK to save the changes to the Site Map window and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

4.

4.8.

Other GMS Configuration


There are other configuration options that you can choose to perform in GMS. These are not compulsory configuration options, but are useful to know.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

117

4.8.1. Change Your Own Password


Users other than the top level user can change their own password and initials if desired. You must have edit authorization to do this. Your password can be changed in one of three ways. To change password, proceed as follows. 1. Select Change Password from the File menu, the Change Password window will be displayed, enter your old password, and then enter a new password, to confirm your new password enter it a second time in the Verify Password box.

Figure 4-47. Edit User Password If you have other parameters to edit as well, select Operator... from the Setup menu on the GMS desktop. Alternatively click the Operator Configuration icon from the GMS desktop.

Figure 4-48. Operator Configuration 2. Highlight your name from the Current Operators list, then click Edit. The Operator Setup dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

118

System Configuration

Figure 4-49. Operator Configuration > Edit > Operator Setup 3. To change your initials, position the cursor in the Initials text box and type the new initials (2 alphabetic characters max.). To change your password, position the cursor in the Password text box and type the new password (20 alphanumeric characters max.). Remember that passwords are case sensitive. Passwords are encrypted so they will display as a series of asterisks. Click OK to save your new password details and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving. If you click OK, a Confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

4.

5.

Figure 4-50. Change Password Confirmation 6. In the Password text box, type the new password to confirm the changes you have made.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7. Click OK to close the confirmation message, or Cancel to close without saving the changes. The Operator Configuration dialog box will be re-displayed. Click Close to close the Operator Configuration dialog box.

119

8.

4.8.2. Change the Communications Baud Rate


GMS must be connected to, and communicating with the base station or field controller before you can change the communications baud rate. If GMS is not communicating with the base station, contact Pacom Systems. To change the baud rate, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select Setup > Hardware Parameters > CPU Card Parameters. The CPU Card Options dialog box will be displayed. Select the Port Parameters command from the CPU Card Options list box.

Figure 4-51. CPU Card Options

Note: If you are connected to a Cascaded CPU Card, in the GMS main menu you should select Setup > Hardware Parameters > Cascaded CPU Card Parameters command instead of the CPU Card Parameters command.
2. From the port list, select the CPU card port that your PC is connected to. The Port Parameters dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

120

System Configuration

Figure 4-52. Port Parameters 3. To change the baud rate, click the Baud Rate drop-down list and select the new baud rate. Click Download to download the new baud rate selection. Because the new baud rate does not match that of your PC's COM port, the system will stop communicating with the CPU card and the clock icon will halt. After a few moments, a No response from Network warning will appear. Click OK in the warning box to clear the warning. From the GMS main menu select Setup > Comm Port option. The Setup Comm Port dialog box will be displayed.

4.

5. 6.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

121

Figure 4-53. Setup Comm Port Parameters 7. From the Baud Rate drop-down list, select the new baud rate and close the Setup Comm Port dialog box by clicking OK. After a few moments the clock icon will become active, indicating that communication has been re-established.

4.8.3. Select a Printer


Before you can print logs, reports, site maps and the contents of various parameter screens, you must tell GMS what type of printer you will be using. GMS uses the Windows printer setup facility to select and configure printers. For more information on selecting and configuring printers, consult your Window documentation. To select a printer, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select Setup > Printer. The Print Setup dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-54. Print Setup Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

122

System Configuration 2. If you have already configured a default printer for Windows, its name will be displayed in the Name text box. If you would like to use another printer (that has already been configured in Windows), click the Name drop-down list box and select the desired printer. The printer name will appear in the Name text box. When you have finished selecting a printer, select the appropriate orientation and paper size and source. To view the default properties already assigned to the printer you have chosen, click Properties. To connect to a printer located on your network, click Network. Click OK to save your selection.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

4.8.4. Editing System Data Files


GMS stores alarm and device types, modem configurations, daylight saving information and monitoring company details in a series of text files located in your GMS directory. You can view and edit these files. You will need the authorization password to do this. Incorrect data entry could lead to abnormal system operation. Before editing any of the system data files, please contact Pacom Systems. To edit system data files, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select File > System Data Files. The Edit System Data Files dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-55. Edit System Data Files

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2.

123

Select the system data file that you want to edit from the File Selection list box. Click OK. The selected file will be displayed in the GMS text editor. Edit the file as desired and be sure to save it before exiting.

3.

4.8.5. Resize Maps Automatically


If you are using a small and/or low-resolution screen, you may want GMS to display site maps at full screen size automatically (1024 x 768 pixels). To resize maps automatically, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select Options > Auto Map Resize. A checkmark will appear next to it to indicate that it is selected. Invoke a site map from the Summary Manager module by clicking on a site. You may need to use the mouse to scale the site map window so that the entire map is visible. Close the site map window. From now on all site maps will be displayed at that size.

2.

3.

4.8.6. Display the Site ID Number


If you are more used to recognizing sites by an ID number (other than the field controller/site number), you can command GMS to refer to sites by a user-defined number.

Note: A site ID number must be assigned to each site before GMS can display them.
To display the site ID number, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select Options > Display Site ID. A checkmark will appear next to it to indicate that it is selected. GMS will now identify sites by their ID number instead of the field controller/site number.

2.

4.8.7. Change GMS Timeout Parameters


GMS uses a number of different communication protocols to communicate with various devices in the security monitoring network.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

124

System Configuration For example, the Pacom Communications Protocol (PCP) is a low-level link protocol used for communications between Pacom software (such as GMS) and the base station. On the other hand, the Pacom Streaming Protocol (PSP) is a high-level link protocol used for communications between Pacom software and remote devices (such as field controllers).

Note: In most cases, the default values for PCP and PSP timeouts will be appropriate. PCP and PSP timeout parameters are usually changed only if there is a network conflict or communications problem. For this reason it is strongly recommended that you do not change these parameters unless instructed to do so by a PACOM engineer.
Pacom Communication Protocol (PCP) timeouts dictate how long your PC waits to receive responses from the base station. You can view and edit PCP timeout parameters. To view and/or edit PCP timeout parameters, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select Setup > PCP Timeout Parameters. The PCP Timeout Parameters dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-56. PCP Timeout Parameters 2. To edit the timeout parameters, position the cursor in the desired text box(es) and type in the new parameter value. You can reload the default values by clicking Default. Click OK to save the new parameter values and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

3.

Pacom Streaming Protocol (PSP) timeouts dictate how long your PC waits to receive responses from remote devices (such as field controllers). You can view and edit PSP timeout parameters.
Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide To view and/or edit PSP timeout parameters, proceed as follows. 1. From the GMS main menu select Setup > PSP Timeout Parameters. The PSP Timeout Parameters dialog box will be displayed.

125

Figure 4-57. PSP Timeout Parameters 2. To edit the timeout parameters, position the cursor in the desired text box(es) and type in the new parameter value. You can reload the default values by clicking Default. Click OK to save the new parameter values and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

126

System Configuration

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

127

Chapter 5 Operating the Console


Organizations and security centers use the GMS to monitor alarms in a variety of ways. No two GMS system setups are the same. However, all organizations using GMS generally have operators monitoring alarms at their workstation: Some operators only monitor alarms; Other operators perform other functions as well as monitoring alarms; Operators are known by different names and titles.

For the purposes of this document, operators are the people sitting at a workstation, monitoring a security network, and actioning any alarms or events that occur. The main modules of GMS used by an operator for monitoring the system are: Summary Manager Event Manager Transaction Manager Video Manager

The following sections describe the operation of these module.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

128

Operating the Console

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

129

5.1.

Summary Manager
The Summary Manager window graphically represents the status of all remote sites in your security network. With Summary Manager you can: view status of all sites access dynamic site maps with alarm point/device locations and details acknowledge alarms view and edit alarm point/device, site and contact details use Prioritized Site Status to quickly and easily view the maps of sites with priority alarms. edit field controller parameters edit card access parameters

This section contains the following topics and procedures relating to Summary Manager: How to Access Summary Manager... Page 129 About the Summary Manager... Page 131 Right-click Menu Options... Page 145 How to Close Summary Manager... Page 155 Working with Screen Layout... Page 167 Manipulating Multi Site Guard Tour... Page 189

5.1.1. How to Access Summary Manager


1. To access the Summary Manager, do one of the following. From the GMS desktops View menu select Summary Manager.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

130

Operating the Console

Figure 5-1. View menu > Summary Manager 2. Alternatively from the desktop toolbar, click on the Summary Manager icon .

The Summary Manager window will be displayed (See Figure 5-2).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

131

Figure 5-2. Summary Manager Window

5.1.2. About the Summary Manager


The Summary Manager window includes command menus and panes which display a variety of alarm information. The following describes each of the functional areas on the Summary Manager window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

132

Operating the Console

Figure 5-3. Summary Manager Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

133

Area
Menu bar

Description
Click on a menu to display the command options available from that menu. All Summary Manager commands can be accessed via the menu bar. For further help on each Summary Manager menu options, Using the Menu Bar... Page 133. Toolbar buttons are a shortcut to the most commonly used Summary Manager commands. For further information about each button, Using the Toolbar... Page 142. The toolbox contains the status legends (column of color patterned squares). For further information about each button, Using the Toolbox... Page 143. The Categorized Site Status pane of the Summary Manager screen lists the alarm and status types with corresponding color codes. For further information about using this pane, Using the Categorized Site Status... Page 144. The status bar displays the current date and time. It also displays the site name and number as you move your mouse across the site squares in the Site Summary pane. Each square in the right pane of the Summary Manager window represents a site area. If a site has more than one area (e.g. more than one floor), the additional areas will also be displayed as individual squares in the pane. The color of the square represents the status of the site area.

Toolbar

Toolbox

Categorized Site Status pane

Status bar

Site Summary pane

Table 5-1. Summary Manager Window Description In this way, status, alarms and maps for the additional areas can quickly and easily be identified and accessed.

5.1.2.1.

Using the Menu Bar


Summary Manager s menu bar contains all the command options available in the Summary Manager window such changing the layout of how sites are arranged, viewing specific site on alarm. Following describes each of these options. File Menu... Page 134 Setup Menu... Page 134 View Menu... Page 135

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

134

Operating the Console Sites Menu... Page 136 Options Menu... Page 140

5.1.2.1.1.

File Menu

Figure 5-4. File Menu The following describe the options in the File menu.

File Menu Options


Screen Layout

Description
Use to edit the Summary Manager screen layout. For further detail refer to 5.1.6. Working with Screen Layout. Use to close and exit out of Summary Manager.

Associated Toolbar Icon

Exit

Table 5-2. File Menu Option Descriptions

5.1.2.1.2.

Setup Menu

Figure 5-5. Setup Menu The following describe the options in the Setup menu.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

135

Setup Menu Options


Colors Customize Menu

Description
Use to assign the colors that will represent different site statuses. Use to define the menu options that are displayed in the Summary Manager menu bar. Using this command you can control the menu items available to users of Summary Manager. Use to setup the multi site guard tours.

Associated Toolbar Icon

Multi Site Guard Tour

Table 5-3. Setup Menu Option Descriptions

5.1.2.1.3.

View Menu

Figure 5-6. View Menu The following describe the options in the View menu.

View Menu Options


Tool Box

Description
Use to display or hide the Summary Manager Tool box.

Table 5-4. View Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

136

Operating the Console

View Menu Options


Tool Bar Multi Site Guard Tour Status Multi RTU Site Map

Description
Use to display or hide the Summary Manager toolbar. Use to view the status of a multi site guard tour currently taking place. For further information on this, refer to Multi Site Guard Tour Status Window... Page 192. Use to view site maps consisting of points from more than one field controller. For more information on this, refer to How to View a Multi RTU Site Map... Page 774.

Table 5-4. View Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

5.1.2.1.4.

Sites Menu

Figure 5-7. Sites Menu Use the Sites menu to display a summary window showing only the sites with a particular status/mode type.

Note: Alternatively you can click the relevant toolbox button for that alarm type.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide The following describe the options in the Sites menu.

137

Sites Menu Options


Day

Description
When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites in day mode (with alarms unset). The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites in night mode (with all alarms set). The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites in restricted access mode. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites in test mode. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with any alarm. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites displaying network alarms. Network alarms include site/branch dataline failure, network controller failure and modem failure. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status.

Night

Restricted Access

Test

Alarm

Net Alarm

Table 5-5. Sites Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

138

Operating the Console

Sites Menu Options


Power Alarm

Description
When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with mains power failure. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites in partial seal mode. Partial seal usually occurs when the site itself is partially sealed (e.g. vault left open, cleaners/ ATM maintenance, but rest of site closed/sealed). The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites where an alarm point(s) has been isolated. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with field controllers that are currently offline. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with a dataline failure. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status.

Partial Seal

Isolate

Offline

Dataline Fail

Table 5-5. Sites Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

139

Sites Menu Options


Dialup

Description
When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with field controllers in dialup mode. A site is usually displayed as dialup when the dataline has failed and the field controller is in dialup mode but not currently communicating with the base station. This means that the field controller will communicate with the base station via dialup when it needs to. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with field controllers currently connected to the base station via dialup. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites with field controllers currently connected to a backup card. field controllers only connect to backup cards if the line card they are connected to is offline or has failed.The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status.

Dial Connect

Bkup Card Connect

Table 5-5. Sites Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

140

Operating the Console

Sites Menu Options


Line card Fail

Description
When selected will display a summary window showing only those sites (field controllers) that are connected to a line card that is offline or has failed. When a line card goes offline or fails, the field controllers that are connected to it will reconnect to their assigned backup card. The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. When selected the total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status. A site is usually displayed as inactive when it has been set up in GMS but a line card account has not yet been activated for the sites field controller.The total number of sites with this status will be highlighted at the top of the summary window. Click one of the site squares in this summary window to view a site map and further details about the site status.

Duress

Inactive

Table 5-5. Sites Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

5.1.2.1.5.

Options Menu

Figure 5-8. Options Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide The following describe the options in the Options menu.

141

Options Menu
Locate a Site Set Time

Description
Use to find a specific site in the Summary Manager window. Use to set the internal clock (time and date) on your GMS computer. You can also elect to synchronize the base stations internal clock to this time and date. Use to update the Summary Manager window (status, alarms, etc.). This can be used in lieu of restarting GMS when there is a communications problem between your GMS computer and the CPU card (e.g. if GMS was offline or disconnected temporarily). Use to update the full status of the sites displayed in Summary Manager with current data. This can be used in lieu of restarting GMS when there is a communications problem between your GMS computer and the CPU card (e.g. if GMS was offline or disconnected temporarily). Use to repaint the Summary Manager window if it becomes garbled (video display interference and/or redraw delay). Use to automatically add sites to the Summary Manager window as field controller line card accounts are activated. A checkmark will appear next to this command when it is selected. Use to display the site names (instead of site addresses) displayed in the Summary Manager status bar. A checkmark will appear next to this command when it is selected.

Associated Toolbar Icon

Refresh

Refresh Site Status

Redraw Screen

Auto Site Add

Display Site Name

Table 5-6. Option Menu Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

142

Operating the Console

Options Menu
Same Summary Screen For All

Description
Use to ensure all workstations connected to the server will display the same summary screen layout as the server. This option available only on the GMS server. Use to automatically acknowledge all alarms currently active in the system. (As a result the flashing active alarms will stop doing so.) Use to read site information from site map. Use to preview details such as site data and site contact of selected sites.

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Acknowledge All Alarms Initialize Summary Site Data Preview Site Details

Table 5-6. Option Menu Descriptions (continued)

5.1.2.2.

Using the Toolbar


Summary Manager s toolbar contains icons for the commonly used commands.

Figure 5-9. Summary Manager Toolbar Icons These commands are also available through the menu options. Refer to the explanation of the menu options to find information on these icons. Apart from the icons the Summary Manager toolbar also contains the Site Name drop-down list and the Total Sites/Total Areas button.

Figure 5-10. Summary Manager Toolbar Components

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

143

Summary Manager Toolbar Components


Site Name drop-down list

Description
Use to locate a specific site in the Summary Manager window. Select the site you want to locate from the list, and the cursor will automatically move to that site. Use to view how many sites and sub areas are on the Summary Manager screen. For example if 35/0 is displayed, it means that a total number of 35 sites and a total number of 0 sub area are on the Summary Manager screen.

Total Sites/Total Areas button

Table 5-7. Summary Manager Toolbar Components Description

5.1.2.3.

Using the Toolbox


The toolbox contains patterned squares which represents status legends. Move the cursor over each individual square and its status description will appear as tooltips.

Figure 5-11. Summary Manager Toolbox Click a status legend square. All sites with the selected status will be displayed in a separate window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

144
5.1.2.4.

Operating the Console

Using the Categorized Site Status

Figure 5-12. Categorize Site Status Pane of Summary Manager The Categorized Site Status is the left-hand side pane of the Summary Manager window. It displays a complete list of alarm and status type names, together with the corresponding colorcoded square. The number of sites with that status is displayed within the brackets. For example, the above indicate that two sites are in Night Modes. Click on the + symbol next to a particular alarm/status description to display detailed information of sites with that alarm/status type.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

145

5.1.2.5.

Right-click Menu Options


On right-click on a site in the Site Summary pane, a site configuration menu pops up.

Figure 5-13. Site Configuration Menu

Site Configuration Menu Options


RTU Parameters RTU Account Details

Description
Use to view and edit the field controller configurations and diagnostics of the site. Use to display field controller account details like network type and line card number etc. For more information on this, refer to RTU Account Details... Page 166. Use to dial out to field controller. This will connect the field controller to the system provided a dialback number has been programmed in the RTU Account Details.... Use to disconnect an field controller after successful dialup connection. Use to change the field controller mode of the displayed site. Use to perform actions on cards such as blocking cards. Use to launch Map Editor for the selected site.

Send Dialout Command

Force Off Dialup Mode Commands Card Access Parameters Site Map

Table 5-8. Site Configuration Menu Options

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

146

Operating the Console

Site Configuration Menu Options


Site Data

Description
Use to view and edit data (site name, address, etc.) associated with the selected site. For information on setting up site data refer to How to Edit Site Data... Page 645. Use to view and edit site contact names and phone numbers of the selected site. Use to close the Site Configuration menu.

Site Contacts Cancel

Table 5-8. Site Configuration Menu Options (continued)

Note: If some menu options are greyed then that option is not available for the selected site.

5.1.3. Customize the Summary Manager


5.1.3.1. How to Change Site Status Colors
1. To assign the colors representing site status, do one of the following: 2. From the Summary Manager window Setup menu select Colors. Select the Colors icon from the toolbar.

The Summary Screen Colors dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

147

Figure 5-14. Summary Screen Colors Window 3. In the Parameters section, click the colored square next to the site status that you want to modify. Choose the color you want to assign to the selected parameter square by clicking a color from the Color Palette. The selected color or combination for that component or status will be shown in the Preview box. Click OK.

4.

5.

5.1.3.2.

Customize Menus on Summary Manager Window


You can customize menus available to users of Summary Manager. By way customization you can dictate the menu options that will be displayed on users computer and also specify shortcut keys that can be used to invoke menu options. This section contains the following topics and procedures: Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box... Page 148 Customize Keyboard... Page 149 How to Customize Menus... Page 150 How to Associate Keys to Menus... Page 151

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

148
5.1.3.2.1.

Operating the Console

Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box

Figure 5-15. Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box

Parameters
Original Menu Customized Menu Add Add All

Description
This list displays the default menu of the Summary Manager window. This list displays the menu you have customized for the window. Click to add original menu options to the Customized Menu pane. Click to add all original menus and their options to your customized menu. All menus and their options will be displayed in the Customized Menu pane. Click to remove a menu or option that you have already added to your Customized Menu pane. Click to print the customized menu list and its associated keys.

Remove Print Customized Menu

Table 5-9. Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

149

Parameters
Customize Keyboard OK Cancel

Description
Click to associate shortcut key to menu options. For more information on this, refer to How to Associate Keys to Menus... Page 151. Click to save the changes to the menu of window you are customizing. Click to exit this screen without saving changes to the menu.

Table 5-9. Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions

5.1.3.2.2.

Customize Keyboard

Figure 5-16. Customize Keyboard

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

150

Operating the Console

Parameters
Commands Shortcut Key Reset Remove Assign Close

Description
This list displays the default menu of the Summary Manager window. Select a key that will be associated to the selected menu option in the Commands list. Select to reset to default key associations for all menu options. Select to remove the key association. Select the to assign the selected key association. Select to exit the Customize Keyboard window.

Table 5-10. Customize Keyboard Parameter Descriptions

5.1.3.2.3.

How to Customize Menus


To customize the Summary Manager menu bar, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Summary Manager window Setup menu select Customize Menu. The Customize Menu dialog box will be displayed. For information on the dialog box, refer to Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box... Page 148.

Figure 5-17. Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3.

151

From the Original Menu list, highlight the name of the menu you want to customize. To display the options available from that menu, click the + symbol next to the menu name. The menu options will be displayed. Do one of the following to select the menu options you want to customize. If you want to add a menu and all of its options, highlight the menu name, then click Add. The menu and all of its options will be displayed in the Customized Menu list on the right hand side pane of the screen. If you want to add all menus and their options to your customized menu, click Add All. All menus and their options will be displayed in the Customized Menu list on the right hand side pane of the screen. If you want to remove a menu or option that you have already added to your customized menu, highlight the option and click Remove.

4.

Figure 5-18. Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box 5. Click OK to save these changes to the Summary Manager menu bar.

5.1.3.2.4.

How to Associate Keys to Menus


To associate a shortcut key to a menu option, proceed as following. 1. From the Customize Menu Summary Manager window select Customize Keyboard.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

152

Operating the Console 2. The Customize Keyboard dialog box is displayed. For information on the dialog box, refer to Customize Keyboard... Page 149.

Figure 5-19. Customize Keyboard 3. 4. Select the menu from the Commands list. Select the key which will be used to invoke the menu from the Key list. You can also associate a combination key presses for a menu, for example, F2 key in combination with Shift and Ctrl keys. To do this select the VK_F1 and then Ctrl and Shift check boxes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

153

Figure 5-20. Customize Keyboard 5. Click Close.

5.1.3.3.

How to Set the System Time on your GMS Computer


To set the GMS system time, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Summary Manager window Options menu select Set Time. The Set System Time and Date dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-21. Set System Time and Date Dialog Box 3. Type in the current time in the Time text box, in hh:mm:ss format.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

154

Operating the Console 4. 5. Type in the current date in the Date text box, in dd:mm:yy format. Click the Send Time Set to CPU check box to synchronize the base stations internal clock to specified time and date. Click OK.

6.

5.1.3.4.

How to Preview Site Details


To preview details of the site from Summary Manager, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Summary Manager window Options menu select Preview Site Details. The Preview Site Details dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-22. Preview Site Details Dialog Box 3. 4. 5. Type in the first site number in the Start Site text box. Type in the last site number in the End Site text box. Select the required details that you want to preview. You have a choice of site data and site contact details. Click Preview. GMS generates a report on the selected sites.

6. 7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

155

Figure 5-23. Site Details Report

5.1.4. How to Close Summary Manager


1. To exit, do one of the following: Click on the window button on the top right-hand corner of the Summary Manager

From the Summary Manager window File menu select Exit.

5.1.5. Map View


Left-click on a site in the Site Summary pane (right-pane of the Summary Manager window) to display an interactive map of that site (as drawn in Map Editor) along with other details of the site.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

156

Operating the Console

Figure 5-24. Map View Window The following describes each of the functional areas on the Map View window.

Area
Menu bar

Description
Click on a menu to display the command options available from that menu. All Map View commands can be accessed via the menu bar. For further help on each Map View menu options, Using the Menu bar... Page 157. Toolbar buttons are a shortcut to the most commonly used Map View commands. For further information about each button, Using the Toolbar... Page 163. Displays the map of the site. Displays the status of guard tours. Displays the status (indicated by color coded squares) of areas of the site.

Toolbar

Site map pane Guard Tour Status pane Area Summary pane

Table 5-11. Map View Window Description

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

157

Area
Operator Message pane Status bar Site Events Log pane

Description
Displays event messages and site messages. The status bar displays the status of the site for example if the site active or inactive and what mode it is in. Displays a log of transactions relating to the site.

Table 5-11. Map View Window Description

5.1.5.1.

Using the Menu bar


Map Views menu bar contains all the command options available for the selected site such as viewing its map, points in alarm, changing the views that represent different information of the site.

5.1.5.1.1.

File Menu

Figure 5-25. File Menu

File Menu Options

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon

Site Map

Use to open the map of the site in Map Editor. For further information on Map Editor, refer to Map Editor... Page 587. Use to view and edit the field controller configurations and diagnostics of the site. Use to exit Map View.

RTU Parameters Exit

Table 5-12. File Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

158
5.1.5.1.2.

Operating the Console

View Menu

Figure 5-26. View Menu

View Menu Options

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon

Site Data Contacts 2D Building View

Use to view data (site name, address, etc.) associated with the displayed site. Use to view site contact names and phone numbers of the displayed site. Use to view the 2D picture of the site (if configured).

Table 5-13. View Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

159

View Menu Options

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Default Map/Normal Map

Use to toggle between site map and a representation of points and devices of the site. You can use these views to locate a point in alarm. Individual alarm (input) points and device icons flash red to indicate alarms, while output point icons flash red to indicate they are active or triggered. Use to display or hide the Area Summary pane. Use to display the map of the next area of the site. Use to display the map of the next area in alarm of the site. Use to display or hide the toolbar. Use to display or hide the status bar. Use to display the details of the points in full screen view. Use to display field controller account details like network type and line card number etc. For more information on this, refer to RTU Account Details... Page 166. Use to display or hide Operator Message pane. Use to display instructions related to events. Use to display or hide Guard Tour Status pane. Use to display or hide Call Status pane.

Area Summary Next Area Map Next Area Map in Alarm Toolbar Status Bar Point Details RTU Account Details

Operator Message General Instructions Guard Tour Status Call Status

Table 5-13. View Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

160
5.1.5.1.3.

Operating the Console

Setup Menu

Figure 5-27. Setup Menu

Setup Menu Options


Site Events Log... Display Options... Map Layer Selection...

Description
Use to configure the Event log for the site. Use to select the panes that are to be displayed in the Map View. Use to view a specific layer on a map. For more information on this, refer to How to View a Layer... Page 765. Use to configure color and font of operator instructions. Also used to limit site map display options on workstations, refer to Operator Instruction Settings... Page 213. Use to define the menu options that are displayed in the Map View menu bar. Using this command you can control the menu items available to users of Map View. Use to perform actions on cards such as blocking cards.

Operator Instruction Settings... Customize Menu...

Card Access Parameters... BMS Status Refresh Rate...

Table 5-14. Setup Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

161

5.1.5.1.4.

Options Menu

Figure 5-28. Options Menu

Options Menu

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon

Locate a Point Refresh Status Refresh Vocabs Get Zone Status

Use to find a specific alarm point on the displayed site. Use to update the Map View window (status, alarms, etc.). Use to upload vocab for the configured points in the field controller. Applicable only to Europlex panels. Use to list number of point which are not secured (in alarm) on these panels.

Table 5-15. Options Menu Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

162

Operating the Console

Options Menu

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon

Redraw Map

Use to repaint the map if it becomes garbled (video display interference and/or redraw delay that sometimes occurs in Windows). Use to acknowledge all outstanding alarms simultaneously. Use to create an event manually for the selected site, for example, for bomb threats. Use to append additional action to a completed event. Use to create a report for a selected event. Use to put a site in trace mode for special monitoring. Use to reconfigure opening and closing timings for the site. Use to email the site log and site status. -

Acknowledge All Alarms Create an Event Re-action an Event Create Event Report Site in Trace Mode Change Working Time Email

Table 5-15. Options Menu Descriptions (continued)

5.1.5.1.5.

Commands Menu

Figure 5-29. Command Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

163

Commands Menu Options


Group Mode Change System

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon

Use to execute group commands on a set of points. Use to force a mode change or perform keypad operations. Use to view and execute field controller System Commands.

Table 5-16. Command Menu Option Descriptions

5.1.5.2.

Using the Toolbar


Map Views toolbar contains icons for the commonly used commands.

Figure 5-30. Summary Manager Toolbar Icons These commands are also available through the menu options.

Map View Icons

Description
Site Data Site Contacts Default Map Point Details This button toggles between 2D Building View and the Site Transaction Log.

Table 5-17. Map View Toolbar Icons

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

164

Operating the Console

Map View Icons

Description
RTU Parameters System Keypad Operator Message Operator Instructions General Instructions Call Status Area Summary Next Area Map Next Area Map in Alarm Point Search Redraw Online Help

Table 5-17. Map View Toolbar Icons Apart from the icons the Summary Manager toolbar also contains the day and time, site field controller type, and a variety of icons that you can use to view the map of the site.

Figure 5-31. Map View Toolbar Components

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

165

Site Map Icons

Purpose
View Layout Use to view input points on the map. Use to view output points on the map. Use to view other alarm devices on the map. Use to view card access objects on the map. Use to view CCTV objects on the map. Use to view only BMS objects on the map. Use to view one, multiple or all of the possible 16 layers of the map. Use to select the following options from its drop-down list. Location - When selected displays the location of the points on the map. Alarm groups - When selected displays the alarm groups of the points on the map. Point Type - When selected displays the device type of the points on the map.

Table 5-18. Site Map Icons on the Map View Toolbar

5.1.5.3.

Using the Site Map


You can use the map of the site to: View site layout and location of alarm points. Configure and edit alarm and device points. Control access to the site. Track movement through the site and activate outputs.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

166

Operating the Console Acknowledge and reset points in alarm. Scan contact personnel and alarm point details. Edit point details.

You will notice that individual alarm (input) point and device icons flash red to indicate alarms, while output point icons flash red to indicate they are active/triggered.

5.1.5.4.

RTU Account Details

Figure 5-32. RTU Account Details Dialog Box

Parameter
RTU No. Remote Alarm Panel Network Type Linecard No. Line No.

Description
Displays the number of the selected site field controller. Displays the type of Remote Alarm Panel (RAP) that is attached to the field controller. Displays the type of network to which the field controller is connected. Displays the number of the line card to which the field controller is connected. Displays the specific line card line to which the field controller is connected.

Table 5-19. RTU Account Details Dialog Box Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

167

Parameter
Port No. Timezone No. Graphic Status

Description
Displays the CPU card port to which the field controller reports. Displays the selected field controllers timezone. Field controller status as reported to GMS. The displayed number is an 8-bit hexadecimal value: 0 (Night Mode), 1 (Point in Alarm), 2 (Point Isolated), 3 (Partial Seal), 4 (Test Mode), 5 (Power Alarm Active), 6 (Last ID Entry was Duress), 7 (Network Alarm). For example 02Hex = Alarm Day Mode, 03Hex = Alarm Night Mode, 08Hex ATM, Aux, Cleaner, 80Hex = Communication failed, Day Mode. Field controller communication status as reported to GMS. The displayed number is an 8-bit hexadecimal value: 0 (Online via Dialup), 1 (Active on Backup Card), 2 (Cutout Mode), 3 (Line Card Failed), 4 (Dialup Active), 5 (Data Line Comms Fail), 6 (Offline), 7 (Not Active in Network) Displays the type of dialup that the field controller will use (as defined in field controller comms parameters). The dialup type text box will be displayed blank if the field controller has not previously dialled in. Displays the telephone number that the field controller successfully called the last time it dialled in. The dial back number text box will be displayed blank if the field controller has not previously dialled in. Displays the time an field controller will remain online after dialup with no communication received. The field controller will disconnect after this time.

Comms Status

Dialup Type

Dial Back Number

Dial Stay Online Time

Table 5-19. RTU Account Details Dialog Box Descriptions

5.1.6. Working with Screen Layout


The Screen Layout is used to edit the layout of the Site Summary pane of the Summary Manager window.

5.1.6.1.

How to Access Screen Layout


1. To create a map, do one of the following: From the Summary Screen window File menu select Screen Layout.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

168

Operating the Console 2. Select the Screen Layout icon from the toolbar.

The Screen Layout window will be displayed.

Figure 5-33. Summary Screen Layout Editor

5.1.6.2.

Screen Layout Window Menu Bar


The Screen Layout windows menu bar contains all the command options available for setting up the layout. Following describes each of these options.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

169

Menu Options
Sites

Description
Use to select the number of sites you want to display in Summary Manager. Choose a number from this menu, and that number of sites will be automatically displayed in Summary Manager when you close the Screen Layout window. For example, if you choose the 50 option, 50 sites will be displayed in Summary Manager. Use to view commands relating to sites, their status and appearance. For further information on the sub-menu, refer to 5.1.6.2.1. Options Menu. Use to sort sites in a selection of forms. For further information on the sub-menu, refer to 5.1.6.2.2. Sort Menu.

Options

Sort

Table 5-20. Screen Layout Window Menus

5.1.6.2.1.

Options Menu

Figure 5-34. Screen Layout > Options Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

170

Operating the Console The following describes the options in the Options menu.

Options Menu
Add a Site Add Sites Add Page Delete a Site Delete Sites Delete Inactive Sites

Description
Use to add a new site to Summary Manager. Use to add a range of new sites to Summary Manager. Use to add tab pages to the Summary Manager window. Use to delete a site from the Summary Manager window. Use to delete a range of sites from Summary Manager. Use to delete all sites that are displayed as inactive in the currently active Summary Manager tab. A site is usually regarded as inactive when it has been set up in GMS but a line card account has not yet been activated for the sites field controller. Use to delete tab pages to the Summary Manager window. Use to find a specific site in the Summary Manager window. Use to display the highest site number in the displayed site range. Use to enable or disable site sub area adding. If this option is disabled, you will not be able to add maps of additional floors or levels or areas to an existing or new site. A checkmark will appear next to this option when it is enabled. Use to set all displayed sites to inactive. This will reset the status of all active sites. Use to set all displayed sites to unused.

Delete Page Locate a Site Find Highest Site Number Select Sub Area Adding

Reset All Sites to Inactive Reset All Sites to Unused

Table 5-21. Options Menu Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

171

Options Menu
Save As Default Layout Restore Default Layout

Description
Use to save the displayed layout as the Summary Manager default. Use if you have changed the Summary Manager layout and want to restore your original (default) layout. This command will work only if you have previously saved your original layout as the default. Use to define the menu options that are displayed in the Summary Screen Layout menu bar. By customizing you can determine the menu items available to users of Summary Manager.

Customize Menu

Table 5-21. Options Menu Descriptions (continued)

5.1.6.2.2.

Sort Menu

Figure 5-35. Screen Layout > Sort Menu

Sort Menu Options


By Site Number By Security Level By Site ID

Description
Use to sort the displayed sites according to their site (field controller) number. Use to sort the displayed sites according to their security level. Use to sort the displayed sites according to their site identification name/number.

Table 5-22. Sort Menu Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

172

Operating the Console

Sort Menu Options


By State Name By Post Code By Town Name

Description
Use to sort the displayed sites according to their state/ province/region. Use to sort the displayed sites according to their postal (zip) code. Use to sort the displayed sites according to their town/city.

Table 5-22. Sort Menu Descriptions (continued)

5.1.6.3.

Modifying the Layout

Note: When you have added a site (or more) to the Summary Manager you must refresh the status of the screen.

5.1.6.3.1.

How to Add a Site to the Layout

Note: Ensure that there is an unused site displayed to allow for the new site you want to add. If there is not an unused site displayed, either delete a site or select a higher number of sites to display.
To add a site to the layout, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Add a Site. The Site Selection dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-36. Site Selection Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3. 4. 5. 6. Type in the number of the site you want to add in the Enter Account# text box. Type area number of the site (if applicable) in the Enter Area No. text box. Click OK.

173

The cursor will change to a crosshair. Position the cursor on an unused site and click the left-mouse button, the status bar will display <unused> as the cursor passes over an unused site. The new site will appear in its place.

Figure 5-37. Adding Site to Summary Manager

5.1.6.3.2.

How to Add a Range of Sites to the Layout

Note: Ensure that there are enough unused sites displayed to allow for the new sites you want to add. If there are not enough unused sites displayed, either delete some sites or select a higher number of sites to display.
To add a range of sites to a page in the layout, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Add Sites. The Enter Site Add Range dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

174

Operating the Console

Figure 5-38. Enter Site Add Range Dialog Box 3. 4. 5. 6. Type the first site number of the range you want to add in the Start Site No. text box. Type the last site number of the range you want to add in the End Site No. text box. Click OK. The cursor will change to a crosshair sight. Position the cursor on an unused site, and click the left-mouse button to place the new range of sites on the screen.

Figure 5-39. Adding a Range of Sites to Summary Manager

5.1.6.3.3.

How to Add Multiple Tab Pages to the Layout

Note: You can add multiple pages to Summary Manager only if GMS is run with the / sumsheet switch. This switch must be added prior to using the Add Page command. For further information on how to add switches when running GMS, refer to Appendix B Switches.
To add multiple tab pages to the layout, proceed as following. 1. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Add Page.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2. The Enter Page Title dialog box is displayed.

175

Figure 5-40. Enter Page Title Dialog Box 3. Type in the page name and click OK.

Note: You can add up to 16 pages and the number of Sites on each page is determined by the number of sites you selected from the Summary Manager Screen Layout.
4. Proceed to add sites to the tab page. Refer to How to Add a Range of Sites to the Layout... Page 173.

5.1.6.3.4.

How to Edit Page Title


To edit the title on a tab page, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window right-click on the tab page title. The Enter Page Title dialog box is displayed.

Figure 5-41. Enter Page Title Dialog Box 3. 4. Type in the new title of the page. Click OK.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

176
5.1.6.3.5.

Operating the Console

How to Delete a Site from the Layout


To delete a specific site from the layout, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Delete a Site. The cursor will change to a crosshair sight. Position the cursor on the site you want to delete and click the left-mouse button.

Figure 5-42. Deleting a Site 3. This confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Figure 5-43. Summary Screen Layout Editor Confirmation Dialog Box 4. 5. To confirm the deleting, click Yes. Another notification dialog box is displayed asking whether the associated site map is to be deleted.

Figure 5-44. Summary Screen Layout Editor

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 6. Do one of the following: To delete the associated map from GMS, click Yes. To only proceed with removal the site from Summary Manager and not its site map, click No.

177

7.

The site will be deleted (replaced by an unused site).

Figure 5-45. Unused Space from Deleted Site

5.1.6.3.6.

How to Delete a Range of Sites from the Layout


To delete a range of sites from the layout, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Delete Sites. The Enter Site Delete Range dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-46. Enter Site Delete Range Dialog Box 3. Type in the first site number of the range you want to delete in the Start Site No. text box. Type in the last site number of the range you want to delete in the End Site No. text box. Click OK.

4. 5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

178

Operating the Console 6. The site range will be deleted (replaced by unused sites).

Figure 5-47. Unused Space from Deleted Sites

5.1.6.3.7.

How to Delete Inactive Sites from the Layout


To delete all inactive sites from the layout, proceed as following. 1. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Delete Inactive Sites.

Note: A site is usually regarded as inactive when it has been set up in GMS but a line card account has not yet been activated for the sites field controller.
2. The following warning dialog box will be displayed

Figure 5-48. Summary Screen Layout Editor Warning Box 3. Click Yes to delete all inactive sites.

5.1.6.3.8.

How to Delete a Tab Pages from the Layout


To delete a tab page from the layout, proceed as following. 1. In the Screen Layout window, select the tab page which is to be deleted.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2. 3. From the Options menu select Delete Page. The tab page will be deleted.

179

Note: You can NOT delete the last page of the Summary Manager, i.e, Summary Manager will always have at least one page - Main Page.

5.1.6.4.

Customize Menus on Screen Layout Window


You can customize menus available to users of Screen Layout. By way of customization you can dictate the menu options that will be displayed on users computer and also specify shortcut keys that can be used to invoke menu options. This section contains the following topics and procedures: Customize Menu Screen Layout Dialog Box... Page 179 Customize Keyboard Dialog Box... Page 181 How to Customize Menus... Page 182 How to Associate Keys to Menus... Page 183

5.1.6.4.1.

Customize Menu Screen Layout Dialog Box

Figure 5-49. Customize Menu Summary Layout Editor Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

180

Operating the Console

Parameters
Original Menu Customized Menu Add Add All

Description
This list displays the default menu of the Screen Layout window. This list displays the menu you have customized for the window. Click to add original menu options to the Customized Menu pane. Click to add all original menus and their options to your customized menu. All menus and their options will be displayed in the Customized Menu pane. Click to remove a menu or option that you have already added to your Customized Menu pane. Click to print the customized menu list and its associated keys. Click to associate shortcut key to menu options. For more information on this, refer to How to Customize Menus... Page 182. Click to save the changes to the menu of window you are customizing. Click to exit this screen without saving changes to the menu.

Remove Print Customized Menu Customize Keyboard

OK Cancel

Table 5-23. Customize Menu Summary Layout Editor Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

181

5.1.6.4.2.

Customize Keyboard Dialog Box

Figure 5-50. Customize Keyboard

Parameters
Commands Shortcut Key Reset Remove Assign Close

Description
This list displays the default menu of the Screen Layout window. Select a key that will be associated to the selected menu option in the Commands list. Select to reset to default key associations for all menu options. Select to remove the key association. Select the to assign the selected key association. Select to exit the Customize Keyboard window.

Table 5-24. Customize Keyboard Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

182
5.1.6.4.3.

Operating the Console

How to Customize Menus


To customize the Screen Layout menu bar, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Customize Menu. The Customize Menu dialog box will be displayed. For information on the dialog box, refer to Customize Menu Screen Layout Dialog Box... Page 179.

Figure 5-51. Customize Menu Summary Layout Dialog box 3. From the Original Menu list, highlight the name of the menu you want to customize. To display the options available from that menu, click the + symbol next to the menu name. The menu options will be displayed. Do one of the following to select the menu options you want to customize. If you want to add a menu and all of its options, highlight the menu name, then click Add. The menu and all of its options will be displayed in the Customized Menu list on the right hand side pane of the screen. If you want to add all menus and their options to your customized menu, click Add All. All menus and their options will be displayed in the Customized Menu list on the right hand side pane of the screen. If you want to remove a menu or option that you have already added to your customized menu, highlight the option and click Remove.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

183

Figure 5-52. Customize Menu Summary Manager Dialog Box 5. Click OK to save these changes to the Screen Layout menu bar.

5.1.6.4.4.

How to Associate Keys to Menus


To associate a shortcut key to a menu option, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Customize Menu Screen Layout dialog box select Customize Keyboard. The Customize Keyboard dialog box is displayed. For information on the dialog box, refer to Customize Keyboard Dialog Box... Page 181.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

184

Operating the Console

Figure 5-53. Customize Keyboard 3. 4. Select the menu from the Commands list. Select the key which will be used to invoke the menu from the Key list. You can also associate a combination key presses for a menu, for example, F2 key in combination with Shift and Ctrl keys. To do this, select the VK_F1 and then Ctrl and Shift check boxes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

185

Figure 5-54. Customize Keyboard 5. Click Close.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

186
5.1.6.5.
5.1.6.5.1.

Operating the Console

Search for a Site


Find a Site/Key Holder Dialog Box

Figure 5-55. Find a Site/Key Holder Dialog Box

Parameters
Search button Clear All button Site Data tab

Description
Click to initiate the search for the sites that match the specified criteria. Click to clear the entries in the Site Data and Panel Page tabs. Before beginning a new search click on this button. Type details you know about the site in the relevant text boxes, e.g. site number, name, address, verification code, etc. This sets the site search criteria, i.e. search will be executed based on the specified information.

Table 5-25. Find a Site/Key Holder Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

187

Parameters
Panel Page tab

Description
Type details you know about the site in the relevant text boxes, e.g. field controller type, line card number, etc. This sets the site search criteria, i.e. search will be executed based on the specified information. Click to specify additional conditions for search. Lists the results from the search. All available sites which match search criteria are listed in this drop-down. Click to view the selected record from the Available Records drop-down. Click to close the Find a Site/Key Holder dialog box and move the cursor to point at the site which match the selected record from the Available Records drop-down. Click to exit the dialog box without locating a site.

More button Available Records drop-down list View Details button Select button

Cancel button

Table 5-25. Find a Site/Key Holder Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions (continued)

5.1.6.5.2.
1.

How to Locate a Site in the Layout


To locate a site in the layout, do one of the following: 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Locate a Site. Select the Locate a Site icon from the toolbar.

The Find a Site/Key Holder dialog box will be displayed. Find a Site/Key Holder Dialog Box... Page 186

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

188

Operating the Console

Figure 5-56. Find a Site/Key Holder Dialog Box 3. To locate a specific site, type any details you know about the site in the relevant text boxes in either of the Site Data and/or Panel Page tab pages. Click Search. GMS will search for the site(s) that match the criteria you have entered. The search results will be displayed in the Available Records drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box. Choose the record you want to locate from the Available Records drop-down list and click View Details to view details about the site. Alternatively, click Select and the cursor will point to the site on the Summary Manager window.

4.

5.

5.1.6.5.3.

How to Find the Highest Site Range in the Layout


To find the highest site range in the layout, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Screen Layout window Options menu select Find Highest Site Number. An information box will be displayed, showing the highest site number in the range. An example is shown (See Figure 5-57).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

189

Figure 5-57. Summary Screen Information Box 3. Click OK.

5.1.7. Manipulating Multi Site Guard Tour


You can assign a tour guide of the sites for guards. The following sub-sections deals in how to setup the guard tours for multi sites. How to Setup a New Guard Tour... Page 189 How to Modify an Existing Guard Tour... Page 190 How to Delete an Existing Guard Tour... Page 191

Also for a section on monitoring multi site guard tour, see Multi Site Guard Tour Status Window... Page 192.

5.1.7.1.

How to Setup a New Guard Tour


To setup a new guard tour, proceed as following. 1. 2. From the Summary Manager window Setup menu select Multi Site Guard Tour. The Multi Site Guard Tour Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

190

Operating the Console

Figure 5-58. Multi Site Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box 3. Type a name that you plan to use as the name for the tour in the Guard Tour Name text box. Type the site number in the Site No. text box. Type the point number or reader number in the Point No. text box. If specifying a reader number then select the Reader check box. Type in the Station Duration text box the duration the guard has to get to this point or reader. Click Add to tour to the list. To add more points to the list of the tour, repeat steps 4-8 until the guard tour is complete. Click Close.

4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10.

5.1.7.2.

How to Modify an Existing Guard Tour


To modify an existing guard tour, proceed as following. 1. In the Multi Site Guard Tour Configuration dialog box, select a tour from the Guard Tour Name from the drop-down.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2. Do one of the following.

191

To modify an entry, select the entry from the displayed list. Modify any of the Site No., Point No., Station Duration text boxes and click Update. To insert an entry in middle of existing entries then, highlight the guard sequence just before the one you want to add. Click Add and then select and modify the entry and click Update.

3.

Click Close.

Note: At this time Alarm points and Card Readers can not be used on the same guard tour.

5.1.7.3.

How to Delete an Existing Guard Tour


To delete an existing guard tour, proceed as following. 1. In the Multi Site Guard Tour Configuration dialog box, select a tour from the Guard Tour Name from the drop-down. Click Delete to the delete the tour. Click Close.

2. 3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

192
5.1.7.4.

Operating the Console

Multi Site Guard Tour Status Window

Figure 5-59. Multi Site Guard Tour Status Window

Parameter
Guard Tour Name Time Site No. Point No. Status

Description
Select the guard tour name you wish to monitor. Displays the time that the programmed guard point was reached. Displays the site number of the guard tour. Displays the point number programmed into the system of the point the guard has to activate. Displays the status of the selected guard tour. It displays Out of Time, Time Out, Complete or (Guard Tour Name) OK where the brackets will display the guard tour name selected. Click to start the selected guard tour. Click to pause the selected Guard Tour. When selected this button will change state and display Resume. Select Resume to continue the guard tour, the button will then display Pause. Click to terminate the selected guard tour.

Start Pause

Terminate

Table 5-26. Multi Site Guard Tour Status Window Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

193

5.2.

Events Manager
Events Manager displays the status of all events occurring at remote sites in your security network. Events include alarms of differing priority and importance, the status of site elements and any occurrence that may affect the security of a remote site. Events are displayed in Events Manager as they occur providing operators with an overview of the security network at a glance. Events Manager can be configured to display these events in any given order, according to the importance placed on actioning a particular event. The method used to action an event is based on the events priority and security risk. Each event has standard steps that must be followed to complete an event action. All events must be actioned. Using Events Manager an operator can: view events immediately as they occur in the security network action events with the correct steps, by using displayed instructions configure events to suit the needs of operators gain an overview at a glance of the total alarm situation of the entire security network.

Start Events Manager by choosing the Events Manager option from the View menu of the GMS main window. Alternatively, click on the Events Manager toolbar button in the main window.

5.2.1. Events Manager Main Window


The main window of Events Manager is where the status of all events and alarms are displayed immediately as they occur at remote sites in the security network. It provides operators with an overview of the security network at a glance. Events are all activities that occur at a remote site. Events include alarms of differing priority and importance, the status of site elements and any occurrence that may affect the security of a remote site. The Events Manager main window can be configured to display these events in any given order, according to the importance placed on actioning a particular event.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

194

Operating the Console You can choose the order in which events are displayed in the main window. Click on a column header to display events in that order. The column headers of the Events Manager main window determine the format of event messages and their appearance. Column headers can be configured to suit the needs of operators and the specific security network. For example, click on the Priority header to display events according to their priority level, from highest to lowest. Or click on the Time header to display events according to the time they occurred.

Note: Under the GMS main menu > User menu there is a Shift Change... option. This will display the Logoff/Logon dialog box allowing an operator to log off and another operator to log on while keeping all the events on the Events Manager screen.

Figure 5-60. Events Manager Main Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

195

Function
View... Configure... Event No.

Description
Click this button to display a drop-down list. Select a menu item to view it. Click this button to display a drop-down list. Select a menu item to view it. The number identifying the event from all others that occur at the site. This number will be automatically generated by the system. Selection of this button will sort the displayed events in numerical order (descending). The time that the event occurred is displayed in this column. Selection of this button will sort the displayed events in the order of which they occurred. All alarm types and events have a priority number. This number indicates the priority of the event, its security risk and the importance of actioning the event as it occurs. Selection of this button will sort the displayed events in the order of their priority.

Time

Priority

Count Event Description Describes the event or alarm type. The description is brief, e.g. Device Tamper. This allows operators to gain an overview of the situation before they take the appropriate action. The number displayed in this column is the number of the site where the event has occurred. Selection of this button will sort the events by site number (descending). This is the physical location (address) of the site where the event has occurred. Selection of this button will sort the events by site location. This is the operating state of the alarm system (night or day mode) when the event occurred.

Site No.

Site Location

State Flags Action

Selection of this button will display the operator instructions and the site map for the event selected.

Table 5-27. Events Manager Function Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

196

Operating the Console

Function
Suspend Move

Description
Suspends the highlighted event and places it in the Suspended Events list. Click this button to display the Move fly-out window (see below). Use this option to move an event to another workstation for actioning. An event may require actioning by a more qualified operator, hence the need to transfer the event to another workstation. Allows the operator to take no action on an event. When the action the operator previously took requires further actions they are placed in the Pending Events list. When the operator suspends an event, the event will be displayed in this drop-down list for the length of time entered in the Suspend fly-out window. Group Action allows the operator to perform the same action to more than one event at the same time. Performing a group action saves valuable time by allowing you to collectively perform an action to a group of events, instead of actioning the same type of event one at a time. Group Cmds (commands) allows the operator to perform the same command simultaneously to a large range of map elements within a site. These elements include input points, output points, keypads and card readers, as well as other elements located within a site. Enables the operator to search among events using a vast array of different variables. From your operator workstation, you can view statistics about system events that have occurred within Events Manager. Event and alarm statistics provide a record of the current events displayed on your workstation. It gives an overview as to how many events of a particular priority are unacknowledged, pending or suspended.

No Action Pending Events Suspended Events

Group Action...

Group Cmds...

Search Statistics...

Table 5-27. Events Manager Function Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

197

5.2.2. How to View The Details of An Event


Events are all activities that occur at a remote site. Events include alarms of differing priority and importance, the status of site elements and any occurrence that may affect the security of a remote site. All events must be actioned. The method used to action an event is based on the events priority and security risk. Each event has specific steps that must be followed to complete an event action. Standard operator instructions are automatically displayed when an operator views and actions an event. This ensures both accuracy and uniformity in the way all events are actioned, and minimizes error. Events are listed in the Events Manager window as an event message. The event message provides operators with a quick overview of the situation, allowing them to action each event according to their priority and security risk. You can gain more detailed information about an event and the action it requires by doubleclicking on the event message. Alternatively, you can highlight an event message and click the appropriate command button, such as Action, Suspend, Move or No Action. These commands are detailed later in this chapter. When you select and view an event from the Events Manager window, details are displayed in a Map View window. The Map View window displays a map of the site area where the event is occurring, together with site details and operator instructions outlining the correct steps to follow to action the event. To view event details: Double-click the event message from the Events Manager window, or highlight the event message and click Action.

The Map View window will be displayed, together with the Operator Instructions dialog box. Map View... Page 197

5.2.2.1.

Map View
When you select and view an event from the Events Manager window, details are displayed in a Map View window. The Map View window displays a map of the site area where the event is occurring, together with site details and operator instructions outlining the correct steps to follow to action the event. The number and name of the site is displayed in the title bar of the Map View window. To open a Map View window:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

198

Operating the Console Double-click the event message from the Events Manager window, or highlight the event message and click Action.

The Map View window will be displayed.

Figure 5-61. Default Map View Window The appearance of the Map View window can be configured to suit an operators needs. It is divided into sections, with each section being allocated to display specific details about the site. For example, an operator can choose to display or hide a site map, site events log, area summary, or operator instructions. Use the commands in the View menu to display or hide these areas and elements of the Map View window.

5.2.2.2.

How to View Workstation Events


You can view information about the events actioned by specific workstations. This information includes workstation and operator information, an event/alarm count, and the actions performed for each event. This information is essentially used as a log to record operator performance and the events they action.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

199

Workstation events information is similar to the information found in the main Event Summary window, but is specific to a particular workstation. It may be used by supervisors to view specific information about an operator.

Note: This option may not be available for you to view. This is dependent on the authorizations your supervisor has set for you.
To view workstation events, proceed as follows. 1. From the operator workstation click View at the top of the Events Manager window. Select the Workstation Events option to display the Enter Console No. dialog box.

Figure 5-62. Enter Console No. Dialog Box 2. You must specify the workstation or operator for which you want to view events. Enter the number of the workstation for which you want to view a specific summary of events performed, in the Enter Console No. text box. Or select the name of the operator for which you want to view a specific events summary from the Operator drop-down list. Click OK. The Events Manager > Workstation # dialog box will be displayed, showing a specific events summary for actions performed by the operator on that workstation.

3.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

200

Operating the Console

Figure 5-63. Events Summary > Workstation # Dialog Box 5. The workstation/console and operator numbers which you specified are displayed in the title bar.

A brief summary of total events for this operator and workstation is displayed in the status bar at the top of the dialog box, indicating the number, type and priority of alarms actioned. More detailed information about these events is displayed in the main, Pending Events and Suspended Events windows. 6. Click the X in the top right hand corner of the dialog box to exit this screen.

5.2.3. Pending Events


Pending events are events waiting to be actioned. They have been viewed by an operator, but have not been completed. Pending events may have a lower priority than other events, and delaying their action will not affect the security of a remote site. Pending events are displayed at the bottom of the Events Manager main window in the Pending Events drop-down list. Operators can access these events at a later time when other higher priority events have been actioned and completed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

201

5.2.4. How to Suspend Alarms


There may be times when you cannot finish processing an alarm or event. This may be for a variety of reasons, such as: the contact person for a site may be unavailable; the site in alarm may require repair; the alarm situation may require additional processing at a later time.

If you cannot finish processing an alarm, you may put it in a Suspended Events queue to suspend, or delay actioning the alarm. Generally, delaying this additional action will not affect the security of a remote site. Every organization has different procedures for suspending events and alarms. What one organization views as a valid reason for suspending an alarm, another may require you to complete a different action. Suspended events are displayed at the bottom of the Events Manager main window in the Suspended Events drop-down list. Operators can either: access these events at a later time when other higher priority events have been actioned and completed, or set a time limit, after which the alarm will be re-displayed on your screen to be processed.

To suspend an alarm, proceed as follows. 1. If you cannot finish processing an alarm until a later time, click the alarm in the Events Manager alarm window to highlight it. Click Suspend at the bottom of the alarm window. The Suspend dialog box will be displayed. In the Enter Suspend Time (Mins) text box, type the length of time you want to suspend the processing of the alarm. Type this time in minutes. Click OK to send the alarm to the Suspended Events queue. The alarm will be displayed in the Suspended Events window at the bottom of the Events Manager window. When the time limit you set has elapsed, the alarm will be re-displayed in the Events Manager alarm window. Process the alarm with the required action (see Processing Alarms for further information about processing alarms).

2.

3.

4.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

202

Operating the Console 6. If you are not ready to finish processing the alarm, you can choose to send the alarm back to the Suspended Events queue. Follow steps 1 - 4 to send the alarm back to the Suspended Events queue. When you send an alarm to the Suspended Events queue, you must record the reason for doing so. The Reason to Suspend dialog box will be automatically displayed when you send an alarm to the queue.

7.

Note: It depends upon the organization whether the operator needs to enter a reason for suspending an alarm. Click Close to suspend without entering any information. For more information check with your supervisor about your organizations procedures for suspending alarms.
8. In the Enter Text area, type a message outlining the reason you want to delay processing the alarm. Other operators may have suspended similar alarms in the past. Check the Text Template area for an existing message that is applicable to your reason for suspending an alarm. If you want to use one of these existing reasons, highlight this message in the Text Template area, then click Copy to copy this information to the Enter Text area.

9.

If the reason you are suspending the alarm is a commonly occurring reason, and you want to save it as a template for future use, highlight your reason in the Enter Text area, then click Save to Template. The message will be saved in the Text Template area. Click OK when you are finished entering a reason for suspending the alarm to save and exit, or click Cancel to exit without saving.

10.

5.2.5. How to Move Alarms to Another Workstation


When an alarm occurs, it is displayed immediately on an operators workstation. The specific workstation that the alarm is displayed on is determined by the way GMS is programmed. Events and alarms are pre-programmed by supervisors to be sent to particular workstations. A number of methods can be used to determine which workstation an event is sent to when it occurs. Examples include: It may be displayed on the next available workstation. It may be displayed according to its priority or security risk.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

203

You can move an event or alarm to another workstation to be actioned by another operator. This may be for a variety of reasons (e.g. an event may require action by an operator with more experience). Check with your supervisor for other reasons your organization may allow you to move events to other workstations. To move an event to another operator workstation, proceed as follows. 1. In the Events Manager main window, highlight the event you want to move. Click Move at the bottom of the Events Manager window. The Move window will be displayed.

Figure 5-64. Move Window 2. Type the number of the workstation you want to transfer the alarm to in the Enter Workstation No. text box. Or select the operator you want to action the alarm, from the Operator drop-down list. Click OK to move the alarm to this workstation, or Cancel to exit without moving the alarm. The alarm will be displayed on the designated operators workstation. They should action or process the alarm accordingly.

3. 4.

5.

5.2.6. Alarms Requiring No Action


Some events do not require formal action. You can clear these alarms or events from your workstation screen to ensure that alarms of higher security risk have priority on the screen. Alarms that require no action are different types of nuisance alarms, and may differ between organizations. Check with your supervisor for definitions of the nuisance alarms for your organization.

Note: The No Action option is not available to most operator Access Levels.
For alarms that require no action, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

204

Operating the Console 1. 2. Highlight the event in the Events Manager main window, then click No Action.... The event will be automatically deleted from the operator workstation (i.e. the Events Manager, System Summary and Alarm Monitor windows).

5.2.7. Group Action


You can perform the same action to more than one event at the same time. This is known as a Group Action. Performing a group action saves valuable time by allowing you to collectively perform an action to a group of events, instead of actioning the same type of event one at a time.

Note: It is important to remember that when performing a group action to a group of events, they must all require the same action.
To perform the same action to a group of events, you must group events together that have similar characteristics. You can group events together using: their alarm priority; their site number; their event number; the time they occurred; their alarm type.

For example, you can group together all events with a particular alarm priority, and perform the same action to them at the same time. Alternatively, you can group together all events of the same alarm type, and perform the same action to them at the same time. To perform a group action, proceed as follows. 1. Click Group Action... in the Events Manager window. The Group Event Action dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

205

Figure 5-65. Group Event Action Window 2. Enter the criteria by which you want to group together events for actioning. Position the cursor in the appropriate text box and then type one of the following criteria:

Criteria
Alarm Priority Site No. Event No. Time Slot Alarm Type

Information Required
Type alarm priorities as singular or a range, e.g. 1-5, 10, 20. Type site numbers as singular or a range, e.g. 1, 4, 15-20. Type event numbers as singular or a range, e.g. 1, 3-7, 20. Type the time range in which the group of events occurred. Click the drop-down list and select an alarm type.

Table 5-28. Group Event Action Parameters 3. Click the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen for the action you want to perform to the group of events: If you want to postpone the events for actioning at a later time, click Suspend.... A suspend window will be displayed. Enter the amount of time you want to postpone the events, then click OK or Cancel to exit without saving.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

206

Operating the Console

Figure 5-66. Entering the Suspend Time If you want to move the events to another workstation for actioning by another operator, click Move... A window will be displayed. Enter the workstation number you want to move the events to and select an operator name from the drop-down list. Click OK to move the group of events, or Cancel to exit without saving.

Figure 5-67. Move Window If you do not want to action the group of events, click No Action. The group of events will automatically be deleted from the Events Manager window. If you want to acknowledge the group of events, click Ack. The group of events will automatically be acknowledged in the Events Manager window.

4.

Click Cancel to exit the Group Event Action dialog box when you have finished performing all group actions.

5.2.8. Group Commands


You can perform the same command simultaneously to a large range of map elements within a site. These are known as group commands. These elements include input points, output points, keypads and card readers, as well as other elements located within a site. The type of alarm you are actioning may require you to isolate alarm points, turn on output points, lock keypads, etc. Being able to perform the same command to a group of elements saves you valuable time, rather than having to update them one at a time.

Note: To perform a group command, the group of elements must be of the same type, and you must be performing the same command to each element.
To perform a group command, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 1.

207

From the operator workstation, click Group Cmd... at the bottom of the Events Manager window. (Alternatively, select Group... from the View menu of the Site Map window in Events Manager.) The Group Commands dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-68. Group Commands Window 2. Select an existing group command from the Available Group Commands drop-down list. If the command you want is not available, you can define the command in the Commands section of this screen. Select the name of the site group you want to perform the group command within, from the Site Groups drop-down list. The range of sites will be displayed in the status window of the Site Groups section.

3.

Note: To edit a site group, click the Edit button.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

208

Operating the Console 4. From the Point Types section, click the appropriate option for the type of point you are updating, e.g. input points (a black dot will appear inside it to indicate that it is selected).

Note: Remember, you can only choose one point type. All point types must be the same to perform the group command. To perform a command with a different point type, a separate group command must be performed.
5. Indicate the name of the Point Group to which you want to perform the group command, by clicking Edit next to the Point Groups text box. The Point Groups Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Choose a point group from the Enter Group Name drop-down list and the range of points in this group will be displayed in the Enter Range section. Alternatively, type a new Point Group Name, then type the range of points included in this new point group. Click OK. The Group Commands dialog box will be redisplayed. From the Commands section, click the appropriate option for the command you want to perform to the points. Different commands are available according to the Point Type you have selected. Unavailable commands will be greyed out. A black dot will appear inside an option to indicate that it is selected. If you select the None option in the Point Types section, a drop-down list of Miscellaneous commands will be available. If applicable, select a Miscellaneous command from this list. To edit a miscellaneous command, click Edit.

6.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

209

Figure 5-69. Group Commands Misc Options 8. Type a time in the Time Until text box. This time indicates the amount of time until the group command will be performed. Click OK to action these changes, or click Cancel to exit without saving.

9.

At the appropriate time you have indicated, the group command will be performed to the range of elements within the site. You can perform more than one group command by programming another group command to take place at a specific time. Repeat the above steps if you want to perform a command to a range of different point types (e.g. output points, keypads).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

210

Operating the Console

5.2.9. How to Search for A Site


There may be times when you need to search for a site map within GMS. This may be because a map for the site for which you are actioning an alarm did not automatically display. It may be for a variety of other reasons. You can manually search for and display a specific site area within GMS, using specific search criteria or details that you know about the site. To search for a site area in Events Manager, proceed as follows. 1. From the operator workstation, click Search... at the bottom the Events Manager window. The Find a Site/Key Holder dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-70. Find A Site/Key Holder Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2.

211

Use this dialog box to indicate the criteria you want to use to search for the site. Use specific criteria where possible for more accurate search results. Refer to the context sensitive help in this screen if you require specific information about each text box on this screen. If applicable, type your verification code in the Verification Code text box. This is an additional security option your supervisor may set to prevent unauthorized viewing of site maps. Click Search on the right hand side of the screen. GMS will begin searching the database for any records that match your criteria. At the end of the search, results will be displayed in the Available Records drop-down list. To perform a new search, click Clear All, then repeat steps 2 to 4. To view details about a site, highlight the site in the Available Records drop-down list, then click View Details. The Site Details report will be displayed. Refer to Viewing Reports for more information about using the report view window. If the site you are searching for is displayed in the Available Records drop-down list, select this site, then click OK. The site map for that site area will be displayed in the Events Manager window. To search for an field controller or line card select the Panel Page tab.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

5.2.10. How to View Event Statistics


From your operator workstation, you can view statistics about system events that have occurred within Events Manager. Event and alarm statistics provide a record of the current events displayed on your workstation. It gives an overview as to how many events of a particular priority are unacknowledged, pending or suspended. You cannot action alarms from this statistics screen. You must perform the appropriate action to the alarms via the Events Manager window. To display event statistics, proceed as follows. 1. From your operator workstation, click Statistics... at the bottom of the Events Manager. The Event Statistics dialog box will be displayed. Priority Unacked

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

212

Operating the Console Pending Suspended

Figure 5-71. Event Statistics Window 2. View the statistics accordingly. Use the scroll bars to display more event priority numbers. Click OK to exit the statistics screen.

3.

5.2.11. Using General Instructions And Canned Responses


Sometimes unusual situations may arise when you are monitoring alarms. You may choose to process or action an alarm, but are unable to for the following reasons: The situation may not be classified as an alarm. Instructions may not be displayed because they have not been pre-programmed into the system.

Rather than making custom operator instructions (which is quite complex) the answer was to provide different templates.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

213

The system is backwards compatible so if an operator is happy with the standard template, they don't have to change anything. The system will run exactly as it used to run without making any changes. The configuration/colors do not have to be changed - they are defaulted to the black color - and the previous template - and will be using it exactly as they used to use it. To use the new templates the go into the site map - and they select the template - and select the colors they like - to display for each and every instruction. These choices are based on the operator. It is not global to the system. E.g. If one template is selected it does not become the default for everyone.

Note: New templates cannot be created by users. Pacom will create any new templates.

5.2.11.1. Operator Instruction Settings


Operator Instruction Settings allows operators to alter the font and color of an operator instruction and save these changes into a template. To change Operator Instruction Settings, proceed as follows. 1. From the Map View window select Setup > Operator Instruction Settings. The Operator Instruction Settings dialog box is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

214

Operating the Console

Figure 5-72. Operator Instruction Settings Operators can modify the settings of: Font Colors of different types of Operator Instructions Active Operator Instruction Template

5.2.11.1.1.

Edit Template Name


Operators can also modify template names by double-clicking on the template name to display the Edit Template Name dialog as shown below:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

215

Figure 5-73. Edit Template Name Dialog Box Click OK to change the template name or Cancel if you changed your mind.

5.2.11.2. Operational Settings


This setting is convenient to avoid having the operator instructions pop up on top of an alarm.

Note: This setting must be done on the server to apply to all workstations.
To enable (or disable) the Show Site Map Only (on Alarm Action) setting, proceed as follows. 1. 2. On the server, in Map View go to Setup and choose Operator Instruction Settings.... Check (or uncheck) Show Site Map Only (on Alarm Action) and click OK. Enabling it will disable Site Map and Operator Instructions (Callout List) under Map View > Setup > Display Options on all workstations.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

216

Operating the Console

Figure 5-74. Map View > Setup > Display Options Disabled You can still access the operator instructions despite their pop-up feature having been disabled. This can however only be accessed through an event. Proceed as follows. 1. 2. When an event occurs click Action. This opens the Map View containing the alarm. In this Map View select View > Operator Instructions or click . You can also access the operator instructions from this Map View with a left click on the device which is currently in alarm. This will display a drop-down menu.

Figure 5-75. Operator Instructions Access From Event Actioning 3. Click Operator Instructions... to display the instructions for this point.

Note: You will not be able to access the operator instructions through the Summary Manager. It has to be accessed through the Map View that is opened when actioning an alarm.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

217

5.2.11.3. Operator Instruction Template


The Operator Instruction Template dialog was added so the site data does not obstruct the instructions.

Figure 5-76. Operator Instructions Click Site Data to display the site information dialog box. The content of this dialog is picked up from user page 2 of the Site Data. This could be general instructions based on the site.

5.2.11.4. Color Selection


Operator Instructions (an operator would see when actioning an alarm) are displayed in the standard dialog box, are in black and because they are in black, they do not stand out at a distance. So based on the importance of the instruction can we make them distinguishable from a distance - e.g. call the police.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

218

Operating the Console

Figure 5-77. Operator Instructions > Showing Colored Instructions Examples: Instruction in red means do it straight away. If it is green it may just involve some reading. Blue may mean call the guard.

There have been two changes to implement this: Provide different templates to determine how they would like to display the instructions. Give a choice of providing colors for different instructions. E.g. red for police, brown for patrol, green for information.

The names are hard coded. E.g. police is police.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

219

5.2.11.5. Call Progress


The Call Progress dialog box displays a phone listbox (of up to 3 numbers) whenever staff/key holders have more than one contact number (home, business and/or mobile).

Figure 5-78. Call Progress Dialog Box > Showing 3 Contact Numbers

Note: The phone listbox is not displayed if there is only one contact number.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

220

Operating the Console

5.2.11.6. Update Canned Response Dialog


The Canned Response dialog box displays all configured key holders in the Called combo box.

Figure 5-79. Canned Response Dialog Box

5.2.11.7. Display Style for Notes


In the Operator Instructions dialog box as the note is longer than the display length the content of this text is truncated to display only two lines. is to indicate that more text can be read by clicking Details or double-clicking the instruction.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

221

Figure 5-80. Operator Instructions > Details The entire notes will be displayed in the dialog box. The instruction continues when the next button is pushed. Up to 16 instructions are allowed per site - so that may be 3 or 4 pages - as every page only displays 5 instructions.

5.2.12. Viewing Workstation Information


You can view information about specific workstations. This information includes the workstation number and type, the operators number and name, and the number of events actioned on each workstation.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

222

Operating the Console This information is essentially used as a log to record operator performance and the events they action. This option may not be available for you to view. This is dependent on the authorizations your supervisor has set for you. To view workstation information, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the operator workstation, click View... at the top of the Events Manager window. Select the Workstation Information... option to display the Operator/Workstation Information dialog box. When you have finished viewing the information, click Close to exit.

3.

5.2.13. Viewing Workstation Events


You can view information about the events actioned by specific workstations. This information includes workstation and operator information, an event/alarm count, and the actions performed for each event. This information is essentially used as a log to record operator performance and the events they action. Workstation events information is similar to the information found in the main Events Manager window, but is specific to a particular workstation. It may be used by supervisors to view specific information about an operator.

Note: This option may not be available for you to view. This is dependent on the authorizations your supervisor has set for you.
This option may not be available for you to view. This is dependent on the authorizations your supervisor has set for you. To view workstation events, proceed as follows. 1. From the operator workstation, click View... at the top of the Events Manager window. Select the Workstation Events option to display the Enter Console No. dialog box.

Figure 5-81. Enter Console No.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2.

223

You must specify the workstation or operator for which you want to view events. Enter the number of the workstation for which you want to view a specific summary of events performed, in the Enter Console No. text box. Or select the name of the operator for which you want to view a specific events summary from the Operator drop-down list. Click OK. The Events Summary > Workstation # dialog box will be displayed, showing a specific events summary for actions performed by the operator on that workstation.

3.

4.

Figure 5-82. Events Summary - Workstation # 5. The workstation/console and operator numbers which you specified are displayed in the title bar.

A brief summary of total events for this operator and workstation is displayed in the status bar at the top of the dialog box, indicating the number, type and priority of alarms actioned. More detailed information about these events is displayed in the main, Pending Events and Suspended Events windows. 6. Click the X in the top right hand corner of the dialog box to exit this screen.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

224

Operating the Console

5.2.14. Message Board


The Message Board is used to send and receive messages between operators. These messages can be sent to: an entire site, a particular event, an individual operator, or broadcast to all operators.

To display the Message Board click View... and then select the Message Board... command.

Alternatively click on the Message Board icon

on the toolbar.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

225

Figure 5-83. Message Board All message board commands are accessed by clicking the associated icon on the toolbar.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

226

Operating the Console

Icon

Command
View Site messages

Icon

Command
Create a new message

View Event messages

Delete an existing message

View Operator messages

Print a message

View Broadcast messages

Search to find messages using a filter Refresh messages

View All messages

Options for checking message frequency and message display settings Table 5-29. Toolbar Icons

5.2.14.1. Create And Send A New Message


To create a new message, proceed as follows. 1. Click the New icon to display a new message window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

227

Figure 5-84. New Message Window 2. Select the Message Type.

Figure 5-85. Message Type Drop-Down List 3. Select a destination from the drop-down list. In this example Operator Message is selected.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

228

Operating the Console

Figure 5-86. Destination Drop-Down List

Note: The name of the text box will change depending on the message type.

Message type
Site message Event message Operator message Broadcast message

text box name


Site No.: Event No.: Operator No.: text box is not displayed

Table 5-30. Destination text box Names 4. The message can be programmed to be sent at some time in the future and only remain valid for a certain length of time. Change the Valid between times/dates should you wish to send the message at another time (or on another day) otherwise leave the settings as they are.

Figure 5-87. Valid Time And Date text boxes 5. Type in a Subject. In this example the subject is Roster Change.

Figure 5-88. Subject text box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 6. Type in a message.

229

Figure 5-89. A New Message 7. Click Send.

Figure 5-90. Send Button 8. A pop up message will alert the recipient that a new message has arrived.

Figure 5-91. New Mail Message

Note: If the receiving operator is not logged on (to GMS) the message will display (when next logging onto GMS) whenever another operator logs on.

5.2.14.2. View And Reply to A Message


To view a message in the Message Board, proceed as follows. 1. Select the message you want to read and double click.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

230

Operating the Console

Figure 5-92. Message Board List The message will be displayed in a window.

Figure 5-93. Displayed Message 2. Either acknowledge or reply to the message. To acknowledge, click Acknowledge and the window will disappear. To reply, click Reply and the message will be displayed with most of the text boxes filled in. When you click Close the message will close and show as an unread message on the message board.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

231

Note: The message MUST either be acknowledged or replied to.


The yellow envelope indicates whether a message has been read (acknowledged or replied to) with an open envelope or unread with the enveloped closed.

Figure 5-94. Closed Letter Means Unread - Open Means Read 3. If you chose to reply, type a message in the message area.

Figure 5-95. The Return Message Has Been Typed In 4. Click Send.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

232

Operating the Console

5.2.14.3. Delete A Message


To delete a message(s) from the Message Board, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Select the message(s) that you want to delete. Click the Delete icon or press the DEL key. A dialog box will display asking you to confirm the delete action.

Figure 5-96. Message Board Delete Message Dialog Box 4. Click OK to confirm the deletion or click Cancel to leave the message as it is.

5.2.14.4. Search for A Message


The find messages command can search all existing messages according to the rules you put into the filter. You can search by: the Message No. the Message Type and/or Operator No. who created the message when the message was created when the message is valid when the message was delivered

To search through the messages, proceed as follows. 1. 2. Click the Search icon on the toolbar to display the Find messages dialog box. Decide which of the search rules you want to use and click the corresponding check box. Clicking the check box will activate the corresponding text box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

233

Figure 5-97. Find Messages Dialog Box When the filters are set, click OK to search for message(s). Any messages meeting the search rules will be displayed in the message board along with how many were found.

Figure 5-98. Number of Messages Found During A Search If no messages were found during the search the message board will be empty and No message found will be displayed.

Figure 5-99. No Messages Found

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

234

Operating the Console

5.2.15. Configure Commands


Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window to display a menu of configuration commands. All Events Manager configuration can be conducted via these commands.

Figure 5-100. Menu of Configuration Commands

5.2.15.1. Alarm Priorities


Use the Alarm Priorities command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to configure and assign priority to different types of GMS alarms. Alarms are given a level of priority that indicates the type of alarm and the level of security risk they present to a remote site. To configure alarm priorities, click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window to display a configuration menu, then select Alarm Priorities from this list. The Alarm Priorities Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

235

Figure 5-101. Alarm Priority Configuration Window To configure alarm priorities, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure at the top of the Events Manager window to display a configuration menu. Choose the Alarm Priorities option from this menu. The Alarm Priorities Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Click the Pacom Message Category drop-down list to display a list of the Pacom alarm message types. These categories indicate the type of alarm and can affect the alarm priority, e.g. external alarms would be given higher priority than status messages. Choose a description of the event/alarm type from the Message drop-down list. This description appears in the Events Manager window and indicates the type of alarm to the operator, who can then perform the appropriate action required. Choose an option from the Message Group drop-down list. Messages are grouped together with alarms of similar types. Enter the relevant Alarm, Reset and Isolate priorities for the message group in the Mode/Status boxes.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

236

Operating the Console 6. Click OK to save these alarm priorities and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

5.2.15.2. Event Priority Data


Use the Event Priority Data... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to configure the appearance of event messages displayed in Events Manager. You can also use this command to configure the action response time required by an operator for specific events. To edit event priority data, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window. Choose the Event Priority Data... option to display the Priority Configuration dialog box.

Figure 5-102. Priority Configuration Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2.

237

The alarm priorities available in GMS are displayed in the Priority No. column. To display more alarm priority numbers in the Priority No. column, click the arrow buttons (<< and >>). The total number of available priorities is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. To display more options for the appearance of event messages in Events Manager, click Options.... The Events Manager options dialog box will be displayed. Click the relevant options you want to use, then click OK to save these changes or Cancel to exit without saving. To change the color of a bitmap, double click the color box next to the corresponding priority number you want to change. The Color Palette dialog box will be displayed. Choose the new foreground and background colors from the Color Palette, then click OK to assign these new colors, or Cancel to exit without saving. To change the color of an event message, click the priority you want to change from the Message Color column. The Color Palette dialog box will be displayed. Choose the new foreground and background colors from the Color Palette, then click OK to assign these new colors, or Cancel to exit without saving. To make an event message of a specific priority flash (this may indicate a high priority), click the Flash check box next to the appropriate priority number. A checkmark will be displayed when the Flash option is selected. To place a time limit on the response time required to action an event of a specific priority, place the cursor in the appropriate Time To Action text box, then type the time in minutes. An operator must perform the appropriate action within this time limit for events of this priority. When a time is indicated in the PNR (Point Not Reset) Time text box, a warning will be generated when an alarm has timed out. If an operator fails to action an alarm within the time specified in the Time To Action text box, the warning will remind them of the need to action the alarm situation. To assign a sound to alarm situations of specific priorities, click Sound at the top of the dialog box. The Sound tab will be displayed. If you want a voice message to sound during the alarm, type the text that you want sounded in the Voice Text text box next to the corresponding priority number. If you want a beep to sound during the alarm, indicate the Beep Frequency and the Beep Count in the relevant text boxes next to the corresponding priority number. When you have finished making the appropriate changes to the appearance and action response time of Events Manager messages, click OK to save the changes and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

238

Operating the Console

5.2.15.2.1.

Events Manager Options


In Events Manager click Configure... and choose Event Priority Data.... In the Priority Configuration dialog box click Optionsto display the Event Summary Options. This provides the operator with a means to control how event summary priorities are displayed and actioned by default.

Figure 5-103. Events Manager Options Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

239

Parameter
Event Sorting:

Description
Check this box for events to be displayed in descending order (e.g. 1 at the top and 99 at the bottom). Clear the box to display events in ascending order. (e.g. 99 at the top and 1 at the bottom). Check this box to display events with a higher number as having the higher priority (e.g. 32 will have a higher priority than 31). Clear the box to display events with a lower number as having a higher priority (e.g. 1 will have a higher priority than 2 this is common in the US). Check this box to highlight the most recent event displayed. The highlight is in the form of a solid colored bar over the event details. Clear the box should you not want the last event highlighted. Check this box to log Event Report details when the operator has completed an event. A supervisor can then check what (or if any) action was carried out by the operator. Check this box to display a single event for multiple alarms in the same area. You can only enter site data on Map 0. All alarms from that field controller will be a single item on the main Events Manager screen. Check this box to display the name of the card holder along with event details. Type in the minimum number of characters that must be typed in the Event Report by an operator. e.g. If you want 30 characters to be the minimum text size, type 30 in this text box. 255 characters is the maximum. Type in the minimum number of minutes before a deadman response is generated. The maximum is 255 minutes and the minimum is 0. Type in the priority number (greater than) you want to initiate display of a New Event Alert box. e.g. If you want events with a priority greater than 31 to be shown and above to be shown. The maximum should be 254 and the minimum is 0.

Higher the No., Higher the Priority:

Highlight Last Event:

Put Operator Instructions in the Log: Do not Create Separate Event for Areas:

Display Card Holder Name: Min Chars in Event Report/Message Text:

Deadman Timeout (Mins): Show 'New Event Alert' box for event priority greater than:

Table 5-31. Events Manager Options Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

240

Operating the Console

Parameter
Informational Priority Priority for Unconfigured Points Unsuspended Event with Alarm Priority >= Event Escalation Amount

Description
Allows you to assign a priority to a point or message that will not cause an event but can be used for reports. Allows you to assign a priority to points that have not been programmed in Site Map. Type in the priority that will cause a suspended event to come out of the Suspended Queue if an alarm is received (that is greater than or equal to this value). If an event times out its priority is escalated with the value set in Event Escalation Amount. Example: An event with priority 17 is not actioned and times out, giving a time out message (if time out time has been set for that priority). If the value in Event Escalation Amount is set to 2 this event will get the new priority 19 after time out. If priority 19 has a time out set and the event remains un-actioned it will now get priority 21. This continues until the event is actioned, reaches a priority without time out, or reaches last priority. Min = 0, max = 255.

Note: Event escalation can only escalate to the last priority, which default is 32 but can be changed in the system data file External Alarm Groups.
Table 5-31. Events Manager Options Parameters (continued)

5.2.15.3. Event Dispatch Scheme


Use the Event Dispatch Scheme... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to configure the order of workstations to which events are dispatched to be actioned as they occur. By indicating the criteria by which events are dispatched to operators, you can ensure that events of a higher priority and security risk are actioned by more experienced operators. Other events of less priority can be dispatched to be actioned by any operator.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

241

Figure 5-104. Event Dispatch Scheme Configuration Window

Parameter
Event Priority Last Done Round Robin

Description
Dispatch events according to their priority number. Dispatch events to the last operator to action an event. Dispatch events evenly among the operators one at a time. You can define which workstation you want to monitor alarms. This will allow you to have other workstations logged on to monitoring and not receive events but events can be moved there or they can be used as test or trace workstations. Dispatch events according to the type of alarm.

Alarm Type

Table 5-32. Event Dispatch Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

242

Operating the Console

Parameter
Site Time Zone Site Security Level Workstation Type

Description
Dispatch events according to the time zone of the site sounding the alarm. Dispatch events according to the security level of the site sounding the alarm. Dispatch events according to the type of security company workstation being used i.e.such as ID Badging station, Access control workstation and Guard workstation. Dispatch events according to the site group of the site sounding the alarm.

Site Group

Table 5-32. Event Dispatch Parameters (continued) To display the Event Dispatch Configuration dialog box, click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window and select Event Dispatch Scheme....

5.2.15.4. Customize Event Header


Use the Customize Event Header... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to define the event message column headers that are displayed in the Events Manager window. Using this command allows you to determine the information available to users of Events Manager. To customize the Events Manager header, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window. Choose the Customize Event Header... option to display the Customize Events Manager Header dialog box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

243

Figure 5-105. Customize Events Manager Header Window 2. From the Standard Columns list, highlight the name of the header you want to customize. If you want to change the name of the column, position the cursor and type the new name in the New Title text box at the bottom of the Column Title list. If you want to change the width of the column, position the cursor and type the new width in the New Width text box at the bottom of the Column Width list. Click Add to add this customized column to your Events Manager window. The new column header will be displayed in the Selected Columns section. Repeat steps two to five to customize more Events Manager column headers. If you want to customize more than one column header, complete steps two to five for all columns headers, then click Add All>>. All customized column headers will be displayed in the Selected Columns section. If you want to remove a column header that you have already customized, highlight the option in the Selected Columns section and click <<Remove. Click OK to save these changes to the Events Manager column headers, or Cancel to exit without saving.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

8.

9.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

244

Operating the Console

5.2.15.5. Font
Use the Font... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to configure the appearance of the text for messages displayed in the Events Manager window. To change the Events Manager message font, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window. Choose the Font... option to display the Font dialog box.

Figure 5-106. Font Window 2. 3. 4. Choose an appropriate font, font style and size from the relevant scroll down lists. Select the appropriate effects and color from the Effects options (where desired). Click OK to implement the changes to the font style, or Cancel exit without saving.

5.2.15.6. Text to Speech Engine


The Text to Speech option is used to configure the voice used in the Interactive Voice Response module of GMS. The Text to Speech facility in GMS uses the Microsoft Speech Synthesis Engine. Use the Select Text-to-Speech Engine... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to configure the sound of the IVR messages used during testing.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide To change the Text to Speech Engine, proceed as follows. 1.

245

Click Configure at the top of the Events Manager window to display a configuration menu. Choose the Text-To-Speech Engine option from this menu. The Select Engine Mode dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-107. Select Engine Mode Window 2. Select a Speaker Voice from the scroll list.

Note: The characteristics of each voice are detailed as Style in the Name: column.
3. When you have chosen the speaker click OK to save the changes and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

Note: The Device ID: will likely be the WAVE_MAPPER.


4. Select OK. The window will close.

5.2.15.7. General Instructions


Use the General Instructions... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to add, edit or delete operator instructions for non-alarm situations. Non-alarm situations can include medical emergencies, bomb threats, natural disasters, etc.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

246

Operating the Console General instructions inform the operator of the appropriate action to take and people to inform in the event of a non-alarm situation. Instructions can be in the form of calling, informing or radioing the appropriate response team.

5.2.15.7.1.

Adding And Modifying General Instructions


To add or modify a general instruction, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window. Choose the General Instructions... option to display the General Instructions dialog box.

Figure 5-108. General Instructions Window 2. Select New or an existing instruction from the General Instructions List, choose the type of emergency you want to add or modify an instruction for, e.g. Earth Quake. Click New to create a new instruction, or highlight an existing instruction and click Edit to edit it. The Operator Instruction Configuration dialog box will be displayed.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

247

Figure 5-109. Operator Instructions Configuration Window 4. Click the appropriate button in the Response Types text box to choose the type of response team you want the operator to call, inform or radio in the event of this emergency (i.e. the police). A black dot will appear in an option when it is selected.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

248

Operating the Console


:

Tab
telephone the response team inform the response team of specific details radio the response team print emergency instructions

Description
click the Telephone tab to display telephone details. click the Information tab to display information details. click the Radio tab to display radio details. click the Print tab to display printing details.

Table 5-33. Operator Instructions Configuration Window Tab Descriptions 5. Type the contact phone/radio number for the response team in the Phone No./Radio No. text box (where applicable). This is the number that the operator must call during the emergency. Type the details that the operator must inform the response team of during the emergency call in the Conversation/Information text box (where applicable). Use the template as an example of details to include in the Conversation/Information text box. Alternatively, highlight the Conversation Template text, then click Copy. The text will be automatically copied to the Conversation/Information text box. Edit these details as appropriate. To save these details as a new template, click Save to Template. Type the time it will take for the response team to arrive in the Time To Arrive text box (where applicable). Indicate the times that the operator actions are valid between. If an event occurs outside these times, action is not required by the operator and the event can be ignored. To indicate these validity times: choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to begin from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the Start Time text box. choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to end from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the End Time text box.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

To print emergency instructions, click a button for the appropriate printer to which you want to print the information (where applicable).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 11.

249

Click OK to save the new instruction in the General Instructions dialog box, or click Cancel to exit without saving changes. The General Instructions dialog box will be displayed with the new instructions. To create or modify another operator instruction, follow steps 2 - 12. Click Close to exit the General Instructions dialog box. Deleting General Instructions... Page 249

12.

5.2.15.7.2.

Deleting General Instructions


To delete a general instruction, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window. Choose the General Instructions... option to display the General Instructions dialog box. From the Non-Alarm Incident drop-down list, choose the type of emergency you want to delete an instruction for. Highlight the instruction you want to delete from the Instruction List. Click Delete. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Yes to delete the instruction, or No to cancel the delete action. Click Close to exit the General Instructions dialog box. Adding And Modifying General Instructions... Page 246

2.

3. 4. 5.

5.2.15.8. Local Alarm Instructions


Local Alarm Instructions permit configuration of local operator instructions. To configure Local Alarm Instructions, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure at the top of the Events Manager window to display a configuration menu. Choose the Local Alarm Instructions option from this menu. The Local Alarm Instructions dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

250

Operating the Console

Figure 5-110. Configure Local Alarm Operator Instructions Window 2. 3. 4. Choose a configurable message from the drop-down list. Select Local. Make any necessary changes.

When complete, click OK to save the changes and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

Note: When GMS loses communication to the CPU card and reports Off-line GMS Server in the log, will now cause and Event. You can assign a priority to this message in GMS Alarms.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

251

5.2.15.9. Network Alarm Instructions


Network Alarm Instructions will permit configuration of operator instructions for the network. To configure Network Alarm Instructions, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure at the top of the Events Manager window to display a configuration menu. Choose the Network Alarm Instructions option from this menu. The Network Alarm Instructions dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-111. Configure Network Alarm Operator Instructions Window 2. Choose a configurable message from the drop-down list.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

252

Operating the Console 3. 4. 5. Select Network (Global List). Make any necessary changes. When complete, click OK to save the changes and exit, or Cancel to exit without saving.

5.2.15.10. System Tasks


Use the System Tasks... command (located in the Configure button menu of Events Manager) to view and configure tasks that must be completed on a regular basis. View System Tasks... Page 252

5.2.15.10.1.

View System Tasks

Use this command to view any tasks that will be run automatically by the system, e.g. isolate points, lock readers, and backup system data files. To view system tasks, proceed as follows. 1. In GMS main menu click Setup > System Tasks. The System Tasks window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

253

Figure 5-112. System Tasks Window 2. To view tasks that are currently being performed, click the Running Tasks tab. The tasks currently being performed will be displayed. To view tasks that must be performed today, click the Todays Tasks tab. The tasks scheduled to be performed today will be displayed. To run a task before its scheduled time, highlight system task and click Run Now.

3.

4.

Note: If you cancel a task before it has finished, wait 30 seconds before you start running another task or GMS may crash. Crystal Report needs adequate time to cancel the previous task.
5. Click Close to exit.

5.2.15.11. Holidays
Use the Holidays... command to configure holidays in the Events Manager window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

254

Operating the Console To configure holidays in Events Manager, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure... at the top of the Events Manager window. Choose the Holidays... option to display the Holiday Configuration dialog box.

Figure 5-113. Holiday Configuration Window 2. The Holiday Configuration dialog box displays a list of the holidays currently recorded in Events Manager. It displays the date and a description of the holiday, and whether the holiday is the same every year. To add a new holiday, type the date in the Day/Month text box an d a description of the new holiday in the Description text box. If the holiday occurs on the same date every year, click the Same Every Year option. Click Add. The new holiday will be displayed in the Configured Holidays list. To delete an existing holiday, highlight the holiday in the Configured Holidays list. Click Delete. The holiday will be deleted from the Configured Holidays list. Click Close to exit Holiday Configuration.

3.

4.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

255

5.2.15.12. Staff Verification Code


To create a staff voice code, proceed as follows. 1. At the top of the Events Manager window click Configure.... Choose the Staff Verification Code... option to display the Maintenance Staff Configuration dialog box.

Figure 5-114. Maintenance Staff Configuration Window 2. To create a new entry, type information into the following text boxes: 3. Name Category (select from drop-down) Business Phone Home Phone Mobile Phone Verification Code

Select Add. Your new entry will appear. These entries can be Deleted or Updated as necessary.

5.2.15.13. Customize Keyboard


The Customize Keyboard facility will allow specific commands to be assigned and activated by user nominated function keys.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

256

Operating the Console To customize the keyboard, proceed as follows. 1. Click Configure at the top of the Events Manager window to display a configuration menu. Choose the Customize Keyboard option from this menu. The Customize Keyboard dialog box will be displayed. Select a command that you wish to assign a command to. Select a Key to activate the shortcut and click Assign. When assigning the Key the Ctrl, Alt and Shift keys can be used in conjunction with the function keys.

2. 3. 4.

5.2.16. Enhancement of Operator Instruction Creation And Event Handling


5.2.16.1. Staff Address Information
Staff address information can now be added for maintenance staff. To add address information for an existing contact, proceed as follows. 1. From the Events Manager screen click Configure and then select Staff Verification Code.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

257

Figure 5-115. Events Manager > Configure > Staff Verification Code to display the Maintenance Staff Configuration window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

258

Operating the Console

Figure 5-116. Maintenance Staff Configuration Window 2. Single click the name of the contact to update and click Update... to display the Staff Information dialog box. Enter the address information and click OK.

3.

Figure 5-117. Staff Information Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4. Double click anywhere on the row to display the second line which is the address information. A double click will also close the address information.

259

Figure 5-118. Address Information Displayed

5.2.16.2. Operator Instruction Configuration > Staffs


The All radio button has been replaced by Staffs. Staff are considered as being maintenance, cleaners, engineers and ATM crew. To add staff, proceed as follows. 1. Click an alarm point on a site map

Figure 5-119. Site Map to display the Input Point Configuration dialog box. 2. Click the Callout List tab to display the Callout List page.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

260

Operating the Console

Figure 5-120. Callout List Page 3. Click New to display the Operator Instruction Configuration dialog box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

261

Figure 5-121. Operator Instruction Configuration 4. 5. Click the Staffs radio box and select a contact from the drop-down list. Click OK.

5.2.16.3. Using Staff in A Canned Response


When user selects Staff (or Maintenance Staff) from Call combo, the list of staff + its id and position will be shown otherwise it is hidden. Selecting any staff from the list will display the business telephone number. The staff id (starting from 0) will be passed to Call Progress when dialing for sending operator action message. However, if user previously selected Staff and staff list is shown, if they are entering any text into Call combo, the staff list combo will be hidden when user selects any thing but Staff from Call combo.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

262

Operating the Console

5.3.

Transaction Manager
All alarms detected on your security network are displayed as messages in the Transaction Manager window. Message types can be assigned different colors to make identification (type/ source) easier. Transaction Manager automatically records a log of each days activity.

Figure 5-122. Transaction Manager Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide With Transaction Manager the following can be performed: Real-time Transaction Management. Monitor network activity. Create custom site and network element reports. View Transaction Management logs.

263

5.3.1. Messages
Transaction Manager messages can be categorized into nine message groups.

Message Group
Local Messages CPU Internal Messages Alarm Messages External Messages

Description
Messages that are not transmitted on the network (i.e. local). For example, user logon/logoff, GMS online/offline, etc. CPU card activity i.e. messages transmitted between the CPU card and other network elements. Alarms from network elements. Alarm reminder messages from network elements and messages generated by other operators on the network (e.g. other GMS PCs, SIMS, DMS, etc. that are connected to different CPU card ports - not the one your GMS PC is connected to). GMS requests, commands and responses (to and from network elements). Messages or alarms relating to the site only, not the system. Messages or alarms generated by, and relating to the system only, not the site. GMS messages that are not transmitted on the network (i.e. local). For example, user logon/logoff, GMS online/offline, etc. Specific instructions from GMS that the operator must perform.

GMS Messages Local Site Alarms System Alarms Local Status Messages

Operator Instructions

Table 5-34. Alarm Messages All Transaction Manager messages adhere to a format.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

264
5.3.1.1.

Operating the Console

How to Change Message Colors


In Transaction Manager under the Setup menu of use the Colors... command to assign different colors to Transaction Manager message types. Alternatively, you can click the Colors toolbar button. Each message group in Transaction Manager is assigned a different color to make identification of the message (type/source) easier. To change message colors, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Colors... command (in the Setup menu of the Transaction Manager window). The Transaction Manager Color Setup dialog box will appear.

Figure 5-123. Alarm Color Setup Window 2. Select the color for each message group and element by clicking the relevant box located next to the parameter and choosing the desired color from the Color Palette. The sample text will appear in the Preview window. Click OK to save your changes and exit. Click Cancel to exit without saving.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

265

5.3.1.2.

How to Change Message Font Size


The size of the message font in the Transaction Manager window can be changed to improve readability or desktop space. Use the Toggle Font Size command (located in the Options menu of the Transaction Manager window) to select either a large or small font size for Transaction Manager messages. Alternatively, you can click the Change Font toolbar button window. on the Transaction Manager

5.3.1.3.

How to Display The Day And Date With Messages


Use the Display Date with Message command (located in the Options menu of Transaction Manager) to display the day and date with Transaction Manager messages. Alternatively, you can click the Display Date toolbar button .

When this command is selected, a checkmark will appear next to it in the Options menu and the toolbar button will be highlighted.

5.3.1.4.

How to Display Messages in Hex Format


Use the Display in Hex command (located in the Options menu of Transaction Manager) to view the data received by GMS in hexadecimal format. Alternatively, you can click the Hex Display toolbar button .

Generally this command is only used for analysis and diagnostic purposes. When this command is selected, a checkmark will appear next to it and the toolbar button will be highlighted.

5.3.1.5.

How to Exit Transaction Manager


Click the Exit menu to close the Transaction Manager window. Transaction Manager will appear as an icon (minimized) at the bottom left-hand side of the main window. Click Restore to reopen Transaction Manager. How to Recall Stored Video From A Message... Page 268

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

266
5.3.1.6.

Operating the Console

How to Filter Out Specific Messages


Specific message types can be filtered out so that they will not appear in the Transaction Manager window. Use the Message Filters... command (located in the Setup menu of Transaction Manager) to prevent specific messages from appearing in Transaction Manager. Alternatively, you can click the Message Filters toolbar button (see example above). To filter out specific messages, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Message Filters... command (in the Setup menu of the Transaction Manager window). The Setup Message Filters dialog box will appear.

Figure 5-124. Setup Message Filters Window 2. Click inside the message type check boxes to select the types of messages that you want to filter out (an X will appear in a check box when it is selected). Click OK to implement the selected message filters and exit. Click Cancel to exit without setting the message filters.

3.

5.3.1.7.

How to Load Message Files


Use the Load Message Files... command (located in the Options menu of Transaction Manager) to load new alarm types/message files (supplied by Pacom on floppy disk) into GMS. GMS will automatically refresh (update) the existing message files with the new ones. To load new/updated message files, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 1. Choose the Load Message Files... command in the Transaction Manager Options menu. The Restore Files dialog box will be displayed.

267

Figure 5-125. Restore Files Dialog Box 2. Type the drive and directory you want the message files to be restored from. Click Select to display the files (located in this directory) in the list box. Select the message files you want to restore. To select multiple files, hold down Shift and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block). Click OK to load the message files, or Cancel to exit without loading the message files.

3.

4.

5.3.1.8.

How to Refresh Message Files


Use the Refresh Message Files... command (located in the Options menu of Transaction Manager) to refresh the current alarm types/message files in use.

5.3.1.9.

How to Edit Message Files


Use the Edit Message Files... command (located in the Options menu of Transaction Manager) to edit alarm types/message files in GMS. To edit message files, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

268

Operating the Console 1. Choose Edit Message Files... from the Transaction Manager Options menu. The Edit System Data Files dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-126. Edit System Data Files 2. Highlight the message file you want edit. Click OK. The message file will be displayed as a text file. Edit the file accordingly.

Note: It is advised that message files are only edited with permission from a Pacom Systems engineer.

5.3.1.10. How to Recall Stored Video From A Message


GMS has the ability to recall stored video from the Witness by clicking on a status message in the Transaction Manager or RTU Recent Event display. An alarm message coming from a Witness might have a video clip attached to it. It can be an alarm message or a card transaction. If a video clip is attached, the alarm message will have a V in front of it.

Figure 5-127. Alarm Message - Note The (v) for Video. This double click can be done from the site log, Transaction Manager or when viewing the Transaction Manager. The video will display from anywhere.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

269

Note: When an alarm message is clicked it looks for an event captured message. If event captured is not found there will be a beep.
An event created by an alarm will also display the operator instructions along with the video so the operator can see what caused the alarm.

5.3.2. Logs
The Transaction Manager window automatically records a log of each days messages. Log files are stored in the GMS\LOG sub-directory.

Figure 5-128. .log Files Stored in The /LOG Directory

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

270
5.3.2.1.

Operating the Console

How to View Logs


Use the View... command (located in the Log menu of Transaction Manager) to view an Transaction Manager log file. Alternatively, you can click the View log File toolbar button. To view a log file, proceed as follows. 1. Select the View... command in the Log menu. The View Log File dialog box will appear. Click Cancel to exit.

Figure 5-129. View Log File Window 2. Select the drive (Look In... drop-down list box) and directory (Directories list box) that the log file(s) you want to view reside in. The default is the GMS LOG sub-directory. Select (highlight) the desired log file. The log file name will be displayed in the File Name text box. Note that the log file names indicate the date. For example, the file Wm020214.LOG is the Windows/Transaction Manager (WM), log file (.LOG), for the 14th February 2002 (020214). Click Open to view the selected log file. The log will be displayed in a Log View window on top of the Transaction Manager window (see below).

3.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

271

Figure 5-130. Transaction Manager Log View Window 5. Click Home to go to the start of the log file, or End to go to the end of the log file. Use Jump to BM to jump to available book marks.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

272

Operating the Console 6. Press the F2 key (or click the F2=Search button) to search for a specific time in the log. The Enter Log Search Time dialog box will appear. Type the time (HH:MM:SS) that you want to search the log for. Click OK to start the search, or Cancel to exit the Enter Log Search Time dialog box. If a message does not exist for the specific time you entered, the page containing the closest time will be displayed. Click Exit at the bottom of the window to exit Log View and return to the Transaction Manager window.

7.

8.

5.3.2.2.

How to Delete Logs


Use the Delete... command (located in the Log menu of Transaction Manager) to delete Transaction Manager log files. To delete log files, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Delete... command in the Log menu. The Delete Log Files dialog box will appear.

Figure 5-131. Delete Files Window 2. Select the log files you want to delete in the Files list box. To select multiple files, hold down Shift and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block). Note that you can only delete log files stored in the GMS \LOG sub-directory. Click OK to delete the selected log files and exit, or Cancel to exit without deleting any log files.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

273

5.3.2.3.

How to Back Up Logs


Use the Backup... command (located in the Log menu of Transaction Manager) to make a fresh set(s) of your Transaction Manager log files. Alternatively, you can click the Log Backup toolbar button. To backup log files, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Backup... command in the Log menu. The Backup Log Files dialog box will appear.

Figure 5-132. Backup Files Window 2. Scroll through the Files list box and select the log files you want to backup. To select multiple files, hold down Shift and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block). Type the drive and directory you want the files to be backed up to in the Enter Destination Dir text box or click ... to locate a directory. Click OK to backup the selected files to the specified directory and exit, or Cancel to exit without backing up any log files.

3.

4.

5.3.2.4.

How to Restore Logs


Use the Restore... command (located in the Log menu of Transaction Manager) to restore a backup set(s) of your Transaction Manager log files.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

274

Operating the Console To restore log files, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Restore... command in the Log menu. The Restore Log Files dialog box will appear.

Figure 5-133. Restore Files Window 2. Type the drive and directory that you want the log files to be restored from in the Enter Source Dir text box. This should be the same drive/directory you backed up the files to. Click Select to display the files (located in this directory) in the Files list box. Scroll through the Files list box and select the log files you want to restore. To select multiple files, hold down Shift and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block). Click OK to restore the selected files to the GMS \LOGS sub-directory and exit, or Cancel to exit without backing up any log files. Restored files can be viewed as per normal via the View... command.

3.

4.

Note: Click the browse button to display the Explorer tree.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

275

5.3.2.5.

How to Print Logs


Use the Print... command (located in the Log menu of Transaction Manager) to print an Transaction Manager log file. Alternatively, you can click the Print Log File toolbar button.

Note: Typically, log files are quite large and a print can run up to 120 A4 pages.
To print a log file, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Print... command in the Log menu. The Print Log File dialog box will appear.

Figure 5-134. Print Log File Window 2. Select the drive (Look In... drop-down list box) and directory (Directories list box) that the log file(s) you want to print reside in. The default is the GMS \LOG sub-directory. Select the desired log file. The log file name will be displayed in the File Name text box. Note that the log file names indicate the date. For example, the file Wm010626.LOG is the Windows/Transaction Manager (WM), log file (.LOG), for the 26th June 2001 (010626). Click Open to display the Windows Print dialog box. Click Cancel to exit. Ensure the printer details are correct and click OK to print the selected log file. For information on using the Windows Print dialog box, consult your Windows documentation.

3.

4. 5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

276
5.3.2.6.

Operating the Console

How to Exit Log View


Use the Exit Log View command (located in the Log menu of Transaction Manager) to close the Log View window created when you view a log file.

5.3.3. Reports
You can use GMS to create customized reports. A database of information about the sites in your security network is recorded and saved by GMS. You can call on these details captured by GMS to report on specific information about your security network. Customized reports can include any information you require about the different elements of your security network, such as details about specific sites, network elements, site events, and the actions performed by GMS users. Reports can be generated from either Transaction Manager or by clicking the button on the toolbar.

Figure 5-135. The Reports Button The specific types of reports you can create in GMS are detailed in the following table:

Report Type
Site report

Description
Information about the various alarm messages or actions that are specific to a site. Site reports can include any range of sites (from 1 to 10,000), a date and time window, and a number of Transaction Manager message types.

Table 5-35. Types of Reports

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

277

Report Type
Network Element report

Description
Information specific to network elements. Network element reports can include any range of network elements (from 1A/1B to 'n'A/'n'B), a date and time window, and a number of element, alarm, status and parameter types. Information about the actions performed by GMS users. User action reports can include any range of users (from 1 to 32), a date and time window, and a number of action types. The user action report is essentially an audit trail. Information about specific events that have occurred at sites. Site event reports can include any event type for a site that occurred between a range of dates.

User Action report

Site Event report

Table 5-35. Types of Reports Once you have decided on the appropriate type of report, you can further customize each report type to suit.

5.3.3.1.

How to Create A Site Report


Site report formats contain standards areas of information specific to sites in your security network. This includes any range of sites (from 1 to 10,000), a date and time window, and a number of Transaction Manager message types. You can further customize standard site reports to suit your individual reporting requirements. To create a site report, proceed as follows. 1. From the Transaction Manager under the Report menu select the Create Site Report... option. The Site Report Options dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

278

Operating the Console

Figure 5-136. Site Report Options Dialog Box 2. Define the range of sites for which you want to create the site report. In the Start Site No. and the End Site No. text boxes, type the first site and last site in the range respectively. Define the range of dates for which you want to create the site report. In the Start Date and End Date text boxes, type the first date and last date of the range respectively.

3.

Note: The format for typing the date is DD/MM/YY.


4. Define the range of times for which you want to create the site report. In the Start Time and End Time text boxes, type the first and last time in the range respectively.

Note: The format for typing the time is 24hr, i.e. HH:MM:SS.
5. From the Sorted Field drop-down list, select the relevant option that indicates the order in which the report will be presented. For example, if you select the Date & Time option, the report will be sorted by the date and time particular events occurred, rather than by the site number at which the events occurred. Select the Reverse Chronological Order option if you want to reverse the order that the sites are displayed in the report. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected.

6.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7.

279

From the Report Types drop-down list, select the type of report you want to create for the site. For example, if you select the Alarms report type, the report will contain only the alarm messages that occur within the date and time window, at all the sites within the site range. Conversely, if you select the All Messages report type, the report will contain all message types listed in the Report Types drop-down list, that occur within the date and time window, at all the sites within the site range. Click Set to create the report (this may take a few minutes). When the report is complete, the Preview, Print and Export buttons will become available on the Site Report Options screen. If you did not select any of the following report type options, go directly to step 9.

8.

If you selected the User Defined option from the Report Types drop-down list, the User Defined Reports dialog box will be displayed to allow you to further customize the site report by including a combination of message types. A number of additional messages (not listed in the Report Types drop-down list) are available for selection here. Messages are grouped according to their type, indicated by the tabs at the top of the dialog box. Select the message types you want to include in the site report by clicking and highlighting the relevant alarm messages from each tab. Click a message type again to de-select it. You can select as many alarm message types as you like.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

280

Operating the Console

Figure 5-137. User Defined Reports Dialog Box Click OK to save these changes to your customized site report. Go to step 9. If you selected the External Alarms option from the Report Types drop-down list, the External Alarms dialog box will be displayed to allow you to further customize the site report. You can choose to include all external points in the site report by selecting the Select All Points option, or individual external points by selecting one of the other point options, then entering the relevant details. Click OK to save these changes to your customized site report. Go to step 9.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

281

Figure 5-138. External Alarms Dialog Box If you selected the Operator Actions option from the Report Types drop-down list, the Operator Actions Report Options dialog box will be displayed to allow you to further customize the site report. Sort the operator actions by either selecting the Operator No. option and selecting an operator from the list, or by typing an event number in the Event No. text box. Select the operator actions to include in the report from the Operator Actions list box (either individual actions or all actions). Select the relevant Event Type and Additional Options from the respective list boxes to further customize the site report. Click OK to save these changes to your customized site report. Go to step 9.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

282

Operating the Console

Figure 5-139. Operator Actions Report Options Dialog Box If you selected the Using Report Templates option from the Report Types drop-down list, the Using Report Templates dialog box will be displayed to allow you to further customize the site report. Select the appropriate report template from the Report Templates drop-down list to use a standard customized site report. Click OK to save these changes to your customized site report.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

283

Figure 5-140. Using Report Templates Dialog Box 9. If you want to preview the site report on your workstation, click Preview. The site report will be displayed in the Report Preview window. This may take a few minutes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

284

Operating the Console

Figure 5-141. Report Preview Window 10. If you want to print the site report, click Print on the Site Report Options dialog box. Alternatively you can click the Print toolbox button on the Report Preview screen.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 11.

285

If you want to export the site report to a file, click Export. The Export screen will be displayed. Alternatively, you can click the Export toolbox button on the Report Preview screen.

Figure 5-142. Export Dialog Box 12. Select the relevant option from the Format drop-down list, and indicate the file to which you want to export the site report. Click OK to complete this action. Click Done on the Site Report Options dialog box when you have completed all required actions. This will close the Site Report Options dialog box and complete the site report.

13.

5.3.3.2.

How to Create A Network Element Report


The Network Element report formats contain standard areas of information specific to elements in your network. This includes any range of network elements (from 1A/1B to 'n'A/ 'n'B), a date and time window, and a number of element, alarm, status and parameter types. You can further customize network element reports to suit your individual reporting requirements. To create a network element report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Create Net Elem Report option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The Create Network Element Report dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

286

Operating the Console

Figure 5-143. Create Network Element Report Dialog Box 2. From the Element Types list box, select the network elements you want to include in the report. Click on an element type to select it (it will appear highlighted); click on it again to de-select it. You can select as many elements as you wish. Select the CPU Port: A and/or B check boxes to include selected element types connected to CPU card ports A, B or both (a checkmark will appear inside a check box when it is selected). Define the range of elements for which you want to create the network element report. In the Start Elem No. and the End Elem No. text boxes, type the first element and last element in the range respectively. Define the range of dates for which you want to create the network element report. In the Start Date and End Date text boxes, type the first date and last date in the range respectively.T

3.

4.

5.

Note: The format for typing the date is DD/MM/YY.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 6.

287

Define the range of times for which you want to create the network element report. In the Start Time and End Time text boxes, type the first time and the last time in the range respectively.

Note: The format for typing the time is 24hr, i.e. HH:MM:SS.
7. From the Alarm Types list box, select the types of network element alarm messages that you want to include in the report. Click on an alarm type to select it (it will appear highlighted); click on it again to de-select it. You can select as many alarm types as you wish. If you want to select all alarm types in the list, click Select All. (Keep in mind that this also selects all status types and alarm reset types.) Click Deselect All to de-select all alarm types. From the Status Types list box, select the types of network element status messages that you want to include in the report. Click on a status type to select it (it will appear highlighted); click on it again to de-select it. You can select as many status types as you wish. If you want to select all status types in the list, click Select All. (Keep in mind that this also selects all alarm types and alarm reset types.) Click Deselect All to de-select all status types. From the Alarm Reset Types list box, select the types of network element alarm reset messages that you want to include in the report. Click on an alarm reset type to select it (it will appear highlighted); click on it again to de-select it. You can select as many alarm reset types as you wish. If you want to select all alarm reset types in the list, click Select All. (Keep in mind that this also selects all status types and alarm types.) Click Deselect All to de-select all alarm reset types. A number of other messages may also be included in the network element report. Select the relevant check boxes in the Miscellaneous and Parameters sections to include these message types in the report (a checkmark will appear inside a check box when it is selected). After you have selected all of the element/message type options you want to include in the report, you can choose to view the report, print the report, and/or write the report to a file. You can select all three if desired (i.e. to view the report on screen, print it, and write it to a file): 12. To preview the report, select the View check box. To print the report, select the Print check box. To write the report to a file, select the Write to File check box.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Click OK to create the network element report.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

288

Operating the Console 13. If you selected to write the report to a file, the Enter File Name dialog box will be displayed. Type the name of the report in the text box. There is no set format but either the date or report type will make future identification easier. Click OK to write the report to the specified file, or Cancel to exit. Reports are stored in the GMS (P1021)\REPORT sub-directory.

Figure 5-144. Enter File Name... Dialog Box 14. 15. If you selected to print the report it will be sent directly to the default printer. If you selected to view the report, the report will be displayed in the Report View window over the top of the Transaction Manager window. Click Exit at the bottom of the window if you want to exit Report View and return to the Transaction Manager window. Click Home to go to the start of the report, or End to go to the end of the report. Use Jump to BM to jump to available book marks. Press the F2 key to search for a specific time in the report.

Figure 5-145. Transaction Manager Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

289

5.3.3.3.

How to Create A User Action Report


The User Action report formats contain standard actions that can be completed by users. This includes information about the actions performed by GMS users in your network. User action reports can include any range of users (from 1 to 32), a date and time window, and a number of action types. The user action report is essentially an audit trail. You can further customize user action reports to suit your individual reporting requirements. To create a user action report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Create User Action Report option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The Create User Action Report dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-146. Create User Action Report Dialog Box 2. Define the range of users for which you want to create the user action report. In the Start User No. and End User No. text boxes, type the first user identification number and the last user identification number in the range respectively. Define the range of dates for which you want to create the user action report. In the Start Date and End Date text boxes, type the first date and the last date in the range respectively.

3.

Note: The format for typing the date is DD/MM/YY.


4. Define the range of times for which you want to create the user action report. In the Start Time and End Time text boxes, type the first time and the last time in the range respectively.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

290

Operating the Console

Note: The format for typing the time is 24hr, i.e. HH:MM:SS.
5. From the Report Types drop-down list, select the type of report you want to create by indicating the user actions you want to include in the report. For example, if you select the Download RTU Parameters report type, the report will contain only the users/user actions that requested a parameter download within the date and time window. Conversely, if you select the All Messages report type, the report will contain all users/ user actions listed in the Report Types drop-down list, that occurred within the date and time window.

If you select the User Defined report type, the Create User Action Report dialog box will expand to allow you to further customize the report by including a combination of user actions. A number of additional action types (not listed in the Report Types drop-down list) are available for selection. Select the user action types you want to include in the report by clicking the relevant check boxes (a checkmark will be displayed inside a check box when it is selected). Click Select All to select all user action types, or Deselect All to clear all selections.

Figure 5-147. Create User Action Report Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 6.

291

After you have selected the report type (user actions), you can choose to view the report, print the report, and/or write the report to a file. You can select all three if desired, i.e. to view the report on screen, print it, and write it to a file: If you want to preview the report, select the View check box. If you want to print the report, select the Print check box. If you want to write the report to a file, select the Write to File check box.

7. 8.

Click OK to create the user action report. If you selected to write the report to a file, the Enter File Name dialog box will be displayed. Type the name of the report in the text box. There is no set format but either the date or report type will make future identification easier. Click OK to write the report to the specified file, or Cancel to exit. Reports are stored in the GMS (P1021)\REPORT sub-directory.

Figure 5-148. Enter File Name... Dialog Box 9. If you selected to print the report, the Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Ensure the printer details are correct and click OK to print the selected report. For information on using the Windows Print dialog box, refer to your Windows documentation.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

292

Operating the Console

Figure 5-149. Print Dialog Box 10. If you selected to view the report, the user action report will be displayed in the Report View window on top of the Transaction Manager window.

Click Exit at the bottom of the window if you want to exit Report View and return to the Transaction Manager window. Click Home to go to the start of the report, or End to go to the end of the report. Use Jump to BM to jump to available book marks. Press the F2 key to search for a specific time in the report. The following depicts a user action report.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

293

Figure 5-150. Transaction Manager Window

5.3.3.4.

How to Create A Site Event Report


The Site Event report formats contain standard information about events that can occur within a site. This includes information about specific events that have occurred at sites in your network. Site event reports can include any event type for a site that occurred between a range of dates. You can further customize site event reports to suit your individual reporting requirements. To create a site event report, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

294

Operating the Console 1. From the Transaction Manager under the Report menu select Create Site Event Report.... The Create Site Event Report dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-151. Create Site Event Report Dialog Box 2. In the Enter Site No. text box, type the site number to define the site for which you want to report an event type. In the Event No. text box, type the event number for the event type you want to report on. If you are unsure of the number allocated to the event type you want to report on, click Search to search for the event number. The Find An Event dialog box will be displayed.

3.

4.

Figure 5-152. Find An Event Dialog Box 5. To search for an event type and its identification number, type the start and finish times for the occurrence of the event in the Event Time text boxes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

295

Note: The format for typing the time is 24hr, i.e. HH:MM:SS.
6. To search for an event type and its identification number, type the start and finish dates for the occurrence of the event in the Event Date text boxes.

Note: The format for typing the date is DD/MM/YY.


7. Click Search to begin the search. GMS will search log files created between the date and time specified for event types for the site. The status of the search will be displayed in the Searching text box. A message will be displayed to inform you of the end of the search. The search results will be displayed in the Available Events drop-down list. Scroll down the list and highlight the event type you want to report on. Click Select to select this event type. The Create Site Event Report dialog box will be re-displayed with the number of your chosen event type displayed in the Event No. text box. Click OK to create the site events report. The report will be displayed in the Report Preview window. If you want to print the report, click the Print toolbar button in the Report Preview window. If you want to write the report to a file, click the Export toolbar button in the Report Preview window. The Export dialog box will be displayed.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Figure 5-153. Export Dialog Box 12. Select the relevant option from the Format drop-down list, and indicate the file to which you want to export the site report. Click OK to complete this action.

To close the Report Preview window, select the Exit option from the Window menu.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

296

Operating the Console

5.3.4. Processing Reports


At the time you create a report, you are given the option to view the report, print the report, or write the report to a file (export). However, at a later time, you may need to also perform these actions to reports you have created in the past.

5.3.4.1.

How to View A Report


You can perform different actions with reports saved in your system. This is called processing reports. When processing reports you can choose to do the following: view reports print reports back up reports restore reports delete reports set daily report parameters

When viewing a report, you display a preview of the report in the Report View window. While viewing the report in this window, you can choose to perform a number of other functions, such as print the report. To view a report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the View option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The View Report File dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-154. View Report File Dialog Box 2. Scroll through the Report Files list box and highlight the report you want to view.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3. Click OK to view the selected report file. The report will be displayed in the Report View window on top of the Transaction Manager window.

297

Figure 5-155. Transaction Manager Window 4. Click Home in the Report View window to go to the start of the report, or End to go to the end of the report. Use Jump to BM in the Report View window to jump to available book marks. Press the F2 key (or click the F2=Search button) to search for a specific time in the report. The Enter Log Search Time dialog box will be displayed

5. 6.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

298

Operating the Console

Figure 5-156. Enter Log Search Time... Dialog Box 7. Type the time (using the format HH:MM:SS) that you want to search the report file for. Click OK to start the search, or Cancel to exit the Enter Log Search Time dialog box. If a message does not exist for the specific time you entered, the page containing the closest time will be displayed. Click Exit at the bottom of the Report View window to exit and return to the Transaction Manager window.

8.

5.3.4.2.

How to Print A Report


To print a report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Print option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The Print Report File dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 5-157. Print Report File Dialog Box 2. 3. Scroll through the Report Files list box and highlight the report file you want to print. Click OK. The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

299

Figure 5-158. Print Dialog Box 4. Ensure the printer details are correct, then click OK to print the selected report file. For information on using the Windows Print dialog box, consult your Windows documentation.

5.3.4.3.

How to Back Up A Report


To back up a report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Backup option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The Backup Report Files dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

300

Operating the Console

Figure 5-159. Backup Files Dialog Box 2. Scroll through the Files list box and select the report(s) you want to backup. To select multiple files, hold down the Shift key and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block). In the Enter Destination Dir text box, type the drive and directory you want the reports to be backed up to. Click OK to backup the selected reports to the specified directory and exit, or Cancel to exit without backing up any reports.

3.

4.

5.3.4.4.

How to Restore A Report


If you have a backup copy of a report saved in a secure place, you can restore this report if an original is misplaced or damaged. Errors do sometimes occur, whether they are system errors or human error, and it is safe practice to ensure all reports are backed up in a secure place. Backing up reports ensures you always have a copy of a report on hand in case a report is lost. To restore a report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Restore option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The Restore Report Files dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

301

Figure 5-160. Restore Files Dialog Box 2. In the Enter Source Dir text box, type the drive and directory from which you want the report files to be restored. This should be the same drive/directory you backed up the reports to. Click Select to display the files (located in the directory you have indicated) in the Files list box. Scroll through the Files list box and highlight the report file(s) you want to restore. To select multiple files, hold down the Shift key and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block). Click OK to restore the selected report(s) to the GMS (P1021)\REPORT sub-directory and exit, or Cancel to exit without backing up any reports. Restored reports can be viewed via the View option in the Report menu.

3.

4.

5.

5.3.4.5.

How to Delete A Report


To delete a report, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Delete option from the Transaction Manager Report menu. The Delete Report Files dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

302

Operating the Console

Figure 5-161. Delete Files Dialog Box 2. Select the reports you want to delete in the Files list box. To select multiple files, hold down the Shift key and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click the individual files (for a non-contiguous block).

Note: You can only delete report files stored in the GMS (P1021)\REPORT subdirectory.
3. Click OK to delete the selected reports and exit, or Cancel to exit without deleting any reports.

5.3.5. Temporary User Support For Limited Guard Access


In the situation where a monitoring operation moves some day to day activities to a local monitoring centers (i.e. Sub Server). Features: Sub server configuration changes are uploaded to the main server and visa versa. Card holders deleted from sub server are also reflected on the main. Adding, editing and deleting an operator from the main server (or its workstations) will download changes to all sub servers.

Note: Changes to Operators made on sub servers ARE NOT reflected on the main server due to security concerns. That could lead to an operator on the sub server creating a super operator on the main server.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

303

5.4.

Video Manager
The Witness Video Manager module of GMS is accessed by selecting the Video Manager icon from the toolbar on the main desktop. The Pacom Witness module can also be accessed from the Interfaces Menu by selecting DVR > Witness.

Figure 5-162. Video Manager Icon This section contains the following topics and procedures: About the Witness Video Manager... Page 304 How to Add Witnesses to the Address Book... Page 312 Witness Right-Click Menu and Submenus... Page 315 How to Search a Witness for Captured Video... Page 318 How to Transfer a Clip to Your PC... Page 322 How to View Locally Stored Clips... Page 322 How to Export a Video Clip... Page 323 Initiating Two-Way Communication... Page 339 Viewing Live Video from the Site Map... Page 324 Viewing Captured Video from the Transaction Manager... Page 324 How to Configure the Video and Audio Parameters... Page 325 How to Configure the Video and Audio Parameters... Page 325 Two-Way Communications... Page 338 How to Configure the Witness Input and Outputs... Page 340 How to Setup Recording Schedules... Page 344 How to Setup Network Parameters... Page 349 About Pan Tilt and Zoom Controllers... Page 352 Option Button Menu... Page 357 Right-Click Menu in Units Tab... Page 372 Right-Click Menus in Files Tab... Page 375

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

304

Operating the Console

5.4.1. About the Witness Video Manager


The Video Manager module of GMS has the ability to display up to 16 screens of video at once. The video can be from multiple Witnesses whether it is being streamed directly from the cameras live (compressed) or pre-captured video from the Witness hard drive. Video can be recorded as it is streamed or single frames can be captured for later review. Recorded video and captured frames are stored on the hard drive of the monitoring PC. The module also has the ability to perform searches on Witnesses for any video captured during specified time and/or date or triggered by a particular event type etc. When captured video is displayed the alarm inputs and outputs on the Witness are displayed in the state they were in as the video was being captured.

Figure 5-163. Pacom Witness Window The following table explains the different aspect of this window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

305

Button/Icon

Function/Description
Connect: Attempts a connection to the Witness selected from the drop-down list to the left hand side of the button.

Address Book Options button

Opens the Witness Address Book window. See The Witness Address Book... Page 311. Used to configure default and comm port parameters, view local error statistics or Video Manager module revision information. Also communication parameters used when connecting to a local Witness over a serial cable can be setup from this button. See Option Button Menu... Page 357. Hide Tree: Removes the Units, Files and Results tabs to simplify the display.

Resizes the window to display 1, 4 or 16 video display areas

These buttons are used to Increase and Decrease the picture quality of the streamed video. The frame rates will be automatically adjusted to maintain the bandwidth requirements within the Bandwidth Usage limits set on the Parameters > Video/Audio > General tab.

Note: These buttons will work only if the Bandwidth Usage is greater than 500 kbps.
Enlarge / Reduce: This button toggles the display between an enlarged version of the highlighted video screen and the previous view (1, 4 or 16 screens). Snapshot: Takes a snapshot of the selected video display. The snapshot is stored as a BMP or JPEG format on the viewing PCs local hard drive. This snapshots are allocated an auto generated filename based on the date and time that it was captured. All captured files are displayed on the File tab. Table 5-36. Witness Button And Icon Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

306

Operating the Console

Button/Icon

Function/Description
Search: Performs a search on the selected Witness unit for captured video. See How to Search a Witness for Captured Video... Page 318. Site Map: Displays the location of the selected camera on the site map. Audio Level Indicator: Graphical representation of the volume level of the audio track being played.

Microphone: Opens the Audio Display window. See Initiating Two-Way Communication... Page 339. Units Tab This tab displays all Witnesses that are currently connected and all cameras and microphones that are connected to them. See How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314. This tab shows all video and snapshots that have been stored on the local PC hard drive. Double-click on the filename on to open it or right-click to display an options menu to open, rename or delete the file. See How to Transfer a Clip to Your PC... Page 322. This tab displays the results of a search performed on a remote Witness. See How to Search a Witness for Captured Video... Page 318. Record the selected streamed video to the local hard drive. Files are displayed on the Files tab. See How to Transfer a Clip to Your PC... Page 322. Play starts motion on the video selected.

File Tab

Results Tab

Rewind or Fast Forward the video sequence or within the live video buffer. When Pause is activated, these buttons change to Step Forward and Step Back, used to skip to the next frame or previous frame while Paused. Table 5-36. Witness Button And Icon Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

307

Button/Icon

Function/Description
Pause stops/starts the playback or stream. You can also restart by clicking Play. Enable or disable audio.

Skip Forward to Next Event: - Skips to the next listed event in the Results tab. - Skips to the next event during Remote Playback.

Note: Clicking on this button allows the user to view the next event in the buffer. If no next event is present in the buffer, then it moves to the end of the buffer and will request a new event from the Witness unit.
Table 5-36. Witness Button And Icon Descriptions (continued)

5.4.1.1.

Video and Alarm Status Bar


Below the video display area is the video properties bar which contains information about the video being displayed and the status of the Witness inputs and outputs at the time of capture. The Alarm Status bar is configurable. The various parameters displayed can be hidden or made visible in several different ways. Refer to How to Setup Local Parameters... Page 358.

Figure 5-164. Default Video And Alarm Status Bar

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

308

Operating the Console

Parameter/Indicator
Alarm input indicators Alarm output indicators Motion Detector Input Indicators.

Descriptions
These 8 LEDs light red when the corresponding alarm input on the Witness is triggered (inputs 1-8 respectively). These 4 LEDs light red when the corresponding alarm output on the Witness is triggered (outputs 1-4 respectively). These 8 LEDs light red when motion is detected on one of the camera inputs (inputs 9-16 respectively).

Note: The alarm input, output and motion indicator LEDs only display the current status of the Witness when live video is being viewed. When pre-recorded video is being viewed the indicators will display the status of the Witness as the video was captured.
IP Address Time Date Video Status Indicator This area displays the source of the video, either the IP address, the filename or Dialup Connection is displayed. The time at which the video is/was captured. The date when the video is/was captured. This icon changes appearance in accordance with the type of video being played. The icon states are as follows: Lightning bolt = Live video. Lightning bolt with X = indicates an interruption to the video stream. A red box will also be displayed around the video frame. Blue hard disk drive = Non-alarm video, streamed from Witness hard drive, (e.g. scheduled recording). Table 5-37. Video And Alarm Status Bar Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

309

Parameter/Indicator

Descriptions
Yellow hard disk drive = Pre-alarm video streamed from Witness hard drive. A yellow border will also be displayed around the video frame (active video frame only in 4 frame view). Red hard disk drive = When in alarm and for the postalarm period video is streamed from Witness hard drive. An orange border will also be displayed around the video frame (active video frame only in 4 frame view). Play symbol = Playing video recorded to the local hard drive. These files are displayed on the Files tab. If the video was triggered by an alarm, the Play symbol will be displayed yellow during pre-alarm and will change to red at the time of triggering to denote post alarm video. Record symbol = Currently displayed video is being recorded to the local hard drive. If the video was triggered by an alarm, the record symbol will be displayed yellow during pre-alarm and will change to red at the time of triggering to denote post alarm video.

Camera Number Frame Rate Frame Size

The number of the camera that is being displayed or recorded the captured video. The average number of frames per second that is being displayed. The size of each frame being displayed.

Table 5-37. Video And Alarm Status Bar Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

310

Operating the Console

Parameter/Indicator
Video frame border

Descriptions
The frame around the active video frame will change color from time to time to indicate different conditions. (This will work given that the Options button > Configure > Local Parameters > Display tab > Change Border Color on Event is enabled.) A red border indicates that there has been an interruption to the video sequence being streamed. The red border will be accompanied by a red X placed over the live stream lightning bolt. See above for more information. A yellow border indicates pre-alarm video during a captured sequence that has been triggered by an event The yellow border will be accompanied by a yellow hard disk drive icon more information. . See above for

An orange indicates post alarm video during a captured sequence that has been triggered by an event. The orange border will be accompanied by a red hard disk drive icon information. . See above for more

Table 5-37. Video And Alarm Status Bar Descriptions (continued)

5.4.1.2.

Seek Bar
Below the properties bar is the seek bar which displays the current position of the video being displayed in relation to the buffered video if streamed or the total video clip length if viewing recorded video. When video is streamed from the Witness, GMS will start filling up a local video buffer in the RAM of the viewing PC. The green shaded area in the Seek bar represents the amount of video buffered. This is only an abstract indication. The actual size of the video buffer will depend upon a number of factors including the video frame size, the amount of available RAM, the number of other applications running etc. Once a maximum buffer size is reached the size of the buffer will remain constant and video will be deleted on a first-in-first-out basis. Video can be viewed from any position within the buffered area using the video player controls to the right of the seek bar or by dragging the position indicator to the desired position.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

311

Seek Bar

Current Position Buffered Audio Buffered Video


Figure 5-165. Seek Bar Audio

5.4.1.3.

The Witness Address Book


The Witness address book is used to store the connection details or address of all of the Witnesses within the network. The address of each Witness must be entered in here before it can be connected to directly from the Witness window. The address book can also be obtained from the GMS database (if used), see Witness Addresses from Site Map... Page 311.

5.4.2. Witness Addresses from Site Map


Witness addresses can be read from their CCTV device definitions in site maps. To allow GMS to read the Witness addresses from site maps, ensure that the Use GMS Database (from address book) is enabled in the Options button (from Pacom Witness window) > Configure > Local Parameters > Files tab.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

312

Operating the Console

Figure 5-166. Local Parameters These addresses can then be used to connect and its video viewed. See How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314 for more details.

5.4.3. How to Add Witnesses to the Address Book


To add Witness addresses, proceed as follows: 1. From the Pacom Witness window (See Figure 5-163), click on Address Book. The Witness Address Book window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

313

Figure 5-167. Witness Address Book Window 2. Click on Add to create a new Witness connection or highlight an existing entry and click Edit or Delete. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the selected item up or down the list of Addresses. Use the column headers Name, Address and Description to sort the listed/added Witness units.

Note: After the addresses are sorted, they will be saved in the address.cfg file sorted. So that next time you open the Address Book window, you find the list sorted as you left it in its earlier session.
3. Selecting Connect will command the system to attempt a connection with the selected Witness.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

314

Operating the Console

Note: On clicking on the Check Units button, connection to listed Witness units in the Address Book is checked (only the Witnesses that are not connected but exist in the Address Book). In this check video data from the Witness hard drive is requested. Then a report log is created based on the checks. The log is saved under GMS\Customer with the file name SCAN<dd-mm-yy>.log.
4. Click Close when complete. All Witnesses that are currently Connected will be displayed in a tree like format on the Units tab of the Witness window. Further connections can be made by selecting the required Witness from the drop-down list in the top right hand corner and clicking Connect.

5.4.4. How to Connect to a Witness


In the top left hand corner of the Witness window is a drop-down list containing all the Witnesses in the Witness Address Book. See The Witness Address Book... Page 311 for more information. To connect to a Witness, select a unit from the drop-down list and click Connect. The Connecting window will be displayed.

Figure 5-168. Connecting Window Once connected a Witness icon window. will appear on the Units tab to the left hand side of the

Double-clicking on the icon displays the cameras and microphones connected to the unit in an explorer tree fashion. The cameras can be double-clicked or dragged into the display area to stream live video from the selected camera. The video and alarm status bar is displayed below the video display. See Video and Alarm Status Bar... Page 307 for more information.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

315

5.4.5. Witness Right-Click Menu and Submenus


Right-clicking on the Witness icon in the Unit tab will open a quick select menu (See Figure 5169)

Figure 5-169. Quick Select Menu The following explains each of these menu options.

Option
Disconnect Recover Video clip

Description
Disconnects the connection with the Witness that was rightclicked. Opens the search window to locate a captured video clip. See How to Search a Witness for Captured Video... Page 318. See Parameters Submenu... Page 316. Displayed statistics of various features, functions and errors. This function has been included as a diagnostic tool for engineers and is not intended for use by operators. Options for operations to be performed on the storage disks connected on the Witness. See HDD Actions Submenu... Page 317.

Parameters > Error/Stats >

HDD Actions

Table 5-38. Witness Icon Right -click Menu Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

316
5.4.5.1.

Operating the Console

Parameters Submenu

Figure 5-170. Parameters Submenu Refer to the following sections Video/Audio - To configure video and audio settings of the camera feed. For more details, see How to Configure the Video and Audio Parameters... Page 325. Input/Output - To configure inputs and outputs on the Witness unit. For more details, see How to Configure the Witness Input and Outputs... Page 340. Schedule: Used to program recordings at pre determined times. For more details, see How to Setup Recording Schedules... Page 344. Holiday: For selecting days that are holidays for recording schedules. For more details, see Holiday Schedule Setup... Page 348. Network: To specify basic addresses (field controller number, IP addresses, base station telephone number etc.) so that the Witness can connect to the base station and can be programmed from the base station using GMS. For more details, see How to Setup Network Parameters... Page 349. PTZ: Enables programming of the address for the Pan Tilt Zoom controller address for each camera. For more details, see About Pan Tilt and Zoom Controllers... Page 352. Defaults: Used to load and save default audio, video, schedule and holiday settings to and from a Witness or file. Default parameters can also be edited from the Options menu, select Configure > Default Parameters. For more details, see About Default Parameter Files... Page 370.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

317

5.4.5.2.

Errors/Stats Submenu

Figure 5-171. Error/Stats Submenu Selection of any of these submenus will display the relevant statistics. These statistics are read from the Witness unit and are used by Pacom engineers for diagnostic purposes.

5.4.5.3.

HDD Actions Submenu

Figure 5-172. HDD Actions Submenu This menu provides options to perform actions on the storage devices connected on the Witness unit. The type of device connected may be: primary hard disk, secondary drive connected on the same IDE cable as the primary or a Flash card inserted in the PCMCIA slot. It is recommended that all storage devices are shutdown before turning the power off on the Witness unit. Also a shutdown is preferred before disconnecting the secondary or Flash card. The Shutdown menu provides options to either shutdown all connected devices or individual devices. The Format Harddrive option brings up this dialog box.

Figure 5-173. Harddrive Parameters Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

318

Operating the Console Each of the connected storage device can be formatted by selecting the required device and then clicking on the Format HDD button.

5.4.6. How to Search a Witness for Captured Video


The Witness module can be used to search a remote Witness for video that has been captured and stored on its local hard drive. Proceed as follows: 1. From the Witness window right-click on a Witness icon and select Recover Videoclip or alternatively with the required Witness highlighted or video displayed, click on the Search button. The Search window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

319

Figure 5-174. Search Window In the top of the window is a section that displays the range of available video captures i.e. all video contained on the selected hard drive will have been captured within this time frame. 2. Select cameras or microphones to be included in the search or click All. Selection of the Enable button enables any cameras that have been greyed out. This function is used to select cameras that have been disconnected but may have captured video stored on the hard drive.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

320

Operating the Console 3. Enter the Start Time and End Time/Date in which to perform the search. These times and dates must be within the range displayed at the top of the window. See also Video and Image Capture Parameters... Page 362. Alternatively, click on the Enter Duration button and set a specific duration from the Start Time, to perform the search. This duration can be set in minutes, hours or days. This Enter Duration button is available only on GMS version 3.8 or higher.

Figure 5-175. Enter Duration Section of the Search Window 4. From the Event Triggers section of the window, select the source that triggered the required video or click All. The four event types available are detailed below.

Event Type
Alarm

Description
Created for all alarms that are generated by non PIR sensors as defined in the alarm configuration of the master device (Witness or field controller if connected). Created for all alarms that are generated by PIR input types as defined in the alarm configuration. If the Witness has motion areas configured and these are required to action events, that can be searched for, then the motion detector inputs (physical inputs 9-16) must be configured as PIR or Perimeter PIR input types in the Input Configuration dialog box. Created when an event is triggered from a card access transaction. This is setup in the Access Control event definitions by selecting the activation type as CCTV. Specifying the CCTV on time for 0 duration will capture the event only. Any time specified will be post event time in addition to the event capture time.

Motion Detection

Card Access

General Events

Created when a macro triggers event capture.

Table 5-39. Event Types and their Descriptions 5. Click OK. The searching window will be displayed showing the progress of the search.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

321

Figure 5-176. Searching Window Once the search is complete the results of the search will be displayed.

Figure 5-177. Search Results Select a file and click Play if one of the displayed files is known to be the one required. Click Keep Results to transfer the list to the Results tab to review multiple results. To transfer a clip to your local hard drive, refer to How to Transfer a Clip to Your PC... Page 322.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

322

Operating the Console

5.4.7. How to Transfer a Clip to Your PC


The Results tab in the Pacom Witness window contains the results of a previous search completed on a Witness hard drive. See also How to Search a Witness for Captured Video... Page 318. The files listed on the Results tab are still located on the hard drive of the Witness. From the Results tab, the listed clips can be dragged into a display area to view the captured video. The video can then be recorded to your PCs local drive by clicking Record . Alternatively you can right-click on the required clip in the Results tab and select Play. If you wish to transfer the entire clip, click Play and Save.

Files listed on the Results tab will be displayed as follows: Cam or Mic(number) (Time and Date) [A/M/C/S/E/G] where: A = Alarm M = Motion Detect C = Card Access S = Start Recording E = End Recording G = General Event (Macro Triggered)

Note: Clicking Options button > Show Event ID will display the event ID for each event on the Results tab rather than the information described above.
Once the clip is saved or recorded it is stored on your PCs hard drive and the File tab. See How to View Locally Stored Clips... Page 322.

5.4.8. How to View Locally Stored Clips


All video clips and photos that have been transferred from a Witness to your local hard drive are listed on the File tab. By default, these files are stored in the .../GMS/Customer/Files folder.

Note: Witness video clips are stored in an AVI format using a propriety Pacom codec that is not compatible with any other media player or editor application.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide Any file from the Files tab, can be viewed by dragging it into the display area.

323

Right-clicking on a file in the Files tab will give the list of actions that you can perform on the file. See Right-Click Menus in Files Tab... Page 375 for more information.

5.4.9. How to Export a Video Clip


Clips that appear on the File tab are stored on your PCs local hard drive in the .../GMS/ Customer/Files folder. These clips or bitmaps have either been transferred as a result of a search or may have been recorded from live video. To help ensure the evidential integrity of Witness video, clips are stored in an AVI format using a propriety Pacom codec that is not compatible with any other media player/editor application. If you need to play a Witness video clip outside of GMS you can export the clip embedded in its own player. The resultant file is an *.exe file that can be played on any Windows PC. The embedded player software only adds about 200 KB to the size of the video file. To export a clip on the File tab of the Witness window, right-click on the file you wish to export and select Export file with Player from the quick select menu that appears. A standard Save as window will be displayed allowing you to rename if required and save the file wherever you like. To play the file, use Windows Explorer to browse for the location where you saved it and double-click the file.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

324

Operating the Console

Figure 5-178. Witnesss Stand-Alone Video Player

5.4.10. Viewing Live Video from the Site Map


Video can also be viewed by selecting a camera icon (for e.g. ) from the site

map. Selecting the camera icon will open the Witness module and display live video from the selected camera.

5.4.11. Viewing Captured Video from the Transaction Manager


When an alarm or video capture message is generated that has a video associated with it a small V will appear next to the message in the log. Clicking on the event in the log will display the captured video as appropriate. If the Witness unit is on a IP network it will display the video. Otherwise if the Witness unit is on a dial-up, it will launch Modem Dial dialog box and the modem will begin dialing automatically. The operator has the option to cancel the dial-up using the Close button. Connecting to the dial-up Witness is available in GMS version 3.8 or higher.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

325

Figure 5-179. Modem Dial Dialog Box In either case, once video sequence is played completely, the location of the camera is displayed on the site map. This is much similar to a situation, when a card access message is generated. Clicking on this message will display the location of the reader on the site map.

Note: These features are only available when GMS is run in conjunction with an SQL database.

5.4.12. How to Configure the Video and Audio Parameters


Proceed as following. 1. Click on the Video Manager icon on the main GMS toolbar. The Pacom Witness window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

326

Operating the Console

Figure 5-180. Pacom Witness Window 2. Select a Witness to configure from the drop-down list in the top left corner of the window and click Connect. If it does not appear in the list it will have to be added to the address book. Right-click on a Witness icon to configure, select Parameters > Video/Audio from the quick select menu that appears. The Pacom Witness Parameters window will be displayed On the Camera tab, specify setting as required. The following explains the options on this page.

3.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

327

Figure 5-181. Video/Audio Parameters > Camera Tab

Parameter
Camera Number Transmission Parameters Storage Parameters Enable Stream QCIF Resolution

Description
Select which camera to configure. Selects the parameters for live video, sent via the network. Select the parameters for locally stored video. Enable this video channel for transmission or storage. Sets the video resolution to 176 x 144 pixels (transmission or storage).

Table 5-40. Camera Tab Parameters and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

328

Operating the Console

Parameter
CIF Resolution 2CIF Resolution 4CIF Resolution Video Quality

Description
Sets the video resolution to 352 x 288 pixels (transmission or storage). Sets the video resolution to 704 x 288 pixels (storage only). Sets the video resolution to 704 x 576 pixels (storage only). Sets the compression ratio. Bandwidth requirements are directly proportional to the video quality i.e. high quality = high bandwidth requirement. Valid entries are 0-15 Select microphone input/s to associate with this camera. Microphone inputs can be associated with more than one camera. Opens the Advanced Parameters dialog box. See below for explanation on these parameters. Use to traverse to another camera and set its configuration.

Associated with:

Advanced

Table 5-40. Camera Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued) 5. Click on the Advanced button to configure parameters as required. The following explains these parameters.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

329

Figure 5-182. Advanced Camera Transmission/Storage Parameters

Parameter
Number of Interframes

Description
To save on bandwidth requirements, the Witness will send a complete frame of video followed by a series of frames that only contain any changes that may have occurred since the full video frame. The Number of Interframes parameter sets the number of changes only frames that will be transmitted between complete frames. Only applies to video storage. This parameter refers to the amount of time to record before and after a triggered alarm or event. These fields are only applicable when the Enable Stream flag is selected on the Storage Parameters screen.

Event Storage Times

Table 5-41. Advanced Camera Transmission/Storage Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

330

Operating the Console

Parameter
Compression Type

Description
This parameter sets the type of compression used for transmission or storage of video. Wavelet Compression: Better suited for lower bandwidth environments. You will get a better quality image from wavelet compression if bandwidth is limited. This option can be made available (licensed) from Pacom on request. A fee applies for this functionality. Motion JPEG Compression: More suitable for capturing motion sequences at medium quality settings. Higher frame rates are achievable when video quality is set at medium levels.

Table 5-41. Advanced Camera Transmission/Storage Parameter Descriptions 6. 7. Click OK. Next click the Output tab and set its parameters.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

331

Figure 5-183. Video/Audio Parameters > Output Tab 8. In this tab page, you can set the sequence of camera that is displayed locally on the video out port of the Witness unit. Select Video Output Enabled to activate the port. This will then enabled the local video output to cycle through each of the cameras in the order stated under Camera Sequence section. The order and duration for display of each of the cameras is entered in this section. Select Camera 1-8 for each position in the sequence and enter the required duration in seconds for each. When using less than 8 cameras, select None as the camera number for the position after last camera in the sequence. If Compressed Video Out is enabled, the local video port out the same compressed video which is transmitted over the network. Click the General tab and set its parameters.

9.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

332

Operating the Console

Figure 5-184. Video/Audio Parameters > General Tab

Parameter
Active Cameras

Description
Select connected cameras.

Table 5-42. General Tab Parameter and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

333

Parameter
Camera Switch Delay

Description
Number of milliseconds delay for switching between video channels for transmission or capture. Enter a low value for higher frame rates. Increase the value if cameras lose synchronization with each other. Locking camera synchronization together means that this value can be lower. This will improve system performance.

Note: If the video display is rolling or a black band appears at the top/bottom of the display, then try by changing the Camera Switch Delay option.
Loss of Signal Debounce Only when Witness detects a loss of signal continuously for the set number of frames does it generate a loss of signal alarm. Maximum rate of data transmitted (bits per second) over the network. The Witness will only transmit data up to this maximum bandwidth (maximum 10 MB). The Witness can be programmed with an alternate bandwidth to use in response to a macro condition. Use action 76. Alternate B/W Usage on Witness unit. See also Alternate Bandwidth Duration below. Refer to GMS help or field controller Configuration manual for information on configuring macros. The number of seconds that the alternate bandwidth will be used. Opens the Advanced General Parameters dialog box. See below for explanation on these parameters.

Bandwidth Usage

Alternate Bandwidth Usage

Alternate Bandwidth Duration Advanced

Table 5-42. General Tab Parameter and their Descriptions (continued) 10. Click on the Advanced button to configure parameters as required. The following explains these parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

334

Operating the Console

Figure 5-185. Advanced General Parameters

Parameter
Hard-drive Storage Warnings

Description
Under this section, you set the percentage values for HDD (both primary and backup drives) space usage. When the space drops below this value, the Witness unit generates an alarm.

Transmission Flags Allow transmission of 16 video streams from HDD If checked upto 16 video streams are possible to be viewed from the Witness HDD. However, this reduces the possible pre-alarm time on the camera. If left unchecked, upto 4 video streams are possible. Use higher priority for Video data on IP Network If checked, set the priority higher on the IP packet header for video data coming from Witness HDD.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

335

Parameter
Daughter board Communications

Description
This section is by default not available. However, if the Debug Mode is enabled (from the Options button > Display tab > Debug Mode), options will be listed. These available for Pacom engineers to use to debug. These are options that are available under this section.

Time to Send Sequence: The maximum amount of time that the Witness will spend attempting to send a video sequence. Send Sequence Retries: The maximum number of times the Witness will attempt to re-send a sequence before aborting. Reset Sequence: Resets values to default in the above two text boxes. 11. Click the Frame Rate tab and set its parameters.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

336

Operating the Console

Figure 5-186. Video/Audio Parameters > Frame Rate Tab 12. The setting in this applies only to storage stream for each camera.The overall capacity of Witness is currently 20 frames per second.

Note: This is only true if all cameras are set to CIF resolution. If some cameras are set to 2CIF/4CIF, the capacity will decrease.

Note: The distribution of Frame rate count over the attached cameras is dependent on the user. Frame rates specified are used by Witness only as approximation.
13. Click the Audio tab and set its parameters.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

337

Figure 5-187. Video/Audio Parameters > Audio Tab 14. Here in this tab page, enable and set the quality and volume level of the two mono audio inputs and the stereo audio output. The enable flag must be checked to activate the input ports. For these audio inputs, the following settings apply. The Input Quality is measured in bits per sample and is the number of bits used to record each audio sample made by the Witness. The more bits used, the greater the accuracy and quality of the digital sample and also the amount of bandwidth required to store and stream it. The Input Quality can be set using the 4 position slider (on a scale of medium - good) or by selecting one of four quality settings from the drop-down list (2, 3, 4 or 5 bits/sample). The slider and drop-down list are linked, so that any change made to one will be automatically changed on the other (Medium = 2 bits/sample, Good = 5 bits/sample).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

338

Operating the Console

Slider Setting
Medium Good

Quality Setting
2 bits/sample 3 bits/sample 4 bits/sample 5 bits/sample

Bandwidth
16 kbits/s 24 kbits/s 32 kbits/s 40 kbits/s

Table 5-43. Input Quality Settings The Input Volume Level is used to compensate for the varying output levels of different microphones and locations. The Input Volume Level sets the sensitivity of the audio inputs. Increasing the volume will increase the sensitivity of the microphone, the chances of picking up quieter sounds and also the chances that the microphone will be saturated by ambient noise. The input sensitivity is also effected by the setting of Link 2 on the Witness PCB 201 which sets the input for mic or line level, refer to the Witness Installation Manual. The following settings apply to the audio output port. The Output Volume is the volume of the audio available at local analog output. If checked the Enable Local Audio Loopback allows the local input to go to the local audio output.

15.

Once all the Video/Audio Parameters tab are set, click OK.

5.4.13. Two-Way Communications


A full duplex communications link can be setup over the network between a GMS monitoring PC and a remotely monitored location. The audio output and one of the audio inputs on the Witness are connected to a speaker and microphone installed at the remote location. The personnel at the monitoring PC use a standard set of PC speakers and microphone to communicate with anyone at the remote location while viewing them on screen (See Figure 5-188). The microphone is configured the same way it would be for normal operation. The microphone is enabled and configured on the Audio tab and associated with the appropriate video camera on the Video tab. For operation instructions, see Initiating Two-Way Communication... Page 339.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

339

Figure 5-188. Two-Way Communications Link

5.4.13.1. Initiating Two-Way Communication


To initiate the two-way communication, click on the Microphone icon on the Pacom Witness window. The Audio Display window will open. Setting on this is used to enable the PC microphone for the communications with the site being viewed and to set the audio input compression level (quality).

Figure 5-189. Audio Display Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

340

Operating the Console To change the compression level for the PC microphone, select an audio compression ratio from the drop-down list. This list is the same parameter as Audio Input Compression in the Local Parameters. Two options for communication: Half-Duplex - When an operator speaks on the GMS PC into a microphone, the audio is played to the relevant Witness speaker. Also the Witness microphone is disabled when the operator is speaking, so that there is no echoing on the line. Half-duplex is available for GMS 3.8 higher. Full-Duplex - Both the operator at the GMS PC and on the Witness can speak and hear each other at the same time. Depending on the speaker and microphone configuration, the GMS operator may hear their voice echoed on the line.

To speak to the location being viewed, click Speak Mode, this will enable the local PC microphone input and will output any audio captured to the local audio output of the Witness. Hold this button down only when speaking. To cut out background noise, raise the noise level slider slowly until the background noise is removed. This slider is the same parameter as Noise Level in the Local Parameters. Click Close when complete.

5.4.14. How to Configure the Witness Input and Outputs


The Witness inputs and outputs can be configured from the RAP Configuration window. [Refer to Field Controller Configuration Manual for more information]. Some parameters related to the input and outputs can also be configured from the Video Manager module. The following describes the parameters that can be setup. 1. From the Witness window, right-click on a Witness icon and select I/O Parameters from the quick select menu that appears. The Input/Output Settings window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

341

Figure 5-190. Input/Output Settings Window 2. 3. Highlight the first alarm input to be configured by clicking on it. Click Input in the lower left corner of the Witness window. The Alarm # Parameter window will be displayed.

Figure 5-191. Alarm # Parameters Window 4. Referring to the parameter descriptions below edit parameters for each input as required. Use the <<Prev and Next>> buttons to scroll through each of the inputs.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

342

Operating the Console

Parameter
Input Vocabulary Debounce Time Polarity For Input

Description
Select a description of the input from the pull-down-menu. Delay (x100ms) waited after each input activation so that contact bounce does not trigger multiple input alarms. Checked for Normally Open inputs. Unchecked for Normally Closed inputs. N/A for motion detect inputs.

Note: The Polarity for Input only applies to revision 1 of the Witness PCB. Later revisions use end of line monitored inputs and polarity does not apply.
Table 5-44. Alarm # Parameters Window Descriptions 5. 6. Click OK when complete. The window will close. From the Input/Output Settings window, highlight the first camera to be configured and click Motion. The Motion Detection window will be displayed with a sample of the video from the selected camera.

Note: The sample screen may not appear. To get the sample screen, ensure the Storage Parameter > Enable Streams (in Video/ Audio Parameters) has been enabled for that camera.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7.

343

Click Rectangle 1 to enable it. The 4 rectangles are color coded. Notice the color key next to each of the rectangle buttons. In the video sample area position the cursor in an area to detect motion in. While holding down the mouse button drag the pointer to create the rectangle. Any motion detected within the rectangle will trigger the motion detector alarm for that camera. If the rectangle is not in the required position de-select and then re-select the Rectangle 1 button and try again. Select Invert Masked Area to make the hot area everywhere except in the boxes. Notice that the white box will then change color to yellow indicating that the hot area is the area outside the red, green, blue or orange box.

8.

Figure 5-192. Motion Detection Window 9. 10. To create up to 4 rectangles in the frame, repeat Step 8 using the other rectangle buttons. Set the sensitivity for all rectangles using the Sensitivity slider or enter a value in the Sensitivity field. This value is a measure of the percentage change in the picture within the defined rectangle that is required for a motion detector alarm to be triggered. This parameter is common to all 4 rectangles. To configure the motion detection of other cameras, select the next camera from the Trigger drop-down list and repeat procedure from Step 8. Click OK when complete. The window will close.

11.

12.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

344

Operating the Console 13. Selecting the Global button on the Input/Output Settings window, will display the Global Parameters dialog box.

Figure 5-193. Global Parameters Dialog Box The settings on this window controls the local video output under alarm conditions. The Total playback time determines the maximum amount of time the camera will playback on the local monitor under an alarm condition. The Playback each camera for specifies minimum each of the camera will playback on the local monitor. This completes the I/O parameter configuration.

5.4.15. How to Setup Recording Schedules


Schedules are used to record events of interest that will occur at known times in the future and store them on the local (Witness) hard drive for later review. Cameras can be set to record events that occur once or on a regular or semi-regular basis. There are three schedules as follows: Normal: For events that occur on a regular basis. Temporary: For events that occur on a single day. Holiday: To set which days are effected by the holiday schedule.

5.4.15.1. Normal and Temporary Schedule Setup


1. Connect to the Witness that you wish to configure. See How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 2. From the Pacom Witness window right-click on the Witness icon and select Parameters > Schedule from the quick select menu that appears. The Recording Schedules window will be displayed.

345

3.

Select the Temporary tab to view, add, edit or delete temporary schedules (single day occurrences) or leave the Normal tab selected to add, edit, or delete schedules that occur on a regular basis.

Figure 5-194. Recording Schedules Window 4. To add a new entry, click Add. The Add Schedule window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

346

Operating the Console

Figure 5-195. Add Schedule > Date Tab 5. Select one of the following: 6. 7. Weekly: For events that occur on one or more days of every week. Example. Every Wednesday and Thursday. By Date: For events that occur on a specific date every month. Example. Every 3rd of the month. By Order: For events that occur on a particular day in every month. Example. Every 2nd, Friday of the month. Holiday Schedule: Applies to all those days marked as holidays. Holiday Schedule Setup... Page 348. Temporary: Enabled when adding a temporary schedule (See Step 3).

Specify the date or day(s) in the fields that are now enabled. Select the Start and End Times tab.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

347

Figure 5-196. Add Schedule > Start and End Times Tab 8. Select a pre-defined time from the Index drop-down list (numbers correspond to start and end time entries in the bottom window) or enter Start and End times as required. Any entries made will be added to the list at the bottom for later selection. Click OK when complete or click Clear all Entries to start again. Select the Camera and Microphone tab.

9. 10.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

348

Operating the Console

Figure 5-197. Add Schedule > Camera and Microphone Tab 11. 12. 13. Select which cameras and microphones to be effected or click Select All. Click OK when complete. The schedule will be added to the list. Return to Step 3 and repeat procedure for each schedule to be added. Click OK when complete.

5.4.15.2. Holiday Schedule Setup


1. Connect to the Witness that you wish to configure. See How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314. From the Pacom Witness window, right-click on a Witness icon and select Parameters > Holiday from the quick select menu that appears. The Holiday Setup window will be displayed.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

349

Figure 5-198. Holiday Setup Window 3. Using the < and > buttons to change the month, highlight days to be marked as holidays as required. Click OK when complete. The Normal schedule will now require an entry to record on all holidays. See Normal and Temporary Schedule Setup... Page 344.

4. 5.

5.4.16. How to Setup Network Parameters


Basic addresses and connectivity settings are specified here so that a base station can connect to the Witness unit and using GMS a base station operator can configure the unit. To access and setup the network parameters, proceed as following. 1. Connect to the Witness that you wish to configure. How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314 From the Pacom Witness window, right-click on a Witness icon and select Parameters > Network from the quick select menu that appears. The Network Parameters tab pages will be displayed. In the Local tab page specify the following settings: RTU Address: The address of the Witness unit. The unique address the unit is known by in the Pacom security network.

2.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

350

Operating the Console Local IP Address: IP address of the Witness unit. Local Subnet Mask: Subnet mask of the network on which the Witness unit is connected. IP address of a router Basestation IP address: The IP address of the base station line card. Basestation Phone Number: A number to dial for the base station.

Figure 5-199. Network Parameters > Local Tab 4. Click on the General tab. Most of the settings in this page are used by Pacom engineers for debugging and does not effect the user.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

351

Figure 5-200. Network Parameters > General Tab The following explains these settings. It is advisable that the values set for these setting are not altered unless so advised.

Parameter
Inactivity timeout for IP Cache <secs>

Description
If communication with GMS is inactive for this set time then the IP cache is reset.

Note: A maximum of 8 GMS PCs can connect to a Witness unit.


Response time to a message <x100ms> The set value is used as the time within which GMS is to respond to Witness communication.

Table 5-45. General Tab Parameters and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

352

Operating the Console

Parameter
Max retransmit attempts for a message Port inactivity timeout <mins> Witness UDP Port Number Video Data Block Size Video Data Window Size

Description
The number of times that Witness will attempt to resend a command/request to GMS. If no activity is noticed on any of connected GMS the port is shut down in this set time. Port number as recognized by Witness for base station line card or GMS communication port. The number of video data bytes in a single message packet. The number of video data packets transmitted to GMS without acknowledgement.

Table 5-45. General Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued) 5. Click OK.

5.4.17. About Pan Tilt and Zoom Controllers


Pacom Witness cameras can be operated with Pan Tilt and Zoom (PTZ) Controllers. The following PTZ controllers are supported: Intercept Camera Decoder (Pelco) American Dynamics G3 Auto Dome (Philips) Robot Switcher (MV96e) Video Controls Limited (VCL) VCL Telemetry Matrix (MAXCOM8)

On a given port of the Witness the same type of controllers can be connected. However, it is possible to connect different controller. Just that they have to connected to a different port on the Witness. For the Intercept, Video Controls Limited and American Dynamics PTZ controllers, the device line can be configured for RS232 or RS485 operation via links on the field controller PCB, for the VCL Telemetry Matrix and Philips G3 dome you must use RS232. Both RS232 and RS485 connections can be daisy chain connected to multiple PTZ controllers because they are receive-only devices. Each device must however, be programmed with a unique device address so that it can identify which messages to read and which to ignore. Refer to the manual supplied with the PTZ controller for instructions on how to program the address.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

353

For instructions on configuring the Witness device loop port, refer to the Witness Installation Manual.

5.4.17.1. How to Configure the PTZ Controller Addresses


Each PTZ controller once installed must be associated with the camera to which it connected. To associate cameras with controllers, proceed as follows: 1. Connect to the Witness that you wish to configure. How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314 Right-click on the Witness icon and select Parameters > PTZ from the quick select menu that appears. A PTZ Parameters dialog will be displayed.

2.

Figure 5-201. PTZ Parameters > PTZ Camera Addresses Tab 3. For each camera that has a PTZ controller: a) Select the camera from the drop-down list and select Enable PTZ Control For Selected Camera. b) In the Camera PTZ Receiver Address box, type in the RS485 or RS232 address for each controller. 4. Click OK when all PTZ controllers have been configured.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

354

Operating the Console

5.4.17.2. Display from Cameras with PTZ


If a camera has been setup for PTZ control, as you run your mouse over the display area the mouse pointer will change to a hand pointing in a direction corresponding to the quadrant in which you have placed it. When the hand is pointing in the direction you wish to move the camera, click the mouse button.

Figure 5-202. Pan And Tilt Controls in Pacom Witness Window Display To operate other PTZ controls, right-click in the display area and select Ptz Controls from the menu that appears.The PTZ Control window will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

355

Figure 5-203. PTZ Controls Window The following explains presets on this window.

Control

Keyboard Short-cut
Arrow Keys

Description
Pan and Tilt: Adjusts the horizontal and vertical position of the camera. One pan and one tilt arrow key can be pressed at the same time to move the camera diagonally.

Z Ctrl + Z F Ctrl + F I

Zoom In: Increases the magnification of the image Zoom Out: Decreases the magnification of the image Focus Far: Shifts the focus of the lens towards a far away object. Focus Near: Shifts the focus of the lens closer to the camera. Iris Open: Opens the lens iris wider to let more light in and make the picture brighter.

Table 5-46. PTZ Control Presets

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

356

Operating the Console

Control

Keyboard Short-cut
Ctrl + I

Description
Iris Close: Closes the lens iris to block more light and make the picture darker and less saturated. Select a preset position from the drop-down list. Preset Execute: Sends the camera to the position set for the preset selected in the drop-down list. Set Preset: Sets the preset selected in the drop-down list to the cameras current position as it appears in the video display area. Reset Preset: Clears the settings for the preset selected in the drop-down list Some PTZ controllers have additional outputs connected to devices such as windscreen wipers, infrared illuminators or anti-condensation heaters etc. Select an auxiliary PTZ output from the drop-down list and click the Auxiliary On or Off buttons. Auxiliary On: Turns on the auxiliary output selected in the drop-down list. Auxiliary Off: Turns off the auxiliary output selected in the drop-down list.

Preset

N/A Ctrl + X P

Ctrl + P Aux N/A

A Ctrl + A

Table 5-46. PTZ Control Presets (continued) Each PTZ controller can be programmed with a number of preset positions. The number of available presets varies depending on the type of controller used. Presets can only be setup once the PTZ controller is correctly configured. To program PTZ presets, proceed as follows: 1. Connect to the Witness for which presets are to be set. See How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314. Drag and drop the required video camera from the Witness tree into the video display area.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3.

357

Once live video is displayed, right-click on the video display area and select Ptz Controls from the quick select menu that is displayed. The PTZ controls will be displayed with the camera number and IP address of the selected Witness displayed in the title bar. Repeat the following steps for each preset to be configured. a) From the Preset drop-down list, select a preset to configure. b) Using the Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Focus and Iris controls set the camera to a view you would like to preset. Click .

4.

Note: Macros can also be used to command any given camera to move to a particular preset. Refer to the section on Macros in the GMS Help or Field Controller Configuration Manual. Use Action 77. Jump to PTZ Preset.

5.4.18. Option Button Menu


Clicking the Options button on the Witness window, will display this menu.

Figure 5-204. Options Button Menu The following describes the options on this menu.

Option
Show Event ID

Description
Toggles between showing ID or description of events in the Result tab.

Table 5-47. Options Menu Description

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

358

Operating the Console

Option
Configure

Description

The below describes each of these sub-menu options. Serial Port: Default Parameters: Settings used to connect the Video Manager (GMS PC) to the Witness. For this the modem has to be unplugged. This helps to create parameters offline and use them on multiple Witnesses. For more details, refer to About Default Parameter Files... Page 370. These are parameters set on the Video Manager. For more details, refer to How to Setup Local Parameters... Page 358. List displayed here is used by Pacom engineers for diagnostic purposes. This list is local to Video Manager. If enabled, it sharpens the video stream currently displayed. Displays version of Video Manager installed.

Local Parameters: Local Errors Sharpen Filter About

Table 5-47. Options Menu Description (continued)

5.4.18.1. How to Setup Local Parameters


To configure the local parameters, proceed as follows: 1. From the Pacom Witness window, click Options and select Configure > Local Parameters from the quick select menu that appears. The Local Parameters window will be displayed with the Comms tab selected. Referring to the following figures and tables configure each of the four tabbed pages as required.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

359

Figure 5-205. Local Parameters > Comms Tab

Parameter
Witness Comms Parameters General ACK Retries

Description

The number of times that GMS will attempt to resend a command/request without an acknowledgement. After this number of retries an error message is generated. The number of seconds that GMS will wait for an acknowledgement to a command/request before trying again. See General Ack Retries (above).

ACK Timeout <secs>

Table 5-48. Comms Tab Parameters and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

360

Operating the Console

Parameter
Video Stream timeout

Description
The amount of time GMS will wait for the next video packet when streaming video before it will put a red box around the display. Option available only on GMS version 3.8 or higher. Select the network card IP address that is used to connect to the Witness unit. An IP address for each network card will be listed if the PC has multiple cards. The Auto-detect picks up the first available address. When an IP address is selected which is different from the last selected, the following message will appear.

Network Adapter IP

Close the Video Manager window and re-open it for the settings to take effect. Witness Poll Parameters Poll Connected Witness Units This flag is recommended for dial up and ISDN connections to prevent the line from being disconnected. Any currently connected Witnesses will be periodically polled. The number of seconds between polls. The number of seconds after connection that polling will continue.

Poll Frequency Poll Duration Audio Comms Parameters Noise Level

Used to filter out ambient noise. The level should be slowly increased until the background noise disappears and is triggered by a voice or other event. This parameter also appears on the Initiating Two-Way Communication.

Table 5-48. Comms Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

361

Parameter
Audio Input Compression

Description
Used to adjust the audio quality. High number = high quality = high bandwidth usage. This parameter also appears on the Initiating Two-Way Communication.

Table 5-48. Comms Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued)

Figure 5-206. Local Parameters > Files Tab

Parameter
Use GMS Database (for address book)

Description
Pacom Witness addresses are obtained from the Site Map information, stored in the GMS database.

Table 5-49. Files Tab Parameters and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

362

Operating the Console

Parameter
Video and Image Capture Parameters Record Local Video Automatically Use Local Time to Timestamp File Save Images in JPEG format (not bitmap) Watermark Saved Images Strip bmp & jpg Extensions from Images Save Color Images as Greyscale (B&W) Stamp Frame Information Over Image

Description

Any video streamed to your PC will be automatically recorded to your hard drive. Use the time from you local PC to timestamp any recorded video instead of the time from the Witness. Saves snapshots to local PC in JPEG format as default instead of BMP format. Saves an image to the local PC drive with a watermark so that the images integrity can be confirmed. Removes extension from image filename. Saves all colored images to the local PC drive as black and white. If selected, the snapshots taken thereafter will have a stamp of site name, camera number, time and date. An example is shown below.

Table 5-49. Files Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

363

Parameter
Video and Image Capture Directory Stored Parameters Directory Automatic Image Capture (FTP) Directory

Description
The folder to which to store recorded video files. The folder to which to store default parameter files. See About Default Parameter Files... Page 370. Saves image files in the set directory path.

Table 5-49. Files Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued)

Figure 5-207. Local Parameters > Display Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

364

Operating the Console

Parameter
Video Status Bar Site Information

Description
These parameters apply to the Video and Alarm Status Bar at the bottom of the Witness video display. This parameter determines which site information is displayed from the The Witness Address Book... Page 311. Options available are: Site Name descriptive name of site Site Number (Field Controller Number) IP Address (of the Witness)

Camera Information

This parameter determines the information displayed for each camera. The information is taken from the Site Map. Options available are: Location Number Video and Alarm Status Bar... Page 307

Local Alarm Inputs

This parameter determines the way in which the status of the alarm inputs on the Witness PCB are displayed. Options available are: All - 8 LED indicators will be displayed. Individual LEDs will light red when the corresponding input is in alarm and will light green when secure. Summary - A single LED will be displayed, it will light red when any of the inputs are active. It will light green when all inputs are secure.

None - No LEDs will be displayed. Video and Alarm Status Bar... Page 307 Table 5-50. Display Tab Parameters and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

365

Parameter
Motion Alarms

Description
This parameter determines the way in which the status of the motion detector inputs on the cameras of the Witness are displayed. Options available are: All - 8 LED indicators will be displayed. Individual LEDs will light red when motion is detected on the corresponding camera and will light green when no motion is detected. Summary - A single LED will be displayed, it will light red when motion is detected on any of the cameras connected to the Witness. It will light green when no motion is detected on any camera. None - No LEDs will be displayed.

Show Local Output Status Show Frame Size/ Rate Show Filename When Recording Change Border Color on Event

The local output indicators can be enabled/disabled. The frame size and rate indicator can be enabled/disabled. Display of filename can be enabled/disabled on the Video and Alarm Status bar. This display is only for when a video clip is copied to the local hard drive. When this flag is selected the border of the active frame will be displayed yellow during pre-alarm video and will change to red when the trigger of the event occurs and will remain red for the duration of the video sequence. See Video frame border. When you search a Witness hard drive for captured video, you will be prompted with default times in which to search between. The later time is set to the most recent captured sequence and the Default Search Duration is subtracted from this time to give the earlier time. How to Search a Witness for Captured Video... Page 318

Default Search Duration <mins>

Default Copy Duration <mins> Pause Before a New Event.

This is duration that is displayed as defaults when you select the option to copy or save the video clip. When this flag is selected, the video sequence will automatically pause when the event that triggered the recording occurs.

Table 5-50. Display Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

366

Operating the Console

Parameter
Debug Mode (Not Recommended)

Description
To enable some of the parameters fields which are available for debugging purpose for Pacom engineers.

Table 5-50. Display Tab Parameters and their Descriptions (continued)

Figure 5-208. Local Parameters > Scan Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

367

Parameter
Enable Daily Scan of Witness Units

Description
You can schedule a daily scan of the Witness units in the address book. The scan will request a connection to each Witness unit in the address book, and will request live video from each Witness unit.

Note: You can request similar scan at any time by clicking on the Check Units button in the Witness Address Book.
Daily Time to Start Scan The Video Manager will start the daily scan each day at the time selected. The time entered should be set to a time when a user will not be using the workstation. The timeout for the responses from each Witness unit during the scan. To verify that the hard-drive on the Witness unit is working correctly during a scan, a previously recorded video clip is requested. This value is the time and date that the scan will request video from.

Witness Response Timeout <secs> Request Video Clip

Note: If the Witness unit does not have video recorded at the selected time, then errors will be recorded in the scan log.
Table 5-51. Scan Tab Parameter and their Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

368

Operating the Console

Parameter
Scan All Cameras

Description
If checked, the scan will be performed on all connected cameras. If unchecked, only the first connected camera will be scanned.

Note: Scanning all cameras takes longer to perform.


Record Event Images Automatically [SEPROBAN] When the operator actions an alarm in GMS, and the alarm point has linked cameras enabled on the GMS site map, then if this box is checked, a series of JPEG (or bitmap) images will be recorded for the event in the image directory. See Automatic Image Capture (FTP) Directory... Page 363.

Note: This feature will not work unless a variable in the GMS32.INI configuration file has been set.
Store images for Open Prealarm in Separate Windows JPEG Quality Recording of the images will take place for the set number of seconds. The prealarm video for the alarm event will also be displayed on the screen, and the pre-alarm images will also be saved in the specified directory. Quality of the JPEG images is determined by the value set in this drop-down. Higher the value, higher its quality.

Table 5-51. Scan Tab Parameter and their Descriptions (continued)

5.4.18.1.1.

How to Change Display in the Alarm Status Bar


The Alarm Status bar can be configured to display various information as per requirement. Following gives some examples.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

369

Figure 5-209. Example of Alarm Status Bar To display the above fields in the Alarm Status bar, set the options in the Display tab of Local Parameters as shown below.

Figure 5-210. Settings in Local Parameters > Display tab for See Figures 5-209 The following provides another example and Local Parameters > Display tab settings relevant to display in these details in the Alarm Status bar.

Figure 5-211. Example Alarm Status Bar

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

370

Operating the Console

Figure 5-212. Settings in Local Parameters > Display tab for See Figures 5-211

5.4.18.2. About Default Parameter Files


Default parameter files are used to save and load sets of commonly used settings for Witness parameters to and from Witness units. You can edit default files as required and use them to quickly configure other Witness units. You can transfer default files to other PCs as required. By default, default files are stored in the .../GMS/Customer/Files directory. To change the directory for default file storage refer to How to Setup Local Parameters... Page 358. Settings are stored in separate files for video, input/output, schedule and holiday parameters using the following file extensions.

Parameters
Video I/O Schedule Holiday

File Extension
*.vfg *.ifg *.sfg *.hfg

Table 5-52. Default File Extensions

5.4.18.2.1.

How to Access the Default Parameters Dialog Box


The Default Parameters dialog box can accessed in one of two ways.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

371

If you only wish to edit an existing default parameter file, from the Pacom Witness window select Options > Configure > Default Parameters. The Default Parameters dialog box will be displayed with the Load from Witness and Save to Witness buttons greyed out. Refer to How to Edit Default Parameter Files... Page 372. To load, save or edit default parameter files, proceed as follows. 1. Open the Pacom Witness window and connect to a Witness that you would like to load from or save parameters to. How to Connect to a Witness... Page 314 Right-click on the Witness icon and select Parameters > Defaults from the quick select menu that appears. The Default Parameters dialog box will be displayed.

2.

Figure 5-213. Default Parameters Dialog Box 3. Load, save and edit files as required.

5.4.18.2.2.

How to Load Default Parameters from a Witness


To load a set of parameters from a Pacom Witness and save them as a default parameters file, proceed as follows: 1. Open the Default Parameters dialog box How to Access the Default Parameters Dialog Box... Page 370 Select the type of parameters you wish to load (Video, I/O, Schedule or Holiday parameters). In the File combo box, type in a name to save the file as or select an existing file from the list. Click Load from Witness. The parameters will be loaded from the Witness and saved with the file name specified to the directory set in Stored Parameters Directory of the local parameters, with a VFG, IFG, SFG or HFG extension, see Table 5-52.

2.

3.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

372

Operating the Console

5.4.18.2.3.

How to Save Default Parameters to a Witness


To download a set of parameters from a default parameters file to a Pacom Witness and save them, proceed as follows: 1. Open the Default Parameters dialog box How to Access the Default Parameters Dialog Box... Page 370 Select the type of parameters you wish to save (Video, I/O, Schedule or Holiday parameters). Select an existing file from the File drop-down list. These files are located in the folder set in Stored Parameters Directory. Click Save to Witness. The parameters will be downloaded to the Witness and saved.

2.

3.

4.

5.4.18.2.4.
1.

How to Edit Default Parameter Files


Open the Default Parameters dialog box How to Access the Default Parameters Dialog Box... Page 370 Select the type of parameters you wish to load (Video, I/O, Schedule or Holiday Parameters). Select an existing file from the File drop-down list. These files are located in the folder set in Stored Parameters Directory. Click Edit Defaults in the Configuration window for the type of parameter file you have selected will be displayed. Referring to one of the following sections, edit parameters as required.

2.

3.

4.

5.4.19. Right-Click Menu in Units Tab


The following menu appears when you right-click on a camera in the Units tab.

Figure 5-214. Units Tab > Right-click Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

373

Option
Play Remote Playback

Description
Finds the next free display slot and plays the video feed from the requested camera. Plays recorded video from the Witness hard drive from the selected camera for the selected date and time.

Figure 5-215. Remote Playback Dialog Box The Play Event Following Specified Time option if checked plays the next event from the selected camera at the specified time and date. If unchecked it plays any event nearest to the set time. On clicking the Play & Save button, the Save Video dialog box appears.

Figure 5-216. Save Video Dialog Box Specify the end time of the video that needs to be played back. On clicking Yes, it will download the clip from the specified camera for the specified time period. The download takes place from the Witness HDD to the local computer. The video appears in the fast-forward mode as the video is downloaded. On clicking No, the clip is downloaded but with no specific end time. This clip can be stopped manually or closed. Table 5-53. Right-click Menu Options in Unit Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

374

Operating the Console

Option
Remote Copy

Description
For the selected camera the recorded video is copied to the specified device (secondary device or flash card). Also the duration of the recording can be specified by selecting the start and end date and time.

Figure 5-217. Remote Copy Dialog Box Table 5-53. Right-click Menu Options in Unit Tab (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

375

5.4.20. Right-Click Menus in Files Tab


Menus that appear in the Files tab vary depending on the file type.

Menu for
On folder Local

Menu Option Description

Figure 5-218. Right-click Menu on Local Folder

Note: The Sort by RTU and Sort by Date options are only available in GMS version 3.8 and higher.
Apply User Filter. Toggles to apply or disable the specified filter criterion to all AVI files under the Local folder. If the filter is enabled, only files which match the filter criterion are displayed. (In GMS version 3.8 or higher the following happens in addition - Files (BMP and JPEG in addition to AVIs) matching the filter criterion will appear in a folder called matches. Files that do not match the criterion are put in the non matches folder. Files which are either corrupt or for files earlier than GMS 3.8 will be placed in a folder called BAD.)

Sort by RTU - Sorts the files (AVI, BMP and JPEG) by the field controller number from which the file originated. The sorting is by ascending field controller numbers. Sort by Date - Sorts the files (AVI, BMP and JPEG) by the date of their creation. The sorting is by ascending date.

Table 5-54. Right-click Menus in Files Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

376

Operating the Console

Menu for
On folder Local

Menu Option Description


Note: If a file has a corrupt field controller number or date or it was created in GMS version earlier than 3.8, it will appear in a folder named BAD.
Filter Settings: Here you specify the filter (search) criterion. The search can be from either one or range of Witness units (their field controller numbers) and/or attached camera numbers and/or a search date and time

Figure 5-219. Filter Search Dialog Box Table 5-54. Right-click Menus in Files Tab (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

377

Menu for
On a video file

Menu Option Description

Figure 5-220. Right-click Menu on a Video File Replay: Play the selected file. Export file with Player (avi file only). See How to Export a Video Clip... Page 323 Export file as JPEGs - Saves the selected file (video) as a series of images (JPEGs). Verify Watermark: Confirms the integrity of the file. If the file has been altered in any way a message is displayed, The watermark does not match the original. Display areas image changed? click Yes to view the image with the changed areas highlighted. Rename: Use this option to change the name of the file. Delete: Use to delete selected file. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Table 5-54. Right-click Menus in Files Tab (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

378

Operating the Console

Menu for
On a image file (BMP JPEG ) or

Menu Option Description

Figure 5-221. Right-click Menu on a Image File Open Image: Open and display the image. Verify Watermark: Confirms the integrity of the file. If the file has been altered in any way a message is displayed, The watermark does not match the original. Display areas image changed? click Yes to view the image with the changed areas highlighted. Rename: Use this option to change the name of the file. Delete: Use to delete selected file. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Table 5-54. Right-click Menus in Files Tab (continued)

5.4.21. Right-Click Menu in the Result Tab


The following menu appears when you right-click on a file in the Result tab.

Figure 5-222. Result Tab > Right-click Menu Play: Play the selected video from the Result tab.

Play and Save: The Save Video dialog box appears.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

379

Figure 5-223. Save Video Dialog Box Specify the end time of the video that needs to be played back. On clicking Yes, it will download the clip from the specified camera for the specified time period. The download takes place from the Witness HDD to the local computer. The video appears in the fastforward mode as the video is downloaded. On clicking No, the clip is downloaded but with no specific end time. This clip can be stopped manually or closed. Remote Copy: Copies the clip to a secondary device.

Figure 5-224. Remote Copy Dialog Box

Note: The Copy Event Clip Only check box copies the video clip only between the prealarm and post-alarm time. If unchecked, you can set the end time of the video given that the video after the alarm is recorded.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

380

Operating the Console

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

381

Chapter 6 Access Control


6.1. Overview
The card access control manages the access that cards have to doors, areas etc. and what card a cardholder is assigned. This is managed through the GMS module Card Access Manager. The Card Access Manager module keeps details of each cardholder by storing each record in a database. Some of these records are also stored locally by field controllers to allow card access operation even if there is a communication failure. The Card Access Manager window is displayed by clicking the Card Access Manager button on the GMS toolbar. There are eight tabs to select from in the Card Access Manager. The Search tab is always displayed by default. You can access to the other Card Access Manager tabs by clicking on the tab or the icons on the left hand side of the screen.

Figure 6-1. Card Access Manager Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

382

Access Control

Note: The first time GMS is opened without a database it is possible that the Global Access Group tab is named ? (?). To customize, go to GMS main menu Setup > User Defined Words... . At the bottom of the Default Words list highlight Global Access Group, GAG to enter your own terminology in the New Words field. Click OK.
If Enable Operator Partition has been checked in System Parameter Configuration > Access Control tab then at the bottom of the Card Access Manager you can see in the Total Cards status bar how many cards out of the total amount of cards in the system your particular operator partitioning allows you to view. Configure Partitioning Tab... Page 50. In the example above you would be able to view 682 cardholder cards out of a total 31039. If Enable Operator Partition has not been checked Total Cards will simply display the number of cards the database contains.

Card Access Manager tab

Function of the tab


Use the Search tab to find information about one or more cardholders. There are many different ways to search and how depends on the type of information you are looking for. An example would be to display all cardholders whose cards are due to expire within the next week. This would involve searching using for example the Status and Day(s) to Expire text boxes.

Table 6-1. Card Access Manager Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

383

Card Access Manager tab

Function of the tab


Use the Reports tab to preview and print reports on cardholders and their related transactions. There are three tabs to select within Reports: The Card Access Transaction Report tab is used to identify where transactions have been made and who made them. The Cardholder Report Options tab is used when you want to be more specific about cardholders. That could be to ask for a cardholder by name, by department or where the card has been assigned (Reader Group, Access Level etc.). The Standard Reports tab can be used to quickly print those reports used frequently. An example would be, all lost or stolen cards. See Reports... Page 555

Use the Time Zones tab to create, modify and delete time zones. Time zones are the times when access is permitted to readers by cardholders. Time zones are associated with cardholders by the use of Reader Groups and Access Levels. See Time Zones... Page 394 Use the Global Reader Group (GRG) tab to add card readers to groups. By grouping readers and giving them meaningful names they are easier to setup and manage. A Reader Group is a combination of three things: a field controller (or site) number, or group controllers a card reader number (attached to the field controller)

a time zone (attached to each reader) The name of the Reader Group is recommended to be location specific, e.g. Sydney R&D Warehouse. There is no limit to the number of field controllers, card readers and time zones per Reader Group. See Reader Groups... Page 400 Table 6-1. Card Access Manager Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

384

Access Control

Card Access Manager tab

Function of the tab


Use the Global Access Group (GAG) tab to assign Reader Groups to a cardholder. A cardholder can only have one Access Level so care must be taken in creating and allocating them. There is no limit to the number of Reader Groups that an Access Level can have. The name of the Access Level is recommended to reflect the group of user, e.g. Developers, Accountants, Cleaners etc. See Access Levels... Page 412 Use the Floor Access Level (FAL) to give cardholders elevator access to floors. See Floor Access Levels... Page 416 Use the Cardholders tab to create, modify and delete all aspects of cardholders access. There are six tabs to select within Cardholders: The Personal tab contains name, address, phone, card status information. The Card Details tab contains various card numbers, card and user type, user flags and validity dates. The Access Level tab is where cardholder access is granted. The User Defined 1 tab has seven text boxes that can be setup to suit the operations of different companies. The User Defined 2 tab has further information on the location and physical appearance of the cardholder.

The User Defined 3 tab is a free form text area. All tabs can display a cardholder photo and sample signature. See Cardholder Management... Page 424 Use the Parameters tab to block download parameters to multiple cards and multiple field controllers at the one time. An example would be to block all cards immediately. See Parameters... Page 421 Table 6-1. Card Access Manager Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

385

6.1.1. Toolbar
Another way to display Card Access Manager tabs is to click the buttons on the toolbar on the left hand side of the Card Access Manager window.

Figure 6-2. Card Access Manager Toolbar This will open the matching Card Access Manager tab without having to go the menu. The toolbar can be displayed either on the left or top of the page. The default is to the left.

Icon

Function
Search

Icon

Function
Global Access Groups

Reports

Floor Access Levels

Table 6-2. Toolbar Buttons And Their Meaning

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

386

Access Control

Icon

Function
Time Zones

Icon

Function
Cardholders

Global Reader Groups

Parameters

Table 6-2. Toolbar Buttons And Their Meaning (continued) The toolbar can be turned on or off from the View menu by selecting Card Access Toolbar. A tick indicates the toolbar will be displayed.

6.1.1.1.

How to Re-position The Toolbar


To move the toolbar to the top position, proceed as follows. 1. Hold down the mouse button at the top of the toolbar (or any of the toolbar dividers), and drag it to just under the menu items.

Figure 6-3. Where to Click The Toolbar 2. When you see a narrow rectangular pattern the toolbar can be dragged to the top of the page.

Figure 6-4. The Rectangular Pattern of The Toolbar

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3.

387

When in the right position release the mouse button and the toolbar will attach itself to the page.

If the toolbar is not positioned where you want it and you wish for example to align it to the left, proceed as follows. 1. Hold down the mouse button at the top of the toolbar (or any of the toolbar dividers), and drag it into position.

Figure 6-5. Where to Click The Toolbar 2. When in the right position release the mouse button.

Figure 6-6. The Toolbar Has Been Moved to The Left (In This Example)

6.1.1.2.

Floating Toolbar
The toolbar is also dockable, which means it can be dragged away (detached) from the Card Access Manager window and moved around the screen. This is called floating.

Figure 6-7. The Floating Toolbar

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

388
6.1.1.3.

Access Control

How to Detach The Toolbar


To detach the toolbar, proceed as follows. 1. Hold down the mouse button at the top of the toolbar (or any of the toolbar dividers), and drag it to where you want it.

Figure 6-8. Where to Click The Toolbar to Drag It Away 2. When it is in the right place release the mouse button.

Figure 6-9. The Dockable Toolbar Free of The Page To move the floating toolbars position (but not re-attach), proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Click anywhere on the title bar with the mouse. Hold down the mouse button and drag it to where you want. When it is in the right place release the mouse button.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

389

6.1.1.4.

How to Re-attach The Toolbar


To re-attach the toolbar to the page, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Click anywhere on the title bar with the mouse. Hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar towards either the left or top position. When you see a narrow rectangular pattern release the mouse button and the toolbar will attach itself to the page.

Figure 6-10. The Toolbar Has Been Re-attached to The Page (Pictured Right) If the toolbar is not positioned where you want it, proceed as follows. 1. Hold down the mouse button at the top of the toolbar (or any of the toolbar dividers), and drag it into position.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

390

Access Control

Figure 6-11. Where to Click The Toolbar 2. When it is in the right place release the mouse button.

6.1.2. Buttons
Any of the following functions can be carried out with a single click of the corresponding quick access button.

Note: Some of the buttons have more than one function within Card Access Manager.

Icon

Function
Left

Icon

Function
Right

Move up

Move down

OK

Cancel the current action

Go to the previous record

Go to the next record

Table 6-3. Card Access Manager Shortcut Buttons

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

391

Icon

Function
Go to the first record

Icon

Function
Go to the last record

Save

Delete the selection

Select

Close/ Reset

Expand the tree

Collapse the tree

Group the selection/ Check all/ Select all Search

Ungroup the selection/ UnCheck all/ De-select all Refresh

Create a new time zone

Replace a selected time zone

Create a new floor group

Edit the selection/ Modify selected floor group/ Edit filter

Select a site or site group

Preview a report

Temporary access

Table 6-3. Card Access Manager Shortcut Buttons (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

392

Access Control

6.2.

Configure Readers
To configure a reader you start with putting it on a site map and enter the minimum information of: location, which is the name given to the reader, example Front Door - Pacom Castle Hill

Note: In order to be able to use elevator readers they also have to be added to a site map.

6.3.

Holidays
Before creating time zones, the holidays must be setup. Setting up the holidays first will ensure that you can allocate time access to the holidays. 1. From the GMS main menu, select Setup > Holidays.... The Holiday Configuration window will appear.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

393

Figure 6-12. Holiday Configuration window 2. 3. Enter a description to the holiday in the Description text field i.e. Christmas Day. Set a date from the calendar. First select the month and year from the drop-down lists and then select the day. Tick the Same Every Year? box if this holiday occurs on the same date every year. Choose a Holiday Type. The holiday type determines the timezone that the holiday will use. You configure the Holiday Types later in the Time Zones... Page 394. For now, select any of the three types. Type 4 is currently unavailable and reserved for future expansion. Examples could be: Holiday Type 1 - 24 hrs night mode (user group would have to be authorized to enter premises during night mode), Holiday Type 2 - 9am to 17pm day mode (user group could be any normal day staff), Holiday Type 3 - 6am to 9 am day mode (user group could be cleaners).

4. 5.

Choose Holiday Profiles. The holiday profile determines the field controller that will accept the holiday. For example, a security system might have a geographical spread across different states or even countries. Some holidays may be common across and some others unique to a state. A

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

394

Access Control field controller accepts only one holiday profile. Refer to Initial RTU Config chapter in the Online Help, section Advanced Settings. However a holiday may be allocated multiple profiles. Holiday profiles help in managing holidays. Holidays common across multiple states, which would appear on different field controllers, are allocated multiple profiles. 6. Click Add to save the holiday you just configured.

Note: When you click Add, Update or Delete, the new holiday configuration will be downloaded to the field controllers.
7. To delete or update an existing holiday, highlight the relevant holiday in Configured Holidays and click either Update or Delete depending on the task you wish to perform.

6.4.

Time Zones
Use the Time Zones page to create, modify and delete time zones. Time zones consist of the hours when access is permitted to readers by cardholders. Time zones are associated with cardholders by the use of Reader Groups and Access Levels which are explained in sections Reader Groups... Page 400 and Access Levels... Page 412. The Time Zone Groups window is displayed by clicking the Time Zone Groups tab in the Card Access Manager window. This provides the means to create, edit, delete and report (preview, print, export) on time zones. Time zone define hours of the day that a cardholder can access controlled areas. When initially displayed this window is blank. Click New or press F3 to create a new time zone or edit the selected existing time zone. The left side of the window displays those time zones available for all sites. The time zone data is displayed graphically for each day in the center of the window for the selected time zone. The system will allow up to: a maximum of 3 split time periods per day 7 days plus 3 holiday times 255 different time zones

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

395

6.4.1. How to Create a New Time Zone


The time zones are referring to the time in the field controller. An example of such a time would be 08:00 to 17:00. When creating a time zone it is recommended to let the name reflect the geographical area the time zone is in.

Note: In a multi site system that span over several countries, states or geographical time zones, configure them so they do not affect each other.
Problem Office cleaning previously carried out by staff cleaners is now to be carried out by contract cleaners. Create a new time zone group allowing the contract cleaners access between 1800 and 2200 hrs. Monday to Friday.

Note: For this example it is assumed the contract cleaners have already been set up as cardholders and changes have been made to remove staff cleaner access.
Solution 1. Display the Card Access Manager screen by either: 2. Clicking the Card Access Manager button in the main window toolbar, or

Clicking the Card Access Manager option from the main window Setup menu.

Display the Time Zone Group Manager window by clicking the Time Zone tab.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

396

Access Control

Figure 6-13. Card Access Manager TimeZone Groups Window 3. Display the Time Zone Configuration window by clicking the new button pressing Ctrl + F3. or

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

397

Figure 6-14. Time Zone Manager Dialog Box 4. Type a new time zone number in the Time Zone No. text box or accept the number already shown.

Note: The next available number is shown in the Time Zone No. text box by default. If you choose to type a different number ensure it has not been previously allocated. To check for previously allocated numbers click on the drop-down list.
5. Type a new time zone name group name (Eg. Contract Cleaners) into the Time Zone Name box. It allows a maximum of 32 characters.

Note: Time zones are best named to described the type of time zone rather than describing the users to help with choice of time zones when creating Reader Groups. Eg. Day_Shift_07-16 or Christmas_DayShift_09-15.
6. Select a time list from the Time List drop-down list

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

398

Access Control

Figure 6-15. Time List Drop-Down List 7. and click Select to copy the time to Monday.

Figure 6-16. Select Icon

Note: This process will copy the start and end time for each of the 3 shifts.
8. 9. Click Select again to copy the time to each successive day. To copy individual Start and End times for a particular shift, click the start or end time (to be copied) and then click Copy Time of Selected Day end time (of the day/shift to paste to) and then click Paste . To paste, click in start or .

Note: The paste icon will be greyed out until there is something to paste.
10. Click OK to update.

6.4.2. How to Edit An Existing Time Zone


Note: You can partition time zones per operator so that some time zones cannot be changed by certain operators. See Operator Partitioning.
Problem

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

399

The contract cleaners have asked that their access hours be extended from 2200 hrs. to 2300 hrs. in order to complete required cleaning. Solution 1. Display the Card Access Manager screen by either: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Clicking the Card Access Manager button In the main GMS window click F9. in the main window toolbar, or

Clicking the Card Access Manager option from the main window Setup menu, or

Click the Time Zone tab. Select the Contract Cleaners group from Available Time Zones. Display the Time Zone Configuration window by clicking Edit or pressing F3.

Change the shift end time from 22:00 to 23:00 by typing 23:00 in End for Shift 1. Click OK to update the field controller.

6.4.3. How to Delete A Time Zone


Problem The contract cleaners have been terminated and the cleaning is again to be carried out by employed cleaning staff so the time zone group is to be deleted.

Note: For this example it is assumed cardholder access for the contract cleaners has already been removed and changes have been made to staff cleaner access.
Solution 1. Display the Card Access Manager screen by either: Clicking the Card Access Manager button In the main GMS window click F9. in the main window toolbar, or

Clicking the Card Access Manager option from the main window Setup menu, or

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

400

Access Control 2. 3. 4. Click the Time Zones tab. Select the Contract Cleaners group from Available Time Zones. Delete the Contract Cleaners group by clicking Delete or pressing F2.

Note: A dialog box will display warning you that deleting a group will affect those who are using it! Click Yes if sure to delete.

6.5.

Reader Groups
A Global Reader Group is simply a group of readers with associated time zones. A Reader Group can include any reader from any field controller. Ideally a reader should belong to only one Reader Group so that access control administration is uncomplicated. GMS allows the creation of up to 256 time zones and any one of these time zones can be applied to a reader and grouped into a Reader Group. There is no limit to the number of readers that can comprise a Reader Group. Global Reader Groups are typically grouped according to their physical location. In a multi-tenant application, for example, Reader Groups could be grouped as Car Parks, Elevators 1-4, Tenant 1 Doors, Tenant 4 doors, Common/Foyer/Entry Doors, Computer Room or similar. Use the Global Reader Group (GRG) page to group card readers and assign a time zone to each reader. By grouping readers and giving them meaningful names they are easier to setup and manage. A Reader Group is a combination of three things: a field controller number a card reader number (attached to the field controller) a time zone

Note: Reader groups should be named after the type of areas the readers are located in, rather than after the type of users.
There is no limit to the number of field controllers, card readers and time zones per Reader Group and there is no limit to the number of Reader Groups that can be created.

Note: Each reader should be mentioned only once in each group or it may create problems when creating Access Levels from these Reader Groups.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

401

When designing an installation, start with the smallest unit, which is the reader. Identify where the readers are located at the site and when configured (via the site map) look at the physical site and see what entrances you want to create. The Global Reader Group page is displayed by clicking the Global Reader Group tab in the Card Access Manager window.

Figure 6-17. Global Reader Group Window When Global Reader Group is initially selected a Site Group will not be displayed. Site 1 (field controller 1) will be displayed.

6.5.1. How to Create A Reader Group


Note: Prerequisites - you must have put reader icons on a GMS map and entered the reader location.
To create a Reader Group, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

402

Access Control 1. From the Reader Group page of the Card Access Manager window click the Select Site icon . Select a Site or Site Group and click OK. In this case, the head office field controllers are in a site group and are numbered 8600 - 8603.

Figure 6-18. Select Site(s) Window The readers will be displayed on the left hand section of the page under Site Readers.

Note: Preferably do not pick All Sites 1-10,000 since this will cause delays in retrieving the information.

Figure 6-19. Readers Attached to Sites 1 - 4. Site 1 has seven readers consisting of: front door

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide back door accounts executive marketing administration sales

403

Note: The term site refers to the field controller so site 1 is field controller 1.
Site 2 has two readers consisting of: main entrance public entrance.

Site 4 has five unspecified readers. There are no readers configured for site 3.

Note: Site map and card access are tightly linked. If the site map has not been configured correctly you will not be able to create the Reader Group and Access Levels.

2.

Select site number 3 from the drop-down Site list and click Edit Site... the Map Editor.

to display

Figure 6-20. Select Site-3 3. Add the following three readers to the site map: Accounts main entrance Marketing main entrance Sales main entrance

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

404

Access Control

Note: The reader name is equivalent to the reader location and the Site Map is the only place that it can be edited.
4. Add a door as well if you wish to be able to see the door status.

Figure 6-21. The Three Readers Added to The Site Map 5. Save and close the site map. and the new readers will be displayed under Sites Readers.

Click Refresh

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

405

Figure 6-22. The Three New Readers Are Added

6.5.2. How to Add More Reader Groups


There is one existing Reader Group called Head Office Entrance which consists of site 1 front door and site 2 main entrance, which most people would have access to. The task is to build a Reader Group for a certain area, e.g. the marketing department. To add another Reader Group, proceed as follows. 1. In the Available Global Reader Groups drop-down list box delete the existing name and type Marketing Entrance. Alternatively highlight existing name and type over it.

Figure 6-23. Type in Marketing Entrance

Note: Upper case is default in this box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

406

Access Control

2.

Delete all existing readers in Configuration by clicking Select All Remove .

and then

3.

Select the Marketing main entrance reader from the Site Group area and click Add . This reader will be copied to the Configuration area.

Figure 6-24. Marketing Main Entrance Reader 4. Click Save. A message will be displayed asking if you want to create a new Reader Group. Click Yes if you are sure. Otherwise click No or Cancel to review.

Figure 6-25. Reader Group Save Dialog Box

Note: An Access Level cannot be saved until readers (at least one) have been added to the Configuration area.
5. Another dialog may display asking if you want to create a Global Access Group. This will not appear if a system parameter called Disable Auto Creation of GAG from GRG is checked. Table 3-3, System Parameters Configuration > Access Control Tab, page 29.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

407

Figure 6-26. Would You Like To Create Global Access Group From This GRG? This procedure is continued at How to Create An Access Level... Page 414

Note: An Access Level can be created now or later. If an Access Level is created now from this Reader Group it will only have access to the marketing entrance. As the cardholder would also require main entrance access (at the least) the Access Level would need to be modified as only one Access Level per cardholder is allowed.

6.5.3. Assigning Access to Cardholders


6.5.3.1. Card Status
The card status provides the current status and control of the access card held by this user, Valid is the default setting. It allows the operator to change from Valid (card operational) to that of Blocked, Expired, Traced, Inactive, Stolen, Lost or Replaced.

Note: Some of the following states it is sometimes recommended not to change manually e.g. Replaced, Expired i.e. GMS will automatically change this.
Cards marked as Blocked, Inactive, Lost, Replaced or Stolen will all report as Blocked when used.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

408

Access Control

Parameter
Blocked

Description
The card is Blocked and cannot be used to enter sites. When a Blocked card is swiped, a Blocked Card message is sent to the system and displayed in the Transaction Manager window. The card is Expired and cannot be used to enter sites. This will automatically be displayed after the expiry date of the card.

Expired

Note: To automatically expire cards there must be a system task that checks for expired cards running.
Inactive Lost Replaced Stolen Traced Valid Clear In/Out Status The card is Inactive and cannot be used to enter sites. The card has been reported Lost and cannot be used to enter sites. The original card has been replaced. The replacement card may be used to enter those sites it has been programmed to access. The card has been reported Stolen and cannot be used to enter sites. The card will be reported as an event and can be traced in Events Manager and the Card Transaction Manager. The card is Valid and may be used to enter those sites it has been programmed to access. Used to reset anti-passback on a card. If an alarm is generated to a person having passed their card back to someone, then it is possible to clear this and allow the person in. This could happen if someone could not swipe when leaving an area and try to get back in.

Table 6-4. Card Status Descriptions

Note: The original card will now have a status of valid.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

409

6.5.3.2.

How to Replace A Card


Problem A lost (misplaced) card needs to be replaced.

Note: For this example it is assumed the card in question is displayed in the search window. For details on how to search for a card please refer to Search... Page 487.
Solution 1. Display the Card Access Manager screen by either: Clicking the Card Access Manager button In the main GMS window click F9. in the main window toolbar, or

Clicking the Card Access Manager option from the main window Setup menu, or

Note:Click
the Cardholders tab. 2. 3. 4. Click the Card Details tab. Click Replace. Type the users new Card No and Printed No.

Note: The Card No and Printed No are the minimum required for this page.
5. Click Save or press F4.

Note: When saving the replacement card a message is sent to all sites blocking the original card so the original card now has a status of replaced and even if it is located it cannot be used for access.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

410
6.5.3.3.

Access Control

How to Assign A Temporary Access Level


You can provide an existing card with extra access for a restricted period of time. To create temporary access, proceed as follows. 1. Go to Card Access Manager > Cardholders and select the cardholder you wish to give temporary access. With correct cardholder displayed go to Access Level > Temporary Access tab. Set the start and end date of the temporary access in the Start Date and End Date text fields. Easiest way of doing this is to right-click in the text field to display the Calendar dialog box, click on desired date and click OK.

2. 3.

Figure 6-27. Calendar Dialog Box 4. Choose an access group for the temporary access from either the drop-down list under Available Global Access Group or by using the search function choose one access group. 5. Click Assign Current Selected Reader Access in Available Global Access Group. . You can only

to select the access group displayed

6.

You can add just a single reader for temporary access or add a reader to the previously chosen access group. Click Add Readers... to open the Add Readers... window. Highlight one or more readers from the desired site. You can also choose availability from any of the existing time zones. You need to choose the same time zone for the selected reader(s) as the access group you may already have chosen.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7. You can add a group of readers for temporary access or add a group of readers to the

411

previously chosen access group or single reader(s). Click Select GRG... to open a window displaying all Reader Groups. Highlight one or more Reader Groups and click Select to make available for temporary access. If you select several Reader Groups they need to have the same time zones assigned as each other. 8. If you have added readers and/or Reader Groups to an existing access group, or created a new set out of readers and/or Reader Groups, enter a new name for this set in the Available Global Access Group, click entirely new group. to save and click New for saving as an

Note: It is recommended to save the changes as a new access group because if you click Update to update the current access group, the changes will affect every card that has been assigned to this access group.
9. If the temporary access needs to be assigned floor access you can choose a floor access template from either the drop-down list under Available Floor Access Templates or by using the search function 10. . You can only choose one floor access template. to select the floor access template

Click Assign Current Selected Floor Access displayed in Available Floor Access Templates.

11.

You can add just a single Floor Access Level for temporary access or add a Floor Access Level to the previously chosen template. Click Add Floor Access... . Highlight one or more Floor Access Levels from the desired site. Click Select to add the Floor Access Level(s) to the temporary access.

12.

When you have added the desired readers and/or Floor Access Levels, click Save to assign the card this temporary access.

6.5.3.4.
6.5.3.4.1.

Modify a Cardholders Access Permission


How to Designate A Cardholder As Escort Capable
To designate a cardholder as escort capable, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

412

Access Control 1. 2. 3. 4. Go to the Card Access Manager and click on the Cardholders tab. Open the Card Details tab. Check Escort Capable in the USER FLAGS area. Click Save or press F4.

6.5.3.4.2.

How to Change The Status of A Card


If for example a card has been misplaced by the cardholder the status needs to be changed to Lost. Proceed as follows. 1. Display the Card Access Manager screen by either: 2. 3. 4. 5. Clicking the Card Access Manager button in the main window toolbar, or Clicking the Card Access Manager option from the main window Setup menu.

Display the Cardholders window by clicking the Cardholders tab. Click the Personal tab. Click Lost in the Card Status list box. Click Save or press F4.

Note: If the card is found the status can again be set to Valid assuming the card has not been replaced. If the card is not located within a reasonable amount of time it needs to be replaced.

6.6.

Access Levels
An Access Level is simply put a collection of Reader Groups. An Access Level enables GMS operators to assign a large number of access control permissions to one or more cardholders in a simple one-step process. Access Levels can be bulk updated, which means that any modification of an Access Level's Reader Groups (including time zones) will be automatically distributed/downloaded to all appropriate cardholders.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

413

An Access Level is typically named according to a specific group of users: e.g. Cleaner Doors, Tenant 1, Facility Manager etc. For instance, a person who works for tenant 1 could be assigned an Access Level called Tenant 1 that comprised Reader Groups called Common/ Foyer/Entry Doors, Tenant 1 Doors, Elevators 1-4 and Car Parks. Only one Access Level template or Global Access Group can be assigned per cardholder. This largely depends on the method of administering card access permissions. Choose How to Administer Access Permissions... Page 431. This should not be seen as a limitation because an Access Level can have any number of Reader Groups and a Reader Group can have any number of readers. The concept of creating the Reader Group is to identify what the physical entities of a company are. Access Level records are converted from the cardholder Access Levels of older GMS versions during installation. If your GMS setup is new, you need to create the records yourself. The Access Level page is displayed in Card Access Manager > Global Access Group.

Figure 6-28. Global Access Group Page

Note: Access Levels can be user defined and will then change name universally within GMS. Go to GMS main menu > Setup > User Defined Words to customize.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

414

Access Control Before you can create an Access Level, you have to have Reader Groups in the list. It means you have to create Reader Groups before you can create Access Level. An Access Level is simply a collection of Reader Groups.

Note: You cannot modify or create a new Reader Group on this page. It must be performed on the Global Reader Group (GRG) page.

6.6.1. How to Create An Access Level


To create a new Access Level called Marketing Area Access, proceed as follows. 1. Type Marketing Area Access into the Available Global Access Groups drop-down list box and click Save . A dialog box will be displayed asking if you want to save this Access Level as new. It is important here that the selected Reader Groups under Configuration have changed from what was selected for the Access Group initially in Available Global Access Groups drop-down list or it will change that name to Marketing Area Access.

Note: If you are continuing from How to Create A Reader Group... Page 401 go to step 2.

Figure 6-29. Save As New? 2. 3. Click New. The New Global Access Group dialog box is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

415

Figure 6-30. Marketing Entrance 4. In this case do not create a Marketing Entrance Access Level. Instead rename the Access Level as Marketing area access and click OK.

Figure 6-31. New Access Level Called Marketing Area Access Now create another Access Level called Accounts Entrance. 5. 6. Type Accounts Entrance in the Available Global Reader Groups drop-down list box. Select the Accounts main entrance reader from the Site Group area and click Add. This reader will be copied to the Configuration area. Click Save. A message will be displayed asking if you want to create a new Reader Group. Click Yes and the New Global Access Group dialog box will be displayed. Rename Accounts Entrance as Accounts Area Access and then click OK to save the Access Level.

7.

8.

As the Marketing Entrance Reader Group only has access to the marketing area and will need access to the main entrance. 9. Select Marketing Entrance in the Available Global Reader Groups drop-down list box. Select Head Office Entrance from the Available Global Reader Groups and click Add to copy it to the Configuration area. Click Save.

10.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

416

Access Control

Figure 6-32. Head Office Entrance Added to The Marketing Entrance Reader Group As the Accounts Entrance Reader Group only has access to the marketing area and will need access to the main entrance. 11. 12. Select Accounts Entrance in the Available Global Reader Groups drop-down list box. Select Head Office Entrance from the Available Global Reader Groups and click Add to copy it to the Configuration area. Click Save.

Figure 6-33. Head Office Entrance Added to The Accounts Entrance Reader Group

Note: GMS checks for conflicting time zones associated with the same reader.

6.7.

Floor Access Levels


The Floor Access Level page enables operators to give cardholders access to the floors using elevators. Floors have nothing to do with site maps or readers.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide From GMS version 3 and on, there are no more Reader Groups but floor groups instead. The Floor Access Level group manager is similar to the manager of MAL groups from previous versions and is site dependant. That is why it is not referred to as global.

417

When saved, GMS will download the Floor Access Level to the Reader Group. Every Reader Group supports up to 128 floors.

Figure 6-34. Floor Access Levels

Note: Floor Access Level is site dependent which means you have to select the site(s) before configuring the Floor Access Level.

6.7.1. How to Setup A Floor Access Level


To setup a Floor Access Level, proceed as follows. 1. Click Select Site... to display the Select Site(s) dialog box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

418

Access Control

Figure 6-35. Select Site(s) Dialog Box 2. 3. Enter a single site or select a group from the drop-down list. After selection, click OK and the selected site(s) will be displayed in the Available Floor Access Levels section.

Figure 6-36. Available Floor Access Levels

Note: Expanding any site item may not show anything under the item if no Floor Access Level has been configured for this site.
4. If you want to edit an existing Floor Access Level or create a new Floor Access Level for this site click Edit to display the Floor Access Level Manager page.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

419

Figure 6-37. Floor Access Level Manager Page

Note: The caption of the window will tell you which site you have chosen for editing.
5. Click either New Floor Group... or Modify Selected Floor Group... to display the Floor Group Manager dialog box. From here you create a new floor group or modify an existing floor group.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

420

Access Control

Figure 6-38. Floor Group Manager 6. Associate floors with a group by clicking the check box.

Note: Left click on the name of a floor to change it.


7. Click OK to save and the new or modified floor group will appear under Available Floor Groups.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

421

Figure 6-39. Available Floor Groups 8. Select any of the available floor groups and assign it to the Manager section by clicking Add.

Figure 6-40. Available Floor Added to Manager Section

Note: The Floor Access Level Manager window accepts a maximum of 64 floor groups.
9. Click Save.

6.8.

Parameters
In the Card Access Manager window click the Parameters tab to display Parameters.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

422

Access Control

Figure 6-41. Parameters Page This provides the operator with a means to download specific data from the database. An example of this would be if a Reader Group was replaced in the field.

6.8.1. How to Download Parameters


To download data, proceed as follows. 1. Either type a Site No. or click Use Site Groups to select a group.

Note: Only one option can be selected. The other option will be unavailable.
2. Choose a parameter to download specific information to the database. The Parameters Page-1 tab will alter for each selection and are detailed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide


-

423

Parameter
Card(s) Data Time Zone(s) FAL(s) Block Card(s)

Description
Enter Range (to and from), Issue No and Facility Code. Click Download. Enter Range (to and from). If you wish them to be downloaded to all sites check Download to all Sites. Click Download. Enter Range (to and from). Click Download to get the FALs for the chosen group of sites. Enter Range (to and from), Issue No and Facility Code. If you wish them to be downloaded to all sites check Download to all Sites. Click Download. Enter Range (to and from), Issue No and Facility Code. If you wish them to be downloaded to all sites check Download to all Sites. Click Download. Enter Range (to and from), Issue No and Facility Code. If you wish them to be downloaded to all sites check Download to all Sites. Click Download. Enter Range (to and from), Issue No and Facility Code. If you wish them to be downloaded to all sites check Download to all Sites. Click Download. Enter Card, Issue No and Facility Code to delete that card from the database. If you wish this information to be downloaded to all sites check Download to all Sites. Click Download. Tick the Cards, Floor Groups and/or Time zones box and click Download to delete the database of cards, floor groups or time zones. Click Download to download the entire database. Select this checkbox to use the old method of downloading cards.

Unblock Card(s)

Expire Card(s)

Unexpire Card(s)

Delete a Card

Delete Entire Database

Download Entire Database Use Non-Streaming D/ L?

Table 6-5. Parameters Window Descriptions 3. To detail further, in the Page-1 tab enter range and/or Issue No and Facility Code.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

424

Access Control 4. As you click Download messages will display in the Page-1 tab to inform you of the download progress: a) Creating Card Download file. Please Wait... b) Starting Card Download... c) Card Download done... 5. The list of active downloads is displayed in the Page-2 tab.

Figure 6-42. Parameters Page-2 Tab

6.9.

Cardholder Management
Use Cardholders to create, modify and delete all aspects of cardholders access. There are six pages to select within Cardholders: The Personal page contains name, address, phone, card status information. The Card Details page contains various card numbers, card and user type, user flags and validity dates. The Access Level page is where cardholder access is assigned. The User Defined 1 page has seven text boxes that can be setup to suit the operations of different companies. The User Defined 2 page has further information on the location and physical appearance of the cardholder. The User Defined 3 page is a free form text area.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

425

Note: The User Defined pages can be modified to suit the requirements of the customer.
All pages can display a cardholder photo and sample signature. The Cardholders window is displayed by clicking the Cardholders tab in the Card Access Manager window or by clicking the Cardholders button on the toolbar.

Figure 6-43. Card Access Manager Cardholders Tab This provides the operator with a means to create, edit, delete and report on cardholders. The Personal page is displayed by default.

Note: CTRL+PAGE UP (or PAGE DOWN) will cycle through all Cardholders pages without having to click each tab.
A photograph of the cardholder is displayed on right side of all Cardholder pages along with the following information:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

426

Access Control The Card No. displayed under the cardholders photograph is comprised of the Card No/Issue No/Facility Code. the last site accessed by the cardholder along with the reader and time of that access. the GMS operator that last modified the card along with the date and time of the modification.

6.9.1. Personal
The Personal page is where primary details are typed into the system to create a new cardholder. A photograph of the cardholder is displayed on right side of this page along with a summary of the site last accessed, which reader and what time. Also detailed is the GMS operator that modified the card details, along with the date and time of the modification. The card status is an important feature of this page, see Card Status... Page 407. The Personal page is displayed by clicking the Personal tab on the Cardholders page and is displayed as the first page by default. This provides the operator with a means to record the cardholders primary details into the database.

Figure 6-44. Cardholders > Personal Page The First and Last Name is the minimum entry on the page and must be completed prior to proceeding to the card details page.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

427

Note: If you proceed without typing a name the message Text is too short! At least 1 character, will be displayed.

6.9.2. Card Details


The Card Details page allows the operator to program the card details for the cardholder into the system. The minimum entries on this page are, Card No. (Encoded), Issue No. and Facility Code. These 3 text boxes are determined by the programming of the access card. The user flags determine the conditions under which the card may be used (e.g. escort capable). The Card Details page is displayed by clicking the Card Details tab on the Cardholders page.

Figure 6-45. Cardholders > Card Details Page

Note: The complete card number consists of the Card No (Encoded), Issue No and Facility Code. It is divided into these three codes to simplify card group extensions, or even exchanging a whole batch of cards. This could be useful if the cards are getting old and the information is worn without having to assign the cardholder a new card number to remember.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

428

Access Control

Parameter
Card No (Encoded)

Description
The Card No is the first part of the complete card number and is the part the cardholder may be required to remember. The Card No allows a maximum of ten digits. GMS generates the Printed No, which is the first available unique code in sequence. Example, if numbers 1-10 have previously been assigned to cards but number 4 and 7 have been cancelled or expired etc., the Printed No will be 4 since it is the first available unique code in sequence. The Issue No is the second part of the complete card number. It will typically be the same for a whole batch of cards belonging to the same client. This is useful if a batch of cards needs to be reissued due to for example being worn, or a new logotype have been introduced. Example: If the Card No is 3456, and the Issue No is 0, the re-issued batch will give this same cardholder a card with Card No 3456 but the Issue No will be 1. Min = 1, max = 10 numerical characters.

Printed No

Issue No

Facility Code

The Facility Code is the third part of the complete card number. It can be the same for a large batch of cards, a large customer with many cardholders may have several Facility Codes to separate, for instance, departments. The Facility Code allows a maximum of 5 digits up to 65335.

PIN

The PIN is required for doors configured for both card and PIN operation. The amount of digits for the card PIN required is set in the Logon Tab... Page 23. Min = 1, max = 8 numerical characters.

Duress PIN

If a cardholder is being forced to use their PIN to enter a restricted area they can instead of using his normal PIN use the duress PIN. This will send an alarm to the operator showing that someone has made their way in by forcing a cardholder to let them in.

Table 6-6. Card Details Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

429

Parameter
Card Type

Description
Select a Card Type from the drop-down list. This is used in conjunction with default option. When Card Default Options are programmed into the system they are assigned a Card Type for identification. This helps speed up the programming process by configuring card types with certain flags and access.

User Type Card Usage Count

Allows mode changes in the Reader Group on readers with mode changes selected. Setting for how many times a card can be used before it expires. Some cardholders may be restricted to enter a certain area more than a number of times during the card validity period.

User Flags Dual User Control Extended Shunt/Strike Time If a reader is programmed as Dual User, two cardholders with this flag selected are required to enter this secured area. When selected this flag allows the cardholder an extended time to pass through a door. Typically used for cardholders who require additional time to pass through a door. e.g. users in wheelchairs or employees pushing large trolleys. This time is programmed in the Card Access Configuration under the I/O Parameters tab. Add Last Code Byte to PIN Adds the last digit of the Card No to the beginning of the PIN. This is not valid for operation with PINs greater than 4 digits. Example: if the Card No is 123 and the PIN is 1234 the flag Add Last Code Byte to PIN will create the PIN 31234. Use PIN to Access Selection of this flag allows the cardholder to use a PIN to pass through a door if there is a keypad linked to the reader as well as a card. This can be configured to require both PIN and card. Provides this cardholder supervisor rights for areas requiring a supervisor. Provides the cardholder access rights to any area. The holder of a card with this flag selected is capable of escorting a user with the Escort Required flag selected.

Supervisor Operation Executive Operation Escort Capable

Table 6-6. Card Details Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

430

Access Control

Parameter
Escort Required Permanent User Store Code for Degraded Mode

Description
The holder of a card with this flag selected requires a user with the Escort Capable flag selected. This cardholder will not be removed from the Reader Groups database because of no activity. When checked, this cardholders card number will be stored in the Pacom Card Reader Interface (1064). This is only available to customers with the new release of the 1064 CRI. (1064-002). For more information please refer to the Field Controller Configuration Guide.

Card Validity Valid From (dd/mm/ yyyy) If you enter a date greater than todays date, it will not be downloaded. You will need to run a System Task called Check and Update Inactive cards to make it work.

Note: Right-click in the text field to open a calendar to allow the system to enter the date in correct format.
Valid To (dd/mm/yyyy) This is the date the card is valid until. This text box cannot be left blank. If a zero (0) is entered the card will remain active.

Table 6-6. Card Details Parameters (continued) The minimum entries on this window are Card No. (Encoded), Issue No. and Facility Code. These three text boxes are determined by the programming of the access card. The user flags determine the conditions under which the card may be used (rights of the cardholder).

6.9.3. Access Level


The Access Level page allows the operator to add and remove access rights of the cardholder. Each cardholder can be assigned one Access Level, one Floor Group and one Temporary Access Group (TAG). Each Access Level can have a different Reader Group or range of field controllers (1 to 10,000). The Access Level tab is displayed by clicking the Access Level tab on the Cardholders page. This provides the operator with a means to add and remove access rights of the cardholder.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

431

6.9.3.1.

Choose How to Administer Access Permissions


GMS V3.5x allows greater flexibility in the way in which access permissions can be administered. Access control can be administered via the following methods: Assigning multiple (Global) Reader Groups directly to a cardholder Assigning a single Global Access Group directly to a cardholder Assigning an Access Template directly to a cardholder Assigning an individual reader and timezone to a cardholder

The look and feel of the Access Level page can be customized to suit the method of administration. From the View menu in the Card Access Manager, there are two options that can be selected to change the display of the screen:

Figure 6-46. Access Level View Options

6.9.3.1.1.

Card Access Administration by assigning Reader Groups and individual readers to a cardholder
If Global Access Groups (GAGs) and Access Level templates are not intended to be used, it is recommended that the two View menu items are not checked.

Figure 6-47. Access Level Page View Customization options The Access Level tab will look similar to the following:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

432

Access Control

Figure 6-48. Standard Reader Access Display You can also change the display of the Selected Reader Access that appears on the right pane by clicking the button. The display will change to show the access details in a column rather than a tree format.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

433

Figure 6-49. Alternative Reader Access Display An unlimited number of (Global) Reader Groups can be added to a cardholder. This is done by simply selecting a existing GRG from the Available GRGs list and clicking the Selected Reader Access list. to move it to

6.9.3.1.2.

Add an Individual Reader


In some cases, there may be instances where an individual reader needs to be added to a cardholders access permissions. Although the recommended method is to update the (Global) Reader Group, GMS allows special access permissions to be defined. 1. Open the cardholder record that you wish add special permissions to, and go to the Access Level tab.

2.

Click the button which is located directly beneath the Add/Remove (arrow) icons. The following screen will display:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

434

Access Control

Figure 6-50. Adding A Reader Dialog 3. 4. Select the desired reader and time zone and click OK. The reader will be added and appear in the Selected Reader Access list:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

435

Figure 6-51. Reader Access Display With Individual Reader

Note: If you attempt to add an individual reader and timezone which is identical to a existing GRG configuration, GMS will identify that the permissions are the same and simply add the GRG.

6.9.3.1.3.

Using Access Templates for Access Control Administration


Access Level templates can improved the operational task of assigning consistent access permissions to groups of cardholders. To display the Access Level template option, select the respective menu item from the View menu.

Figure 6-52. Access Level Page View Customization Options The Access Level page will look similar to the following:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

436

Access Control

Figure 6-53. Reader Access Display With Access Level Templates If reader permissions have already been saved to specific cardholders, it is likely that GMS may have already created some Access Level templates. They will be prefixed with RAT - standing for Reader Access Template. If you wish to rename these, you are required to click the delete icon to the right of the template name, enter a new name and click the save icon. To use Access Level templates to assign access permissions to cardholder in a simple action, follow the following steps: 1. 2. Open the cardholder record that you wish to grant access permissions Go to the Access Level tab and select the Access Level templates that matches this cardholders role Click the assign icon .

3. 4.

If you are modifying an existing cardholder, you will be asked whether you are sure you wish to replace the permissions with those from the template:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

437

Figure 6-54. Replace Permissions Prompt 5. The Reader Groups will appear in the Selected list. Save the cardholder record and click Download for them to take effect.

6.9.3.1.4.

Using Global Access Group (GAGs) for Access Control Administration


If Global Access Groups (GAGs) and Access Level templates are intended to be used, it is recommended that the two View menu items are checked.

Figure 6-55. Access Level View Options The screen will change accordingly:

Figure 6-56. Reader Access Display with GAGs And Access Level Templates

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

438

Access Control As with Access Level templates, GMS may have already created some GAGs based on the access permission already assigned to existing cardholders. These can be re-named by going to the Global Access Group (GAG) tab. To use GAGs to assign access permissions to cardholder in a simple action, follow the following steps: 1. 2. Open the cardholder record that you wish to grant access permissions Go to the Access Level tab and select the a GAG from the Available Global Access Groups drop-down that matches this carholders role Click the assign icon .

3. 4.

The Reader Groups will appear in the Selected Reader Access list. Save the cardholder record and Download for them to take effect.

6.9.3.2.

Floor Access
This screen allows you to assign Floor Access Levels to the card holder.

Note: Only one Floor Access Level per site can be assigned to a cardholder. Refer to How to Setup A Floor Access Level... Page 417 for details about how to group floors.

Figure 6-57. Floor Access Display

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

439

6.9.3.3.

Temporary Access
Temporary access is typically used to grant access to readers and/or floors for a limited time period. The maximum length of time that you can assign temporary access is 12 months. Temporary access can apply to either an individual reader, a (Global) Reader Group, a Global Access Group or a Floor Access Template.

Figure 6-58. Temporary Access Display

6.9.4. User Defined 1 Window


The User Defined 1 page allows the operator to type additional access information. The User Defined 2 page allows the operator to enter specific information about the cardholder (e.g. parking sticker and eye color). The User Defined 3 page allows the operator to type any additional comments or information about the cardholder in a free form text area. The User Defined 1 page is displayed by clicking the User Defined 1 tab on the Cardholders page. This page provides the operator with a means to type card details for this user into the system.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

440

Access Control

Figure 6-59. The User Defined 1 Page


The CDF Filename drop-down list allows the operator to select a card layout for the user. All other text boxes on this window are operator defined and may be used to enter specific information about the user.

Note: The user defined text boxes are listed in the card access strings file.

6.9.5. User Defined 2 Window


The User Defined 2 page is displayed by clicking the User Defined 2 tab on the Cardholders page. This page provides the operator with a means to type additional card details for this cardholder.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

441

Figure 6-60. Cardholders Page > User Defined 2 The names of the fields in the User Defined 2 tab can be customized. Customize Cardholder Pages... Page 531

Fields
Division Branch Parking Sticker Area BSB Eye Color Pager No

Examples
Eg.Sales Eg.International Eg. 4746 Eg. MA10 Eg. 321-654 Eg. Brown Eg. 1231 999123

Table 6-7. Card Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

442

Access Control

6.9.6. User Defined 3 Window


The User Defined 3 page is displayed by clicking the User Defined 3 tab on the Cardholders page. This page provides the operator with a means to type additional comments or information about the cardholder in a free form text area.

Figure 6-61. The User Defined 3 Page

6.9.7. How to Rename A User Defined Field


Warning: Never directly edit a system file in the Windows Notepad application. GMS may fail to work properly or at all. You must use the Edit System Data Files option within GMS.
GMS operators with the required level of access can rename certain labels within GMS to make them more meaningful. In the following example we are going to rename the User Defined Field-2 to St John Ambulance. Operators can then enter any first aid courses the cardholder may have completed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

443

Figure 6-62. User Defined Field-2 To customize text box labels, proceed as follows. 1. From the File menu on the main GMS window, click System Data Files. The Edit System Data Files list box will be displayed.

Figure 6-63. Edit System Data Files Dialog Box 2. Click the file containing the name you want to change. In this case we are going to change the name of User Defined Field-2 so click Card access/Visitor User defined Text.

Figure 6-64. Click Card Access/Visitor User Defined Text

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

444

Access Control 3. Click OK and the Card access/Visitor User defined Text file will be opened in an editor window.

Figure 6-65. Card Access/Visitor User Defined Text Window 4. Click the mouse cursor between the full stop and the U on the 1.User Defined Field-2 line.

Figure 6-66. User Defined Field-2 Line 5. Type in St John Ambulance.

Figure 6-67. Type In Your Choice of Name For The Field 6. Delete the words User Defined Field-2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

445

Figure 6-68. Delete The Words User Defined Field-2

Warning: Never remove any lines from this (or any other) system file. GMS may fail to work properly or at all.
7. From the File menu click Save.

Figure 6-69. File Menu > Save, to Save User Defined Fields 8. 9. From the File menu click Close. Open the Card Access Manager. Select the Cardholders tab and select the User Defined 1 page. You will see that the User Defined Field-2 now says St John Ambulance.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

446

Access Control

Figure 6-70. The User Defined Field-2 Now Says St John Ambulance

6.9.8. How to Create A New Cardholder Record


Problem A Department Manager is sending you a new staff member to have a cardholder record created. Solution 1. Display the Card Access Manager screen by either: 2. 3. 4. Clicking the Card Access Manager button in the main window toolbar, or Clicking the Card Access Manager option from the main window Setup menu.

Display the Cardholders window by clicking the Cardholders tab. Click New to create a new record. The Personal page is displayed by default. Type in the users last and first name and the relevant information.

Note: The Last Name is the minimum required for this page.
5. 6. Click the Card Details tab. Type in the users Card No and Printed No, Issue No and Facility Code.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

447

Note: The Card No and Printed No are the minimum required for this page and the Card No, Issue No and Facility Code must match the card.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Click the Access Level tab to display the Access Level page. Click on the Access Level Templates drop-down list box. Click the correct template for this cardholder. Click << Assign and the chosen template will appear under ACCESS LEVEL(s). Click and type any information required for User Defined 1, 2 and 3. Click Save or press F4.

Note: A dialog box with the message Do you want to download this card data? will be displayed. Click Yes to save and download this record or No to save without downloading.

6.9.9. Cardholder Common Buttons


These buttons are common to all Cardholder pages.

Button
New Delete Re-Issue

Description
Click New to create a new cardholder record Click Delete to remove the displayed cardholder from the system in to the deleted card database. Click to re-issue a card with the same details as the open card. The details from the card used as a template are copied into the re-issued card. Only Card No needs to be typed in. Printed No is automatically generated as is Valid From and Valid To dates that receive the current days date.

Table 6-8. Cardholder Page Buttons

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

448

Access Control

Button
Copy Replace Issue Temporary Preview Block All Locate Badge Download Save

Description
Click Copy to create a new cardholder based on the displayed cardholder Click Replace to create a replacement card and block the old card Click to issue a temporary card when for example the cardholder have forgotten the original card. Click Preview to generate a Cardholder Details report. Blocks all the cards issued to the current cardholder. Click Locate to locate a cardholder using this search function Click Badge to create, preview and print a badge for a cardholder. Click Download to download this cardholders data to the system database. Click Save to save the data associated with the displayed cardholder.

Table 6-8. Cardholder Page Buttons (continued)

6.9.10. Issue a Temporary Card


An operator can issue a temporary card when for example a cardholder forgets to bring their access card to the office. GMS can then assign a temporary access card from the existing master card details. GMS will then automatically block the cardholders original card and automatically un-block it again when the temporary access has been deleted (or the card validity or time zone have expired). The temporary card is automatically deleted when its validity expires A temporary card can be manually deleted if it is returned early. Just click Return Temporary , which deletes the temporary card and enables the original card automatically. This button is only visible when viewing a temporary card.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

449

If you delete a master card the associated temporary card (if any) is automatically deleted at the same time. The temporary card can be either active or inactive at the time. Similarly, any changes to card details in the master card will be instantly reflected in its temporary card, and vice versa. If a cardholder loses his/her card or if they believe it is stolen, the operator should use the Replace function instead. How to Replace A Card... Page 409.

Note: Only one temporary card can exist for one given master card at any time. Temporary cards can also only be issued to a normal card and not for another temporary card.
To assign a Temporary Access Level, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a cardholder to assign the temporary access against using the search page. Click Issue Temporary .

Enter a new card number in the Card No (Encoded) text box. Click the Access Level tab to display the Access Level page. Open the Temporary Access tab. Select Start Date and End Date by right-clicking once on the text field so the calendar is displayed.

5.

Figure 6-71. Calendar 6. Choose date by clicking on the date and choose month and year from the appropriate drop-down lists.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

450

Access Control 7. 8. 9. 10. Click OK. Select the required Global Access Group. Click Save. A dialog will display asking if you want to download the card. Click Yes or No.

GMS will replace the original card with the temporary card for the requested period of time and blocks the original card.

Figure 6-72. The Original Card Is Blocked

6.9.11. Re-Issue A Card


To re-issue a card means creating another card for an existing cardholder by inheriting the cardholders current details. This is useful if a card needs to be re-issued due to for example being worn, or a new logotype have been introduced. Any number of re-issued cards can be created for a cardholder. These cards, associated with the same cardholder, are referred to as linked. Changing cardholder details of any of the linked cards is immediately reflected in all other linked cards. And any or even all of the linked cards can have an associated temporary card issued. Deleting a re-issued card results in deleting a temporary card (if any) associated with that particular card. It wont affect temporary cards associated with other cards linked to the one been deleted. To re-issue a card proceed as follows. 1. In Card Access Manager > Cardholders tab, click Re-Issue to re-issue a card with the same details as the open card. The details, including Access Levels, from the card used as a template are copied into the re-issued card. Card No needs to be typed in. Printed No is automatically generated as is Valid From and Valid To dates that receive the current day's date.

2.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4. Click Save.

451

6.9.12. Card Type Templates


The card type templates speed up the programming of new cards by configuring card types with certain parameters that will be inserted automatically in a new card when choosing this card type template. To create or modify a card template, proceed as follows. 1. In the Card Access Manager window go to Setup and select Card Type Templates... to open the Card Type Templates window.

Figure 6-73. Card Access Manager > Card Type Template > General Tab

Parameters
Card Types

Descriptions
This helps speed up the programming process by configuring card types with certain flags and access. You can rename the default names and add another card type.

Table 6-9. Card Type Template > General Tab Parameters

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

452

Access Control

Parameters
Issue No.

Descriptions
The Issue No. is the second part of the complete card number. It will typically be the same for a whole batch of cards belonging to the same client. This is useful if a batch of cards needs to be reissued due to for example being worn, or a new logotype have been introduced. Example: If the Card No. is 3456, and the Issue No. is 0, the re-issued batch will give this same cardholder a card with Card No. 3456 but the Issue No. will be 1. Min = 1 numerical character.

Facility Code

The Facility Code is the third part of the complete card number. It can be the same for a large batch of cards, a large customer with many cardholders may have several facility codes to separate, for instance, departments. Min = 1 numerical character.

Expiry Date

Select when the selected cad type should expire. Select the type required (Date, Day, Month, Year), and enter the required value in the field. If Month or Year is selected, a checkbox will appear below Year labelled End of Previous Month. When selected, the card will actually expire at the end of the month prior to the value entered in the field.

Access Level Templates

Click the check box and choose Access Level template from the drop-down list. This is only available if this privilege has been checked in User Privileges Configure Privileges Tab... Page 39. Click the check box and choose a card status for all cards with this card type from the drop-down list. This is only available if this privilege has been checked in User Privileges (the Change Card Status privilege) Configure Privileges Tab... Page 39. The title can be used if this card type template is to be used for a particular group of professions. Example cleaners, security or marketing managers. Choose a user type for this template in the drop-down list to use this template for

Card Status

Title

User Type

Table 6-9. Card Type Template > General Tab Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

453

Parameters
Department Valid To

Descriptions
Choose a department from the drop-down list. This is the default expiry date duration. Enter a reasonable amount of Days, Months, years or an end date during which this card type should be valid for. If this flag is checked, a cardholder with this card type is required to enter secured areas together with another cardholder. When selected this flag allows the cardholder an extended time to pass through a door. Typically used for cardholders who require additional time to pass through a door. e.g. users in wheelchairs or employees pushing large trolleys. This time is programmed in the Card Access Configuration under the I/O Parameters tab.

Dual User Control Extended Shunt/Strike Time

Add Last Code Byte to PIN

Adds the last digit of the Card No. to the beginning of the PIN. This is not valid for operation with PINs greater than 4 digits. Example: if the Card No. is 123 and the PIN is 1234 the flag Add Last Code Byte to PIN will create the PIN 31234.

Store Code for Degraded Mode

If this flag is checked the card number will be downloaded to the field controller AND the card reader interface so that access through a door is still possible when the card reader interface is offline.

Note: This flag only applies with the new 1064 CRI card reader interface (1064-002).
Use PIN to Access Supervisor Operation Executive Operation Escort Capable If this flag is checked on a card type it requires a PIN to access any area. Provides this cardholder supervisor rights for areas requiring a supervisor. Provides the cardholder access rights to any area. The holder of a card with this flag selected is capable of escorting a user with the Escort Required flag selected.

Table 6-9. Card Type Template > General Tab Parameters (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

454

Access Control

Parameters
Escort Required Permanent User Card Type

Descriptions
The holder of a card with this flag selected requires a user with the Escort Capable flag selected. This cardholder will not be removed from the field controllers database because of no activity. Enter a name for the card type you wish to modify or add to the Card Type list. Modifies the Card Type name highlighted in the Card Type list to the name entered in the Card Type text field. Adds a new card type in the Card Type list with the name entered in the Card Type text field. Click to apply any changes made to this card type template to all cards of this card type.

Table 6-9. Card Type Template > General Tab Parameters (continued) 2. Enter the information on the General tab you want this card type to have and then click on User Defined 1 tab to add a card design and additional information.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

455

Figure 6-74. Card Access Manager > Card Type Template > User Defined Tabs

Parameters
CDF Filename User Defined Field

Descriptions
Choose a card design template from the drop-down list. The user defined fields can be renamed and contain any information you choose.

Table 6-10. Card Type Template > User Defined 1 Tab Parameters 3. Choose a card design template from the CDF Filename drop-down list.

Note: All text fields in the two User Defined tabs can be user defined.
4. To change the names of the user defined text fields in GMS main menu click on Edit System Files to open the Edit System Data Files window. Select file Card access/ Visitor User defined Text. Click OK or double click on the selected file.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

456

Access Control 5. Change the names of the user defined fields to desired names that work for card type templates. Save the text file and close it. You must close and re-open the Card Type Templates window for changes to take place. Click Apply for all cards of this card type to be updated with these changes. Click Close when finished.

6. 7.

6.9.13. Verify Card Database Consistency


To verify the consistency of the card database, proceed as follows. 1. In the Card Access Manager menu under Option click on Verify Card Database consistency simultaneously as you hold down the Control key. Watch the Card Access Manager s status bar confirm the command.

2.

6.10. Video Badging Module


The Video Badging module makes picture taking easy. A few clicks of your mouse button and you can have a digital image ready for your ID card, database or desktop publishing application. The flexibility of the video badging system allows the user to capture a picture from other sources such as a digital camera, camcorder and scanner or from a graphic file. To use this module the GMS license must have the video badging module enabled.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

457

Figure 6-75. Licensed For Video Badging No badging dongle is required to operate Video Badging on a GMS workstation. There is no limit to the number of picture and text objects that can be added to the badge. To begin, click Badge... to open the list of options.

Note: The grayed out Setup... is for badging with the Vision Rapid system only.

6.10.1. Select Image Source


Video Badging must be configured to use the correct capture source for the task at hand. To select a capture source proceed as follows. 1. In Card Access Manager click Badge... and in the drop-down list select Select Image Source.... The Capture Source Selection window will open.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

458

Access Control

Figure 6-76. Capture Source Selection Window

Parameters
Video for Windows Source

Descriptions
Check Video for Windows Source to open the Software control camera check box. The Software Control Camera option is available for the Sony D30/31 and 310/311V cameras only. This software control was designed to control camera brightness, contrast, pan, tilt, zoom and white balance directly with the use of your mouse in real time, during the picture capture process.

Twain Source

You will be prompted to select the desired TWAIN device from a list. The list will be compiled from the available TWAIN device drivers in your computer. If there are no available TWAIN device drivers the system will generate an error message, TWAIN no data source. Check Graphic File to allow you to browse and choose files of formats BMP, JPG, PCX, PNG and TIF.

Graphic File

Table 6-11. Capture Source Selection Parameters 2. Select the correct capture source from the following options and click OK. The Card Access Manager will be displayed again.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

459

3.

Click on Badge... and in the drop-down list select Capture Photo.... Depending on what capture source you chose in the previous steps the window and options will look differently. Make your selection of graphic or video depending on what capture source you chose previously and this will place your picture in the Photo Adjustment window for adjustments if needed.

4.

Figure 6-77. Photo Adjustment Window 5. 6. Adjust colors, brightness and contrast by dragging the slider with the mouse. Click OK to save otherwise Cancel.

6.10.2. Capture Photo


To capture a live picture the software must be in a capture mode. To do this, proceed as follows. 1. Click on the Camera (Activate Video Preview) icon button, which will activate the camera and open another icon button, Capture, located below the picture window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

460

Access Control

Note: If you are using a software controlled camera, a Camera Control icon will also appear.
2. You are now ready to capture an image. If you do not see the Capture button below the picture window, you are still in Record View and not in Image capture mode. Before you click on Capture, make sure you have entered the correct details in the Record View list boxes. Click on the Save icon which appears as a blue diskette on the toolbar. Click on Capture. Video Badging module will capture an image and place it in the Photo Adjustment window, ready for adjustments. If unhappy with the picture, simply re-take the picture.

3. 4.

Note: You can use the Refresh button to refresh the live video image in the picture window.
5. If you have selected TWAIN as your source, the Video Badging will open the software of the selected TWAIN device. Use the device to obtain your picture. When you are done, your picture will appear in the Photo Adjustment window. If you have selected Graphic File as your source, the Video Badging module will open a list box displaying the file directories. Find the correct folder and graphic image, highlight it and click on OK. The picture selected will now appear in the Photo Adjustment window. If you have selected Signature Pad, Video Badging will open its writing pad ready to accept a signature from a mouse, tablet or a signature pad. You can adjust your pen width by using the Stroke Size adjustment, the higher the number the thicker the stroke size. If you make a mistake while entering your signature you can use the clear button to start over again. Click OK when you are finished. You can also scan in a signature and simply open it as a file.

6.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

461

6.10.3. ID Card Layout


The Video Badging module design program is a tool for designing and creating ID cards. The card design program allows you to import graphics files (i.e. your company logo) or add a text box, and resize and position these items to create an ID card. The card design program cannot create, change or edit bitmaps or graphics.

6.10.3.1. Create a New Card Template


To create a new ID card template, proceed as follows. 1. In Card Access Manager click Badge... and in the drop-down list select New Badge Layout.... The New Badge window will open.

Figure 6-78. New Badge Window 2. Enter a name for the new card template in the Card Template Name text box. Choose layout by clicking Portrait or Landscape and then enter desired width and height if different from the default values. The card dimension default values are automatically set from the driver of the current printer. To design the card for a specific printer, click on Print Setup and select the new printer. The design program will automatically change the card dimensions to match the new printer. Click OK to start designing this new card template in the Badge Designer window or Cancel to exit without saving. A new blank card will appear, ready for design with text and picture boxes, if selected.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

462

Access Control

Figure 6-79. Badge Designer Window 4. Click on the picture icon and a blank box will appear in the empty card area. Rightclick inside the picture box to open a drop-down list.

Parameters
Fixed Picture

Descriptions
Allows you to choose a picture that will be fixed for all ID cards made with this design template. Example could be a company logo. It supports formats BMP and JPG. Check either Photo or Signature to pick up the cardholders photo or signature and enter into the picture box. The photo and signature must already be stored for the card to be able to read them. Keeps the aspect ratio of the picture while you are resizing it.

Select Photo

Keep Aspect

Table 6-12. Badge Picture Options

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

463

Parameters
Lock Position Horizontal Center Vertical Center Bring To Front Send To Back

Descriptions
Locks the picture frame so it cannot be moved by click and drag. Positions the picture frame in the ID badge frames horizontal center. Positions the picture frame in the ID badge frames vertical center. Positions the picture frame in front of any other potential picture or text boxes. Positions the picture frame behind any other potential picture or text boxes.

Table 6-12. Badge Picture Options 5. You can design any desired BMP color background from software such as Corel Draw, Photo Paint or Photoshop. Ensure the background fits the size of the ID card you have in mind, either landscape or portrait setup.

6.10.3.2. Open a Card Template


To open the Card Design program, in Card Access Manager click Badge... and in the drop-down list select Edit Badge Layout.... The Select Badge Design window will open. The Select Badge Design window displays a list of the cards currently in your database. From here you can open an existing card, or delete a card. To open an existing card layout, highlight the card wanted and double click on it or click Open.

6.10.3.3. Delete a Card Template


To delete an exiting card template, in Card Access Manager click Badge... and in the drop-down list select Edit Badge Layout.... The Select Badge Design window will open. Highlight the card template you wish to delete, and double click on it or click Delete.

6.10.3.4. Add, Delete, Move and Resize Objects


The toolbar is used to add additional Text or Picture boxes to your card or to position or resize a selected object.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

464

Access Control

Parameter

Description
Adds a new Picture/Graphic box to your card. You can either attach a fixed picture (usually a graphic background) or a photo to the box. Adds a new Text Box to your card. You can either attach a fixed caption to the box or a data text box. Adds a text box that can be assigned a field from the database.

Top: Left: Width: Height:

Distance in inches the selected object is from the top of the card. Distance in inches the selected object is from the left side of the card. Width in inches of the selected object. Height in inches of the selected object.

Table 6-13. Toolbar Functions To add a new Text box or a Picture/Graphic box, click on a button and the corresponding box will appear on your card. To delete a box, position your mouse pointer on the box, right-click on the mouse and the properties menu will be displayed. Click on the delete item at the bottom of the list to delete the object. To move a box to the front or to the back, right-click and select the action. The dimensions of the card and the number of text and picture boxes are shown at the bottom. The easiest method to move a box is to use the Windows drag and drop technique. Hold down the left mouse button on the box and drag the box to the desired position. To resize a box, hold down the left mouse button on the bottom-right corner and drag to the size desired. As you are dragging, you will notice the number values changing. You may also enter values on the toolbar for the new box position into the Top and Left section. To enter a value into the Top or Left section click on the current value in the section and use the keyboard to enter a new one. When you have entered the new value press the Enter key on the keyboard. The picture box changes size as you hit Enter.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

465

6.10.3.5. Resize a Card


To resize a card, open the card, make sure all picture elements lie within the new dimensions then select the Resize Card card option from the Option menu. The design program will prompt you for the new dimensions for your card. Enter the new dimensions and click OK.

Text Box
Fixed Text... Attach Field Custom Functions Angle... Bar code... Color... Font... Lock Position Horizontal Center Vertical Center Background Color... Bring To Front Send To Back

Description
Allows you to enter your own text in to the text box. Attaches a field from the database to the text box. Assigns current page number, date and time or magnetic stripe encoding data to the text box. Allows you to the text in the text box at an angle of your choice. Select this item to make this text box a bar code text box. Changes the color of the text in the text box. To change the font style and size of the text in the text box. Locks the position of the text box. Centers the text box horizontally on the card. Centers the text box vertically on the card. Allows you to choose a color for this specific text box. Brings this box to the front. Pushes this box to the back.

Table 6-14. Object Properties

6.10.4. Magnetic Stripe Encoding


The Video Badging module provides a feature for encoding data onto a magnetic stripe card. To setup the stripe data, invoke the magnetic stripe encoding dialog by right-clicking on the custom functions menu. The required hardware is a Datacard Encoder serially connected to GMS.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

466

Access Control

6.10.5. Single And Double Side Badge Design


When creating a new badge design the new default badge dimension value is 2.3x3.5 inches but the user can change the badge dimension values to suit.

Figure 6-80. New Badge Window

Note: The default orientation of any new badge design is Portrait.


Badge design is divided into front side and back side. The front side badge designs are the only ones displayed in the CDF Filename combo-boxs drop-down list in Card Access. Each front side badge design can attach an optional backside badge design but not vice versa. Front side badges created from the Cardholders page will have the file extension *.cdf while their corresponding back side badge designs will have the file extension *.bcdf. Front side badges created from the Visitors page will have the file extension *.vcdf while their corresponding back side badge design will have the file extension *.vbcdf. To view the backside of a double side badge design click View Back Side in the Badge Designer. The View Back Side button will not be visible if the current open badge design does not have a back side. The position and size of the Badge Designer dialog is now saved to the user manager file on exit of the application. This allows the Badge Designer dialog to restore its previous position and size by reading the information from the user manager file before it is displayed on the screen.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

467

Open a badge design and you will see a rounded rectangle. This rectangle shows the dimensions of the badge and is drawn around the badge design area. The same rounded rectangle can also been seen when viewing the same badge design in the print preview dialog.

Figure 6-81. Badge Design

6.10.6. How to Create Objects


The Badge Designer supports drawing lines, ellipses, and rectangles, with different pen sizes and colors (these are all objects). These features are located in the Tools menu and on the toolbar.

6.10.6.1. How to Change The Pen Color


The default pen color is black. To change the color of the pen: select the Color|Pen Color in the Tools menu to bring up the Color dialog. Select the desired color in the Color dialog and click OK.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

468

Access Control

Figure 6-82. Pen Color Command From Tools Menu This option is also available in the drop-down list of the Color button on the toolbar.

Figure 6-83. Pen Color Command From Color Icon

6.10.6.2. How to Change The Pen Size


The default pen size is 1. To change the size of the pen: select the Pen Size from the Tools menu to bring up the Select Pen Size dialog. Select the desired pen size by clicking on the horizontal scrollbar and click OK.

Figure 6-84. Select A Pen Size Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

469

6.10.6.3. How to Draw A Line


To draw a straight line, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired pen color and size. Click the line button on the toolbar (or select the Tool > Line menu item). To draw the line, drag the mouse pointer.

6.10.6.4. How to Draw An Ellipse Or Circle


To draw an ellipse or circle, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired pen color and size. Click the ellipse button on the toolbar (or select the Tool > Ellipse menu item). To draw an ellipse/circle, drag the mouse pointer diagonally.

6.10.6.5. How to Draw A Rectangle Or Square


To draw a rectangle/square, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired pen color and size. Click the rectangle button on the toolbar (or select the Tool > Rectangle menu item). To draw a rectangle, drag the mouse pointer diagonally in the direction you want.

6.10.7. How to Work With Objects


All the objects (picture, text, line, ellipse, rectangle) on the badge are re sizable and movable.

6.10.7.1. How to Select An Object


When an object (picture, text, line, ellipse, rectangle) is selected by clicking on the object, a tracker is automatically drawn around it to highlight it. To select a picture or text object, simple click on the object with the left mouse button.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

470

Access Control

Figure 6-85. Select An Object To select a graphic object (line, ellipse, rectangle), proceed as follows. 1. 2. Click on Select on the toolbar (or select the Tool > Select menu item). Click on the object with the left mouse button to select it.

Figure 6-86. Select An Object

6.10.7.2. How to Resize An Object


To resize a picture box or text box, move the mouse pointer to the lower right corner of the object, and use the left mouse button to click and drag the object to the desired size. To resize a graphic object (line, ellipse, rectangle), proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on Select on the toolbar (or select the Tool > Select menu item). Click the object to select it. Move the mouse pointer to the edge of the object where the tracker is. Click and drag the object to the desired size.

6.10.7.3. How to Move A Picture Or Text Object


To move a picture or text object, proceed as follows. 1. 2. Click on the object with the left mouse button to select it. Use the arrow keys to move the object to the desired position in the badge.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

471

6.10.7.4. How to Move A Graphic Object


To move a graphic object, proceed as follows. 1. 2. 3. Click on Select on the toolbar (or select the Tool > Select menu item). Click on the object with the left mouse button to select it. Use the arrow keys to move the object to the desired position in the badge.

6.10.8. Common Edit Commands


You can now perform common edit commands (Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Undo, Redo) on the picture, text, and graphic objects. These commands are located in the Edit menu and on the toolbar.

Figure 6-87. Edit Menu Commands To use the Cut, Copy, and Delete (i.e. Delete An Object) commands, you need to select the object first before applying the command. The Undo command will undo the previous Cut, Delete, or Paste action. The Redo command will re-action the previous Cut, Delete, or Paste action. (Note that you cannot undo an objects size and position once its changed).

6.10.9. Fill
The Fill feature is located in the Tools menu and on the toolbar. The undo fill feature is located in the Edit menu with the menu item name Delete Filled Areas. On the toolbar, the undo fill feature is located under the delete buttons drop-down list.

6.10.9.1. How to Fill An Area


To fill an area, proceed as follows.
Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

472

Access Control 1. Select the Fill Color menu item from the Tools > Color menu or the color buttons drop-down list on the toolbar. In the Color dialog box, select the desired fill color and click OK. Select the Fill menu item from the Tools menu or click on the Fill button on the toolbar. Move the mouse pointer to the area where you would to fill. Click the left mouse pointer to fill the area.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.10.9.2. How to Delete A Filled Area


To delete a filled area, proceed as follows. 1. Select the Delete Filled Areas menu item from the Edit menu or the drop-down of the Delete button on the toolbar. A message box will appear asking whether to delete the filled area pointed by the mouse pointer for each filled area. Click Yes if you want to delete it. Click No will move the mouse pointer to the next filled area (if any). Click Cancel to exit the command.

2.

Figure 6-88. Confirm Delete Dialog Box

Note: There should be a mouse pointer pointing to the blue filled area.

6.10.10.Background Color
When the menu item Background Color is checked, a Color dialog box will be displayed, and the text objects background will be set to the selected color.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

473

Figure 6-89. Background Color Command

6.10.11.Attach Field
When you select the Attach Field menu item from the text pop-up menu, a drop-down list of Database Field Items will be displayed. It contains two lists, one for Card Access and one for Visitor. Since not all the Database Field Items are common to both it is necessary to separate them into two separate lists. Each list will contain all the common Database Field Items and the ones specific to it.

Card Access Database Field Items List


Item-1=Last Name Item-2=First Name Item-3=Middle Name Item-4=Card No. Item-5=Personal_ID Item-6=DOB Item-7=Department Item-8=Title Item-9=Street Table 6-15. Database Field Items

Visitor Database Field Items List


Item-1=Last Name Item-2=First Name Item-3=Middle Name Item-4=Badge No. Item-5=Badge Serial No. Item-6=Phone Extension Item-7=Department Item-8=Street Item-9=City

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

474

Access Control

Card Access Database Field Items List


Item-10=City Item-11=State Item-12=Zip Item-13=Home Phone Item-14=Printed No. Item-15=Issue No. Item-16=Card Type Item-17=User Type Item-18=Site Group Item-19=Expiry Date Item-20=Valid From Item-21=User Field-2 Item-22=User Field-3 Item-23=User Field-4 Item-24=User Field-5 Item-25=User Field-6 Item-26=User Field-7 Item-27=User Field-8 Item-28=User Field-9 Item-29=User Field-10 Item-30=User Field-11 Item-31=User Field-12 Item-32=User Field-13

Visitor Database Field Items List


Item-10=State Item-11=Zip Item-12=Company Name Item-13=Host Name Item-14=Valid Date From Item-15=Valid Date To Item-16=Valid Time From Item-17=Valid Time To Item-18=User Field-2 Item-19=User Field-3 Item-20=User Field-4 Item-21=User Field-5 Item-22=User Field-6 Item-23=User Field-7 Item-24=User Field-8 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Table 6-15. Database Field Items (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

475

Card Access Database Field Items List


Item-33=User Field-14 Item-34=User Field-15 Item-35=User Field-16

Visitor Database Field Items List


N/A N/A N/A

Table 6-15. Database Field Items (continued)

6.10.12.Template
When asking for a new template name for the front or back side, the existence of the entered file name will first be checked. If the file already exist, a message box will be displayed asking the user to over write or not. Select No will bring the user back to the New Badge dialog so that the user can enter a different template name. The application will only over write the file if the user select Yes.

6.10.13.Bar Code
When the Bar Code menu item of a text object is checked, any numeric text boxes entered will be automatically converted to the equivalent of the 3 of 9 Bar Code (True Type) font.

Figure 6-90. Bar Code Command

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

476

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

477

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

478

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

479

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

480

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

481

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

482

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

483

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

484

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

485

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

486

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

487

6.11. Search
The Search page is used to find the records of one or more cardholders and is displayed by default when the Card Access Manager window is opened. There are two main areas on the Search page. Card details and search results.

Figure 6-91. Card Access Manager Window There are several different ways to search, and how depends on the type of information you are looking for. Before conducting a search you will need to define some search criteria by selecting one or more of the text boxes on the Simple tab section. None of the text boxes in this section become available until the check box is clicked. For a more advanced search click on the Query tab. It is only for users that understand SQL.

Note: SQL queries can only be performed on the CARDINFO and CARDDETAIL tables.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

488

Access Control

Figure 6-92. Two Check Boxes That Have Been Selected by Clicking

6.11.1. How to Search Cardholder Records


To search cardholder records, proceed as follows. 1. Select the cardholder details you want included in the search and type in any specific information such as last name.

Figure 6-93. Cardholder Details 2. There are further search criteria under the Advance and Query tabs. Select fields as required for your search. Click Search to conduct the search. Cards matching your search criteria will be displayed in the Search Results section under Card No., Name, Expiry Date and Status columns.

3.

The total number of cards found during the search is displayed as Total Records:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

489

Figure 6-94. The Total Number of Records Found

Note: Depending on the criteria of your last search, the More dialog box may display when Search is clicked. Click OK to continue if you do not want extended search options.

6.11.2. Advanced Search Options


In addition to just searching using the Simple tab, you can add more search criteria by going to the Advance tab. The Advance tab allows you to search more Database Fields. This fine tunes your search so that you can pin point the cardholder you are interested in.

6.11.2.1. How to Add A Field To The Search


To add a search field, proceed as follows. 1. Click a field name in the Database Fields column.

Figure 6-95. The Selected Field Name 2. Click the add (right arrow).

This will transfer the selection to the Selected Fields column.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

490

Access Control

Figure 6-96. The Selected Field to Be Added

Note: A double click will transfer your selection to the Selected Fields column without having to click Select.
You are free to add more Database Fields to the Selected Fields area. Each will have its own search equation that needs to be completed.

Figure 6-97. The Search Equation Area. 3. Click Search to initiate your search.

6.11.2.2. How to Use Search Equations


Search equations are mostly divided into three parts. To use search equations, proceed as follows. 1. The first part is simply a choice between is and is not.

Figure 6-98. A Choice Between Is And Is Not 2. The second part is a choice between (up to) 8 options from a drop-down list.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

491

Figure 6-99. Select An Option From The Drop-Down List Box 3. The third part will be either a choice between a blank text box (or two) for the entry of free form text or to select an option from a drop-down list box.

Figure 6-100. Select From Drop-Down List Or Enter Choice In Blank text box Which one depends on your selection in the Database Fields column

6.11.2.3. Search Equation Descriptions And Examples


This is a brief description of the search equation meanings. When combined with one or more of the Selected Fields, these choices form a complete query.

Option
Is is not

Description
Selects records that have any value in the Selected Fields. Selects records that have any other value in the Selected Fields.

Table 6-16. Description of The Search Equation Selections (Part 1)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

492

Access Control

Option
equal to one of

Description
Selects records where there is an exact match between the value in the Selected Fields and the third part of the search equation. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields is one of one or more values specified in the third part of the search equation. If more than one value is added they are presented as a list. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields, is less than the value specified in the third part of the search equation. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields, is less than or equal to the value specified in the third part of the search equation. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields, is greater than the value specified in the third part of the search equation. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields, is greater than or equal to the value specified in the third part of the search equation. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields falls between or matches one of two values specified in the third part of the search equation. Selects records where the value in the Selected Fields falls between or matches a particular text string or numerical value specified in the third part of the search equation.

less than less than or equal to

greater than greater than or equal to

Between

Like

Table 6-17. Search Equation Field Descriptions (Part 2)

Option
free form text

Description
This is a free form text box to type in a particular text string or numerical value. Two text boxes will be displayed when between is selected. This is a drop-down list that allows you to choose one of the available fixed selections.

drop-down list

Search Equation field descriptions (part 3)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

493

Selected Fields
Title Expiry Date Card No Floor No

First
is is is is

Second
equal to between less than one of

Third
Manager 01/11/02 And 28/11/ 02 100 468

Table 6-18. Search Equation Examples

6.11.3. How to Customize Search Results


Search results can be customized so that only the required fields are displayed when a search is complete. To customize Search Results, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the Card Access Manager s main menu select Setup. Select Customize Search Result Columns.... The Customize Search Result Columns... dialog will be displayed.

Figure 6-101. Customize Searched Result Columns dialog

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

494

Access Control 3. The left-hand side list shows all the columns that can be displayed. The right-hand side list shows all columns that will be displayed. Use names between the two lists. 4. and to transfer columns

The order of the columns displayed can also be set. Column names appearing top to bottom in the right-hand side list will be displayed left to right in the Results section. Use and to change the order.

5.

When the required columns are chosen, click OK.

6.11.4. How to Display A Cardholder Record After A Search


To display a Cardholder record after a search, proceed as follows. 1. Select a card number in the Card No. column

Figure 6-102. A Selected Card in Search Results

Note: At this stage you have an option to update details of all cards in the search results or you can select a specific card from the results and view its details.
2. Click Select. The Cardholders page will be displayed

Figure 6-103. Select Button

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

495

Figure 6-104. A Cardholder Record Displayed After A Search

Note: Click the Search tab to return to the Search page.

6.11.5. Preview And/Or Print A Report After A Search


There are several templates that can be used to preview and/or print reports from the Search page. They are: Card Access List Card Access Privileges Card Contact Cardholder Details Report Card Modified

To preview a report, proceed as follows. 1. Click Preview...

Figure 6-105. The Preview Button

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

496

Access Control The search dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 6-106. Search Dialog 2. Choose a Report Template.

Figure 6-107. Select A Template 3. Click Select... and your report will be displayed in a window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

497

Figure 6-108. The Report Preview Window After viewing the report you can print, export the data or just close the Report Preview window.

6.11.6. Cardholder Search Examples


It is assumed that the Card Access Manager window is open and the Search page is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

498

Access Control

Example
Search Example #1

Scenario
Search what cardholders have access to a particular card reader See Search Example #1... Page 498

Search Example #2

Search for a cardholders car registration. See Search Example #2... Page 499

Search Example #3

Search what cardholders have access to a particular card reader (mail room) and also reside on a particular floor (5th). See Search Example #3... Page 500

Search Example #4

Search for a cardholder with the first name Graham (but you are uncertain of the spelling as it could be spelled Graham, Grahame or Graeme) who resides on the 7th or 8th floor. See Search Example #4... Page 502

Table 6-19. Search Examples

6.11.6.1. Search Example #1


Problem Identify what cardholders have access to a particular card reader.

Note: For this example it is assumed Reader-1 has been renamed to Mail Room.
Solution You need to search the database for cards that have access to a reader or Reader Group. 1. 2. Click the Reader No./Name check box. In the Reader No./Name text box, type in the reader number (or name) to search on. For example to search for cards that have access to the mail room reader, type mail room.

Note: All string (text) text boxes are case insensitive.


3. Click Search to conduct the search.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4.

499

If there are cards in the database that have access to the mail room they will be displayed in the Search Results section.

Problem Identify what contractor cards are going to expire within the next 7 days. Solution You need to search the database for cards due to expire (within a specified time frame). 1. 2. Click the Day(s) to Expire check box. In the Day(s) to Expire text box, type in the number of days to search up to. For example to search for cards expiring in the next seven days, type 7.

Note: To search for cards that have already expired (within a specified time frame) type a negative interger (-7) instead of a positive integer (7).
3. 4. Click Search to conduct the search. If there are cards in the database due to expire in the next seven days they will be displayed in the Search Results section.

6.11.6.2. Search Example #2


Problem Identify the owner of a car in the staff car park that has its headlights on.

Note: For this example it is assumed the User Definition-5 text box has been renamed to Car Registration and that employee car registrations have been added to the database.
Solution You need to search the database for a car registration. 1. Click More to display extended search options.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

500

Access Control 2. Click Car Registration in the Database Fields column and click Select. This will transfer the selection to the Selected Fields column. A double click will automatically transfer Car Registration to the Selected Fields column. In the blank search criteria text box, type in the car registration number being searched for. The Search Equation should now read is^equal to^Car Registration (E.g. ABC123). Click OK to include the extended search options in the search. The Search page will be displayed.

3.

4.

Note: You can use the More button without any text boxes being selected in Cardholder Details.
5. Click Search to conduct the search. If the car registration number is in the database it will be displayed in the Search Results area. Click the displayed card number in the Card No. column and click Select. This will display the Cardholders page with the selected cardholders details shown.

6.

Note: At this stage you have an option to update details of all cards in the search results or you can select a specific card from the results and view its details.
7. Clicking the Search tab will return you to the Search window.

Note: When using the More dialog box ensure you clear any entries before conducting a further search, unless you want the same criteria to apply.

6.11.6.3. Search Example #3


Problem Search what cardholders have access to the mail room and reside on a particular floor (E.g. 5th).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

501

Note: For this example it is assumed Reader-1 has been renamed to Mail Room and the User Definition-4 text box has been renamed to Floor No. Also that employee floor locations have been added to the database.
Solution Search the database for cards that have access to a reader or Reader Group and also sit on a particular floor. 1. 2. Click the Reader No./Name check box. In the Reader No./Name text box, type in the reader number (or name) to be searched on. For example cards that have access to the mail room reader, type mail room.

Note: All string (text) text boxes are case insensitive.


3. To complete the second part of the search criteria click More to display extended search options. Highlight Floor No. in the Database Fields column and click Select. This will transfer the selection to the Selected Fields column. A double click will automatically transfer Floor No. to the Selected Fields column. In the first part of the search equation, select is, from the drop-down list. In the second part of the search equation, select equal to, from the drop-down list. In the third part of the search equation, type in the floor number to search on. E.g. 5.

4.

5. 6. 7.

Note: All string (text) text boxes are case insensitive.


8. The Search Equation should now read is equal to 5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

502

Access Control

Figure 6-109. Search Equation Dialog Box 9. Click OK to include the extended search options in your search. The Search page will be displayed. Click Search to conduct the search. If there are cards in the database that have mail room access and the cardholder resides on the 5th floor, they will be displayed in the Search Results section.

10. 11.

6.11.6.4. Search Example #4


Problem Locate a cardholder with the first name Graham (but you are uncertain of the spelling as it could be spelled Graham, Grahame or Graeme) who resides on either the 7th or 8th floor.

Note: For this example it is assumed a User Definition text box has been renamed to Floor No. Also that employee floor locations have been added to the database.
Solution You will need to search the database for a cardholder named Graham. 1. 2. Click the First Name check box. In the First Name text box type in the name being looking for. As you are uncertain of the spelling, type in the first part of the name (that is common to all spellings) and place a% sign at the end E.g. Gra%. This will perform a wildcard search for any names beginning with Gra and any characters following.

Note: % is a wildcard that can be used before or after your text string.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 3. To complete the second part of the search criteria click More to display extended search options.

503

4.

Click Floor No. in the Database Fields column and click Select. This will transfer the selection to the Selected Fields column. A double click will automatically transfer Floor No. to the Selected Fields column In the first part of the search equation, select is from the drop-down list. In the second part of the search equation, select between from the drop-down list. In the third part of the search equation (as there are two blank text boxes), type in the floor number being searched from and the floor number being search to. E.g. 7 and 8. The Search Equation should now read is between 7 and 8. Click OK to include the extended search options in the search. The Search window will be displayed. Click Search to conduct the search. If there is a cardholder (or more) with the first name Graham (any spelling) in the database who resides on the either the 7th or 8th floor, they will be displayed in the Search Results section.

5. 6. 7.

8. 9.

10. 11.

Note: Type an _ (underscore) in place of character(s) you are unsure of. Eg. Karen could be spelled Karen, Karan or Karin so you would type Kar_n to cover all of those possibilities.

6.12. Cardholder Transactions


The Card Transaction Manager has been designed to provide operators with quick access to information about card transactions. The Card Transaction Manager is displayed by clicking the Card Transaction Manager button on the GMS toolbar.

Figure 6-110. The Card Access Transaction Manager Button

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

504

Access Control The Card Transaction Manager comprises of four pages. All Transactions, Traced Transactions, Muster Transactions and Cardholder

Access to any of the pages is by clicking on the page tab.

Figure 6-111. The four Card Access Transaction Manager Tabs With All Transactions As The Active Page The All Transactions page is displayed by default. The sort order of columns can be changed by clicking on the column title. An arrow head will indicate the direction of sorting for that column.

Figure 6-112. The Direction of Column Sorting

6.12.1. All Transactions


The All Transactions page lists all card transactions within a selected number of days.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

505

Figure 6-113. The Card Transaction Manager > All Transactions Page The appearance of the All Transactions page can be customized by clicking Options. You can customize the header, the color of the transaction and also filter what kind of transactions should appear in the All transactions dialog box.

6.12.2. How to Change All Transactions Options


Button Description
The appearance of the All Transactions page can be customized by clicking the Options... button. Table 6-20.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

506

Access Control

Button

Description
To see a report preview click the Preview... button. The page can be refreshed by clicking the Refresh button. Click Auto scroll window for the window to scroll when the data covers more rows than the screen can show.

Table 6-20. The Options dialog box has four pages. All Transactions, Traced Transactions, Muster Transactions and Cardholder

Access to any of the pages is by clicking on the page tab.

Figure 6-114. The Four Options Tabs With Color Customization The Active Page

6.12.2.1. Color Customization


The Color Customization page will allow you to change the display color of all transaction types within Card Transaction Manager. Any selected color will remain the same across the three transaction pages.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

507

Figure 6-115. The Color Customization Page

6.12.2.1.1.

How to Change The Color of A Transaction


To change the color of a transaction, proceed as follows. 1. Click the transaction whose color you want to change. In this case it is the Valid card transaction. You can click on more than one. Click to select; click again to de-select.

Figure 6-116. The Valid Card transaction Has Been Clicked 2. Click on a color in the Color Selections palate. In this case it is a green.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

508

Access Control

Figure 6-117. Green Has Been Selected 3. Click on Apply.

Figure 6-118. Click Apply and the Transaction Type will de-select and change to the new color.

Figure 6-119. The Transaction Will Now Display As Green 4. Click OK to save the changes.

6.12.2.2. Transaction Type


The Transaction Type page will allow you to choose which transactions are displayed on the All Transactions page. This is done by copying transactions to the Selected Transaction Type area: To copy an available transaction type to the selected transaction type area, proceed as follows. 1. Click on the transaction(s) you want to add.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

509

Figure 6-120. Three Selected Transactions

Note: Hold down CTRL and click on the transaction if selecting more than one. Hold down SHIFT and click if selecting a continuous range.
2. Click Add.

Figure 6-121. The Add Button The transactions will be copied to the Selected Transaction Type area.

Figure 6-122. Selected Transaction Type Area 3. Click OK to save the changes.

Figure 6-123. The OK Button

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

510

Access Control

6.12.2.3. Header Customization


The column order of the All Transactions page can be customized to suit operational needs. You can also choose which columns are displayed and which are hidden. By default all columns are displayed and are in the following order:

Figure 6-124. Default Column Display Order

Note: To change the Header Customization on the All Transactions page will not affect the Traced Transactions page. Each must be done separately.

6.12.2.3.1.
1.

How to Change The Order Columns Are Displayed In


In the Shown Columns & Orders: area click on the text box name you want to move. In this case it is Cardholder Name.

Figure 6-125. Columns & Orders > Cardholder Name 2. Click Move up. Each time the button is clicked Cardholder Name will move up the list one position. When it is at the top of the list click OK.

Figure 6-126. Click The Move Up Button

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide Now Cardholder Name is the first column displayed.

511

Figure 6-127. Cardholder Name Is The First Column Displayed

Note: Only one text box name can be selected and moved at a time.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

Figure 6-128. The OK Button

6.12.2.3.2.
1.

How to Change Which Columns Are Displayed


In the Shown Columns & Orders: area click on the text box name you want to hide from display. In this case it is Card Number, Status, Department, Site Number and Location. As only one text box name can be selected and moved at a time click Card Number. Click Remove. Card Number is moved to the Free Column area.

2.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

512

Access Control

Figure 6-129. Free Column Area 3. Repeat step 2 for the Status, Department, Site Number and Location text boxes.

Figure 6-130. Choose What Columns to Display 4. Click OK to save the changes.

Figure 6-131. The OK Button Now the All Transactions and Traced Transactions pages will only display the 4 selected text boxes as columns.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

513

Figure 6-132. The Four Selected Fields Displayed As Columns

6.12.2.4. Number of Days


The Number of Days page allows you to choose how many days of past transactions are displayed on Transaction pages. There can be up to a total of 7 days displayed but that includes the current day, which leaves 6 days of history.

Figure 6-133. Number of Days Page Just how many days are displayed is defined by the number in the Number of Days box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

514

Access Control

Note: It always displays todays transactions so the number of days to display refers to history. So if you type in 0 it will only display todays transactions and no history.

To see
only todays transactions 2 days of transactions 3 days of transactions 4 days of transactions 5 days of transactions 6 days of transactions 7 days of transactions

type in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Table 6-21. The Number of Days Value to Type In

6.12.2.4.1.
1. 2.

How to Set The Number of Days


Click the Number of Days tab. In the Number of Days box type in the number that represents the number of days you want to see. A value of 0 will only display the current days transactions.

Figure 6-134. Number of Days Box 3. Click OK to save the changes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

515

Figure 6-135. The OK Button

Note: The Muster Transactions page only shows the cardholder details of the last transaction in the current day for the given site.

6.12.3. Traced Transactions


The Traced Transactions page displays transactions for all cards with a status of traced.

6.12.4. Traced Transactions Options


The appearance of the Traced Transactions page can be customized by clicking Options. You can customize the header and the number of days seen.

6.12.4.1. Traced Transactions Header Customization


The column order of the Traced Transactions page can be customized to suit operational needs. You can also choose which columns are displayed and which are hidden. By default all columns are displayed and are in the following order:

Figure 6-136. Default Column Display Order

Note: To change the Header Customization on the Traced Transactions page will not affect the All Transactions page. Each must be done separately.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

516

Access Control

6.12.4.1.1.
1.

To Change The Order Columns Are Displayed In


Click the field name you want to move in the Shown Columns & Orders: area. In this case it is Cardholder Name.

Figure 6-137. Shown Columns & Orders > Cardholder Name 2. Click Move up. Each time the button is clicked Cardholder Name will move up the list one position. When it is at the top of the list click OK.

Figure 6-138. Click The Move Up Button Now Cardholder Name is the first column displayed.

Figure 6-139. Cardholder Name Is The First Column Displayed

Note: Only one field name can be selected and moved at a time.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

517

Figure 6-140. The OK Button

6.12.4.1.2.
1.

How to Change Which Columns Are Displayed


Click the field name you want to hide from display in the Shown Columns & Orders area. In this case it is Card Number, Department, Transaction Type, Site Number and Location. As only one field name can be selected and moved at a time click Card Number. Click Remove. Card Number is moved to the Free Column area.

2.

Figure 6-141. Shown Columns & Orders > Move Fields 3. Repeat step 2 for the Department, Transaction Type, Site Number and Location fields.

Figure 6-142. Repeat to Move More Fields 4. Click OK to save the changes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

518

Access Control

Figure 6-143. The OK Button Now the Traced Transactions page will only display the four selected fields as columns.

Figure 6-144. The Four Selected Fields Displayed As Columns

6.12.4.2. Number of Days


The Number of Days page allows you to choose how many days of past transactions are displayed on Traced Transactions page. There can be up to a total of 7 days displayed but that includes the current day, which leaves 6 days of history.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

519

Figure 6-145. Number of Days Page Just how many days are displayed is defined by the number in the Number of Days box.

To see
only todays transactions 2 days of transactions 3 days of transactions 4 days of transactions 5 days of transactions 6 days of transactions 7 days of transactions

type in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Table 6-22. The Number of Days Value to Type In

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

520

Access Control

6.12.4.2.1.
1. 2.

How to Set The Number of Days


Click the Number of Days tab. In the Number of Days box type in the number that represents the number of days you want to see. A value of 0 will only display the current days transactions.

Figure 6-146. Number of Days Box 3. Click OK to save the changes.

Figure 6-147. The OK Button

6.12.5. Muster Transactions


Muster Transactions displays the last transaction of any card that has been configured in the filter.

Note: Muster Transactions is an optional feature and can only be used when GMS has a Muster license.
To set the Muster Transactions filter: 1. 2. 3. Click Edit Filter for Site(s). From the Select Site(s) dialog box select a site(s) and click OK. From the Muster Reader(s) drop-down list box select a reader(s) or click Edit Filter to add reader(s).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4.

521

From the IN-Reader(s) drop-down list box select a reader(s) or click Edit Filter to add reader(s). To add a department to the filter, from the Department(s) drop-down list box select a reader(s) or click Edit Filter to add a department(s). To add a cardholders last name to the filter type the surname into the Last Name box. From the Status drop-down list box select a muster status of either IN, OUT or IN & OUT. Click Refresh to update the page.

5.

6. 7.

8.

6.12.6. Cardholder
The Cardholder page displays the most recent card shown with any status (as long as it exists in the data base) from the All Transactions page. This is read-only information so no changes can be made here.

Figure 6-148. Latest Cardholder Page You may wish to display a chosen group of readers on the Cardholder page. An example could be to display only readers that are activated when entering an area and exclude all readers that are activated inside that same area. 1. To choose what readers to display click the Filter button Filter window will be displayed. . The Reader

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

522

Access Control

Figure 6-149. Reader Filter Window 2. To select the site or group of sites you wish to condition readers for, click the Select Sites button . The Select Site(s) window will be displayed.

Figure 6-150. Select Site(s) Window 3. You can choose to select readers from a single site or from a group of sites. To choose readers from a single site enter the site number in the Site No text box and then click OK. Alternatively

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

523

To choose the readers from a group of sites, in the Select Site(s) window check the Site Group box to enable the drop-down list where you can scroll and choose the desired group of sites. Click OK, or In the Select Site(s) window click View All Groups to display the SITE Groups window.

Figure 6-151. SITE Groups Window 4. Select the desired group by highlighting it and then click Select. The Select Site(s) window will be displayed again with the selected site group in the Site Groups dropdown list. Check the Site Group box to confirm the choice of site group then click OK. If you wish to edit or create a site group, in the Select Site(s) window check the Site Group box and select a site group. Click Edit. The SITE Groups Configuration window will be displayed.

5. 6.

Figure 6-152. SITE Groups Configuration 7. To edit a site group just enter (or remove) the site numbers in the Enter Range text box.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

524

Access Control 8. To create a new site group type a name in the Enter Group Name text box. Define the sites in the Enter Range text box and click Apply. A dialog window will ask Overwrite current group name?

Figure 6-153. SITE Groups Configuration > Overwrite Current Group Name 9. 10. To edit the current group name click Yes. To create a new group click No. Click OK till exit and return to the Select Site(s) window.

The Reader Filter window will be displayed again and there you can now select the readers you wish to be displayed on the Cardholder tab when activated

6.12.7. Importing and Exporting Cardholder Details


Note: To export cardholder details you first need to do a search. Then click Export All....

6.12.7.1. Export Cardholder Records After a Search


GMS has the ability to export cardholder records as a data file in a variety of formats including (but not limited to): Character separated values Comma separated values Crystal Excel Lotus OBDC Tab separated text Tab separated values

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

525

The following example is a tab-separated text file (of one record) that has been opened in the Windows Notepad application.

Figure 6-154. Tab Separated Text File To export cardholder records from the Card Access Manager Search page, proceed as follows. 1. Click Export All... and the Export dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 6-155. Export Dialog Box From the Format drop-down list box choose a format

Figure 6-156. Export > drop-down List

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

526

Access Control 2. From the Destination drop-down list box choose a destination. In this case the file will be saved to disk. That can be a floppy disk, the computer hard disk drive or to a network hard disk drive.

Figure 6-157. Choose A Destination 3. Click OK and the Choose Export File dialog box will be displayed.

Note: Depending on the file format chosen, one or two more dialog box(es) may be displayed with further options. Make your selection(s) and click OK.

Figure 6-158. Choose A Name And Path For The File 4. To accept the default path and file name click Save otherwise make the necessary changes and then click Save.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 5. If there is an existing file with that name a dialog will display asking if you want to overwrite. Click Yes to overwrite the file or No to cancel.

527

Figure 6-159. Do You Want to Overwrite An Existing File? 6. If you click No another dialog will display saying the report was cancelled. The dialog box displays the path to the file that otherwise would have been overwritten. Click OK and the dialog will disappear.

Figure 6-160. The Report Was Cancelled A dialog box will display when the file is being saved.

Figure 6-161. The File Is Being Saved

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

528

Access Control The file will now be saved under the name and path you requested.

Figure 6-162. Name And Path of Your Report File For more details please refer to training document PT-ACCESS-OPT&SUP03, section Importing Cardholder Details.

6.12.8. Auto-Import Staff Details


It is possible to auto-import staff details into the card access system. In this case it is advisable to allocate the employee ID as unique ID. If the import file does not provide a card number, as in the example above, a new card number will be generated. The system generated card number will start from the number set in the GMS32.INI file: [System Parameters] CMS Starting Card Number=2000000 If there is a card number in the existing database that is larger than the CMS Starting Card Number then the first imported card will start from that number instead. Example: The existing database contains a card with number 2000014, then the imported cards will start from 2000015.

6.12.9. Bulk Updating Cardholder Details


6.12.9.1. How to Do A Global Card Update After A Search
The Update All... dialog box allows global update of all cards displayed in the Search Results section and automatically download those changes to the database if required.

Note: The text boxes in this dialog box do not become active until the check box is clicked.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide To do a global update, proceed as follows. 1. Click Update All.

529

Figure 6-163. Update All... Button to display Card Details, User Defined 1 & User Defined 2 in the Update All... dialog box.

Figure 6-164. Update All... Window 2. Click the check box of the text boxes to change.

Figure 6-165. Click The Check Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

530

Access Control 3. Make the changes to be downloaded. In this case the staff have been transferred to the Sales department, so Sales has been selected.

Figure 6-166. Sales Department Selected 4. Click OK to download the updated information or Cancel if you have changed your mind.

6.12.9.2. Update All Example #1


Problem A group of contractors who started on the same date, need their Expiry Date extending by 3 months.

Note: For this example it is assumed a search has been completed and the results are displayed in the Search Results section.
Solution 1. 2. 3. Click Update The Card Details tab is displayed by default. Select the Expiry Date check box. Type the new expiry date in the blank text box.

Note: Must be in dd/mm/yy format.


4. 5. Click OK and all cards in the Search Results section will be updated. An option to refresh the search is displayed.

6.12.9.3. Update All Example #2


Problem A group of staff are transferring from one department to another.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

531

Note: For this example it is assumed a search has been completed and the results are displayed in the Search Results section.
Solution 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Update and the Card Details tab is displayed by default. Click the Department check box. Choose a department from the drop-down list. Click OK and all cards in the Search Results section will be updated. An option to refresh the search result will be displayed.

Note: In this case cards will not be downloaded as only information specific to controllers is downloaded.

6.13. Customize Cardholder Pages


GMS users are able to customize the look and feel of all Card Access Cardholder pages (except Access Level which is fixed and cannot be modified). To customize card access select Customize Card Access... from the Card Access Manager s Setup menu. The Customize Card Access screen will be displayed.

6.13.1. How to Change The Tab Order


Card Access Manager can be customized to change the order the cursor moves between each text box when the TAB key is pressed. This could help to mirror procedures or forms used by different companies. To change the order that fields are selected when using the TAB key to jump to the next field, proceed as follows. 1. From the Layout menu click Tab Order and a series of numbered boxes will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

532

Access Control

Note: The Personal page is displayed by default To modify a different page, select it before completing step 1.

Figure 6-167. Tab Order Numbers 2. Identify the text box where the cursor is to start from. Click directly on the numbered box of the corresponding text box name. The number in the box will change to 1 (if not already 1). Click on each subsequent numbered box, following the order the tab is to move. The box numbers will change to reflect the new order. From the File menu select Save and/or select another card access window to change.

3.

4.

Note: If more than one page has been altered click Save All to save all changes.
5. Exit the Customize Card Access window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

533

6.13.2. How to Change Text


At times it may be desirable/necessary to rename text. In this example it may be more relevant to have cardholders Personal IDs displayed as Staff No. To change text, proceed as follows. 1. Click on Personal ID.

Figure 6-168. Highlight Personal ID 2. Double click to display the Edit text dialog box.

Figure 6-169. Edit Text Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

534

Access Control

Note: The & symbol (located to the left of r in this example) indicates that the character following it (to the right) will display as underlined. This is used for keyboard shortcuts (i.e. ALT and r). Eg. Personal.
3. Type in Staff No. and click OK.

Figure 6-170. Type Staff No in The Edit Text Dialog Box The Personal Page will now display Staff No.

Figure 6-171. Staff Number Displayed 4. 5. From the File menu select Save or Save All. From the File menu select Exit.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

535

6.13.3. How to Insert Text


The Insert > Text command can be used to change existing text, create new text or display additional text on Card Access Manager pages. This could be used to: rename existing text for a data text box into something more meaningful add a text label to a data text box that was copied from a different page mirror procedures or forms used by different companies.

It may be more relevant to have cardholders Personal IDs displayed as Staff No. 1. From the Layout menu select Insert and then Text. The cursor will change shape.

Figure 6-172. Cursor 2. Move the cursor to the wanted insertion point and click. The Add text dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 6-173. Add Text Dialog Box

Note: The text location can be moved any time later if not correct.
3. Enter the desired text (in this case New Text) and choose left, right or center alignment (in this case left).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

536

Access Control

Figure 6-174. Add Text 4. Click OK and the text entered will be displayed in a highlighted box.

The shape of the text box can be altered by clicking on a blue highlight box and dragging it in the wanted direction. The cursor will change to solid black will arrows at either end.

Figure 6-175. Newly Created Text Box To alter the text location, click (while highlighted) and drag to the new location. To edit the text and/or change text alignment, right-click on the highlighted text to again display the Add text dialog box. To remove the text click on it (to highlight) and press the Delete key. 5. 6. From the File menu select Save or Save All. From the File menu select Exit.

6.13.4. How to Insert A Frame


The Insert > Frame command can be used to create a new frame on Card Access Manager pages. This could be used to organize existing text and data text boxes into a more meaningful group. To insert a frame, proceed as follows. 1. From the Layout menu select Insert and then Frame. The cursor will change shape.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

537

Figure 6-176. Cursor 2. Move the cursor to the wanted insertion point and click. The Add frame dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 6-177. Add Frame Dialog Box 3. Enter the label text (in this case Additional).

Figure 6-178. Add Frame Dialog Box With Text For Label 4. 5. 6. Choose left, right or center alignment. Select a color (to go behind the text label). Click OK and the frame will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

538

Access Control

Figure 6-179. The New Frame The shape of the frame can be altered by clicking on a blue highlight box and dragging it in the wanted direction. The cursor will change to solid black will arrows at either end.

Figure 6-180. The New Frame Repositioned 7. 8. From the File menu select Save or Save All. From the File menu select Exit.

Note: To remove the frame, click on it (to highlight) and press the Delete key.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

539

6.13.5. How to Insert A Data Field


The Insert > Data command can be used to duplicate existing data text boxes on other pages. This could help to mirror procedures or forms used by different companies or to make pages more efficient. For example, it may be more productive to have a cardholders Valid To date on the Personal page rather than (or as well as) the Card Details page. To insert a data field, proceed as follows. 1. From the Layout menu select Insert and then Data. The cursor will change shape.

Figure 6-181. Cursor 2. Move the cursor to the wanted insertion point and click. The Select Control dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 6-182. Add Data Field Dialog Box 3. Select the wanted data field from the drop-down list (in this case DB_VALIDTO) and click OK. The selected data field will be displayed in a highlighted box.

Note: The choices offered are existing data fields. New ones cannot be created.
To alter the data field location, click (while highlighted) and drag to the new location. The shape of the data field can be altered by clicking on a blue highlight box and dragging it in the wanted direction. The cursor will change to solid black with arrows at either end.

Figure 6-183. Alter The Shape Of A Data Field

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

540

Access Control

Note: This will not increase or decrease the number of characters that can be entered, just the display size.
To remove the data field, click on it (to highlight) and press the Delete key. 4. 5. From the File menu select Save or Save All. From the File menu select Exit.

6.13.6. Settings
Settings can be used to: change the order that Cardholder tabed pages are displayed in display or hide individual Cardholder tabed pages return to default settings.

From the Layout menu click Settings. The Settings dialog box is displayed.

Figure 6-184. Settings Dialog Box

6.13.6.1. How to Change The Order of Pages


To change the order in which the tabed pages are displayed, proceed as follows. 1. Click the title of the tab to be moved. The arrows down the left hand side of the dialog box will become active.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

541

Figure 6-185. Settings Dialog Box 2. Click an arrow to move the selected page up or down. The numbers in the Order column reflect the order the pages are displayed in. 1 will display the page on the far left. 6 will display the page on the far right.

Figure 6-186. Customize Card Access Page Tabs

6.13.6.2. How to Display Or Hide A Page


Click an Active check box to display the corresponding page. When unchecked the page will not be displayed. To display a page, proceed as follows. 1. 2. Place a tick in the corresponding Active box Click OK to save the changes.

In the following example the User Defined 1, 2 and 3 pages have been de-selected so are not active.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

542

Access Control

Figure 6-187. Settings Dialog Box This is evidenced by the page tabs not being displayed.

Figure 6-188. The User Defined Tabs Are Missing

6.13.6.3. How to Use Default Display Settings


The Use Default command will reset user changes to display default page order and show all pages. To reset to default, proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 1. Click in all of the Use Default check boxes so they are ticked.

543

Figure 6-189. Settings Dialog Box 2. Click OK.

6.13.7. Toolbar Icons


Rather than using menu commands, a quicker way is to click icons on the toolbar
.

Click

to
save a change save all changes cut the selected item (delete and copy in one click) copy the selected item paste from the clipboard delete the selected item

Table 6-23. Toolbar Icons

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

544

Access Control

Click

to
undo the last action refresh the screen and see the new changes align text and/or data fields to the left. align text and/or data fields to the right align text and/or data fields to the bottom align text and/or data fields to the top make the selected data fields the same width make the selected data fields the same height insert text insert a data field insert a frame

Table 6-23. Toolbar Icons (continued)

6.13.8. Layout Popup Menu


A popup menu with most of the layout commands is displayed when right-clicking on the Card Access Customization window. From this context menu you can perform most of the customizing or editing tasks that are available in Card Access Customization.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

545

Figure 6-190. right-click to Pop Up This Menu

6.13.9. How to Use The Align Command


The alignment of new and existing text/data fields can be altered. When a field is highlighted it can be aligned left, right, top, or bottom.

Note: Only 2 or more fields can be aligned.


To align 2 text boxes to the left (for example, proceed as follows.: 1. Click on the first text box to be moved (labelled 1 in this example). Then click on the second text box (labelled 2 in this example) while holding down a shift key.

Figure 6-191. Align Text Step 1 2. From the Layout menu click Align and then Left. The text box labelled 2 will align itself to the text box labelled 1.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

546

Access Control

Figure 6-192. Align Text Step 2

Note: Always click on the text box to be aligned to, last.

6.13.10.How to Use The Make Same Size Command


The Make Same Size command will unify the size (width or height) of two or more data text boxes. To make 2 data text boxes the same width (for example), proceed as follows. 1. Click on the data text box to be changed (labelled 1 in this example). Then click on the second data text box (labelled 2 in this example) while holding down a shift key.

Figure 6-193. Make Data text boxes The Same Size Step 1 2. From the Layout menu click Make Same Size. The size of the first data text box (labelled 1 in this example) with now match the size of the second data text box (labelled 2 in this example).

Figure 6-194. Make Data text boxes The Same Size Step 2

Note: Always click on the data text box whose size is to be matched, last.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide Use this same procedure for height.

547

6.13.11.How to Set The Levels Of Undo


Customize Card Access has one level of undo by default. To increase the number of times user actions can be reversed, proceed as follows. 1. From the Layout menu click Options. The Options dialog box is displayed.

Figure 6-195. Options Dialog Box 2. Type in the number of required undos and click OK. The Options dialog box will close.

6.13.12.How to Save Customized Card Access Data Templates


Multiple customized card access data templates can now be saved for use by individuals or across entire companies. A new operator template could be created to present basic information where as an expert user would probably want or need to see more. These templates are tied to individual operators profile so when they log off so does their profile. Customized templates are saved to the GMS server in the catemplate.ini file in the data folder. The template being used by individual operators are stored in userini.dxx. where xx is the operator number. Up to 9 templates can be created and displayed in the Templates menu before Click more templates is displayed to represent further templates. There is no maximum number of existing templates that can be created and used.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

548

Access Control

Figure 6-196. Add A Card Access Template A supervisor must initially give the operator customization privileges. Operator screens can then be customized as required and when the template is saved, have the customize privilege removed to prevent further customization. The operator is left with the customized template which will remain static. Should a template be modified (on the server) an operator would need to reassign the template to get the new changes.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

549

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

550

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

551

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

552

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

553

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

554

Access Control

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

555

Chapter 7 Reports
Use the Reports page to preview and print reports on card holders and their related transactions. There are three pages to select within Reports: The Card Access Transaction Report page is used to identify where transactions have been made and who made them. The Cardholder Report Options page is used when you want to be more specific about card holders. That could be to ask for a card holder by name, by department or where the card has been assigned (field controller, Access Level etc.). The Standard Reports page can be used to quickly view those reports used frequently. An example would be, all lost or stolen cards.

Figure 7-1. Card Access Manager Reports Page

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

556

Reports

7.1.

How to Preview A Report


To preview a report, proceed as follows. 1. You need to click on the Set icon preview, print or export the report. Click Preview to preview the report. to run the report query before you can

2.

Figure 7-2. Report Options > Preview Button Your report will be displayed in the Report Preview window. CTRL + Page Up/Page Down will cycle you through the available report pages or navigate with the directional arrow buttons on the toolbar.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

557

Figure 7-3. Report Preview Window 3. From the Report Preview window the report can be printed, the report data can be exported or the information refreshed by clicking the correct icon.

Figure 7-4. Print, Printer Setup, Refresh And Export Icons

Note: To close the Report Preview window click the

icon.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

558

Reports

7.2.

How to Print A Report


To print a report, proceed as follows. 1. You need to click on the Set icon preview, print or export the report. to run the report query before you can

Figure 7-5. Report Options > Print Button

Note: There are no options after clicking Print. The report will be sent directly to the default printer.
2. The Printing Records dialog box will be displayed. You can end the printing by clicking Cancel Printing.

Figure 7-6. The Printing Records Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

559

7.3.

How to Export a Report as a Data File


GMS has the ability to export reports as data files in a variety of formats including (but not limited to): Character separated values Comma separated values Crystal Excel Lotus OBDC Tab separated text Tab separated values

To export a report as a data file, proceed as follows. 1. You need to click on the Set icon preview, print or export the report. to run the report query before you can

Figure 7-7. Report Options > Export button and the Export dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

560

Reports

Figure 7-8. Export Dialog Box 2. From the Format drop-down list box select a format.

Figure 7-9. Export Dialog Box > Format drop-down List 3. From the Destination drop-down list box select a destination. In this case the file will be saved to disk. That can be a floppy disk, the computer hard disk drive or to a network hard disk drive.

Figure 7-10. Choose A Destination 4. Click OK and the Number and Date Format dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

561

Note: Depending on the file format chosen, one or two more dialog box(es) may be displayed with further options beforehand. Make your selection(s) and click OK.

Figure 7-11. Number And Data Format Dialog Box 5. Choose the date and number formats and click OK. The Choose Export File dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 7-12. Choose A Name And Path for The File 6. To accept the default path and file name click Save otherwise make the necessary changes and then click Save. If there is an existing file with that name, a dialog will display asking if you want to overwrite. Click Yes to overwrite the file or No to cancel.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

562

Reports

Figure 7-13. Do You Want to Overwrite An Existing File? 8. If you click No, another dialog will display saying the report was cancelled. The dialog box displays the path to the file that otherwise would have been overwritten. Click OK and the dialog will disappear.

Figure 7-14. The Report Was Cancelled A dialog box will display when the file is being saved.

Figure 7-15. The File Is Being Saved The file will now be saved under the name and path you requested.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

563

Figure 7-16. The Files Name And Path

7.4. 7.5.

Cardholder Details Report Card Access Transaction Report


Every time a card holder uses their card or PIN to access a site or a specific area within a site via a card reader, GMS records this transaction. This allows you to: Track the movements of card holders within a site, View their current location within a site, or View all cardholders that have accessed a specific area of a site.

To create a Card Access Transaction report, proceed as follows. 1. Click the Card Access Transaction Report tab at the top of the Reports screen to display card transactions information.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

564

Reports

Figure 7-17. Card Access Transaction Reports Page 2. Define the range of information to be included in the report. Either be specific with the information for a report about specific transactions or card holders, or general for a more generalized report. The more information that is entered, the more specific the report will be. Define the range of sites to be reported on. In the Start Site No. and the End Site No. text boxes, type the first site and the last site in the range respectively. Define the range of dates to report on. In the Start Date and the End Date text boxes, type the first date and the last date in the range respectively.

3.

4.

Note: The format for typing the date is DD/MM/YY.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 5.

565

Define the range of times to report on. In the Start Time and the End Time text boxes, type the first time and the last time in the range respectively.

Note: The format for typing the time is 24 hr, i.e. HH:MM:SS.
6. To include details about a specific card holders transactions in the report, type their card number in the Card No. text box. If unsure of the users card number use this screen to search for it: Type their name in the Last Name and First Name text boxes. Click Find to search for the card holders record. Results of the search will be displayed in the Available Cardholders drop-down list. Highlight the appropriate card holder, and their card number will be displayed in the Card No. text box.

7.

To include details about specific types of transactions in the report, select these from the Transaction Type list box. Select individual transactions by clicking them or select all transactions by clicking Select All. To include details about transactions that occurred at specific card readers in the report define those card reader(s): Select specific card readers by selecting either the Reader No. or the Reader Name check boxes, then typing the relevant details in the corresponding text box. Select groups of card readers by selecting either the Reader Group No. or the Reader Group Name check boxes, then typing the relevant details in the corresponding text boxes.

8.

9.

Define the method to sort the information. On the left hand side of the screen, select the relevant option from the Sort Field drop-down list. For example, to display information by site numbers, select the Site Number option. Likewise to display information according to the dates and times that transactions occurred, select the Date & Time option. Click Set to create the Card Access Transaction report. The Preview, Print and Export buttons will become available. Click the relevant button depending on the type of action to perform with the Card Access Transactions report: To view the report on screen, click Preview. To print the report, click Print. To save the report to a file, click Export.

10.

11.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

566

Reports

7.6.

Card Holders Report


To create a Card Holders report, proceed as follows. 1. Click the Card Holders Report Options tab at the top of the Reports screen to display card holder information.

Figure 7-18. Card Access Holders Report Window 2. Define the range of information to include in the report. Either be specific with information for a report regarding specific card holders, or general for a more generalized report. The more information entered, the more specific the report will be. Define the card holders to include in a report. To include details about all card holders in a report, select the All Card Holders check box, or

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

567

To include details about a specific group of card holders de-select the All Card Holders option. Then type the number of the first card in the range in the Start Card No. text box and the number of the last card in the range in the End Card No. text box.

4.

To create a report about card holders with the same last name or first name, type the details in the relevant text box (i.e. the Last Name or the First Name text boxes). To create a report about card holders with a particular printed card number, type the card number in the Printed Card No. text box. To create a report about card holders from a specific department, or with a specific card status or card type, click the relevant check box (i.e. Department, Card Status or Card Type). Select the name of the department, card status or card type from the corresponding drop-down list (these become available when you select the check box). To create a report about card holders with access to a specific site, type the site details in the Site No. text box. If you are unsure of the site number click Site Search. The Find a Site/Key Holder dialog box will be displayed. You may know the site by another method, such as its name or address. Use known details to search for the site number. To create a report about card holders with a specific expiry date, type the number of days until the expiry date in the Days to Expire text box. To create a report about card holders who have used a specific card reader, select either the Reader No. or Reader Name check boxes. Type the number or name assigned to the card reader in the relevant text box (these text boxes become available when the corresponding check box is selected). To create a report about card holders who have used a card reader in a specific group, select either the Reader Group No. or Reader Group Name check boxes. Type the number or name assigned to the card Reader Group in the in the relevant text box (these text boxes become available when the corresponding check box is selected). To create a report about card holders who are allowed access within a particular time zone, select either the Time Zone No. or Time Zone Name check boxes, depending on the information you know. Type the number or name assigned to the time zone in the relevant text box (these text boxes become available when the corresponding check box is selected).

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

568

Reports 12. If the information on this screen is not sufficient to create the required card holder report click More for further card holder options. The More dialog box will be displayed. Use any of the options in the Database Fields column to create further card holder report options. Click the relevant report option and click Select. The option will be displayed in the Selected Fields column. The text box at the bottom of the dialog box will change according to the option selected. For example if the Title option from the Database Fields column is selected, the drop-down list will display a list of all titles to select from, such as Managing Director, Financial Controller and Engineer. Select or type the relevant option from the text box at the bottom of the dialog box, according to your card holder report requirements. Click OK to save these further reporting options and return to the Card Holder Report Options tab.

13.

Define the method the information in the report is to be sorted. On the left hand side of the screen, select the relevant option from the Sort Field drop-down list. For example, if the report is to display information by card numbers, select the Card Number option. To display information according to a specific department in your organization, select the Department option. Click Set to create a Card Holder report. The Preview, Print and Export buttons will become available. Click the relevant button depending on the type of action you want to perform with the Card Holder report. To view the report on screen, click Preview. To print the report, click Print. To save the report to a file, click Export.

14.

15.

7.6.1. How to Print A Cardholder Details Report


To generate a Cardholder Details report click Print or press F6. This comprehensive 1 page report details up to different 46 pieces of information regarding the selected card holder.

Note: This report will print immediately to the default printer and cannot be cancelled once requested.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

569

Figure 7-19. Cardholder Details Report

7.7.

Standard Reports
One type of report the Card Access module can create is a Standard report. These are commonly used reports, with set information contained in a template. By specifying a template GMS can search for and base standard reports on this information saving time for frequently used reports. The available templates are:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

570

Reports

Report Type
Card Blocked Card Blocked/Expired/ Not Programmed Card Expired in 10 days Card Expired in 7 days Card Expired Transaction Card Holder Details Report Card Holder Report Card Lost/Stolen Card Not Programmed Transaction Replaced Cards Unissued Cards Report

Description
Displays all Card Blocked transactions Displays all Card Blocked/Expired/Not programmed transactions Select cards which are going to expire in 10 days (from today). Select cards which are going to expire in 7 days (from today). Select cards which have expired Displays selected card holders details Displays complete information about the selected card holder Displays all cards which are stolen or lost Displays all Card not programmed transactions Displays all Replaced Card transactions Displays card numbers which are not issued in the given range

Table 7-1. Standard Report Type Descriptions To create a standard report, proceed as follows. 1. Click the Standard Reports tab at the top of the Reports screen to display standard reports information.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

571

Figure 7-20. Card Access Standard Reports Window (With Report Options) 2. Define the range of information to be included in the report by selecting a standard template. Either be specific with your information for a report about specific card holders, or general for a more generalized report. The more information entered, the more specific the report will be. Define which card holders you want to include in a report. To include all card holders in your standard report, select the All Card Holders option. To include a specific group of card holders in the report, de-select the All Card Holders option, then type the first card holder in the range in the Start Card No. text box, and the last card holder in the range in the End Card No. text box.

3.

4.

From the Reports section, select a standard report template from the drop-down list. The Description text box displays a description of the type of details each report template will include. Define the method the information in the report is to be sorted. On the left hand side of the screen, select the relevant option from the Sort Field drop-down list. For example, to display information by card numbers, select the Card Number option. To display information according to a specific department in your organization, select the Department option. Click Set to create a standard report. The Preview, Print and Export buttons will become available. Click the relevant button depending on the type of action to perform with the Standard report. To view the report on screen click Preview.

5.

6.

7.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

572

Reports To print the report click Print. To save the report to a file click Export.

7.8.

Hardware Configuration Report


To print a report of the field controller configuration proceed as follows. 1. In the GMS Summary Manager right-click on the site. Choose RTU Parameters... in the drop-down list and the RTU No. window will be displayed.

Figure 7-21. RTU No. Window 2. Double click on RAP Configuration or highlight and click OK to open the Pacom RAP Configuration for RTU No. window. It will be blank. In the Pacom RAP Configuration for RTU No. window select Configure > Hardware to display the RAP configuration setup for your system.

3.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

573

Figure 7-22. RAP Configuration Window 4. In the menu click Print... to open the Print Pacom Configuration window.

Figure 7-23. Print Configuration Window

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

574

Reports 5. Check the boxes which information you wish to display in the report and click OK. An HTML file will be generated and display a table with the current configuration. This site for example has three areas configured.

Figure 7-24. field controller Report

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

575

7.9.

Creating Customized Reports


GMS 3.50 offers an optional module that enables users to design and create reports.

7.9.1. Licensing Requirements


To develop customized reports, an optional GMS module called Custom Reports is required. When this optional module is ordered, two items are supplied: 1. 2. a revised GMS license file, and a Crystal Reports V9-Report Creation API-Named User License

Both are required in order to design and customize reports.

7.9.1.1.

Using the Crystal Reports Unlock Key


From the GMS Installation CDROM, launch the Crystal Reports License Manager application. This can be found under /Extras/Crystal Reports or a button can be launched from the GMS autorun application under Extras.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

576

Reports

Figure 7-25. Crystal Reports License Manager Enter the key code in the required field and click Add.

7.9.2. To Design a Custom Report


1. Click on the Reports icon from the main GMS toolbar, select Reports from the Setup menu or simply press F8. Select the Create Site Report... option. Enter the date, time and site details that the report should be based upon. Select User Defined from the Report Types drop-down list. Click Set and a new screen will be launched. Click the New button and enter a descriptive name for the report that you wish to create.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7. From the Template drop-down list, select Gmsrep.rpt. Only one report template (GMSRep.rpt) will be available from the drop-down list. Please note however that when the Customize button is clicked, the user will be presented will a more comprehensive selection of existing GMS templates. 8. Click the Customize button.

577

Note: If a Crystal Reports key code has not been entered as mentioned in Using the Crystal Reports Unlock Key on page 575, an error message will be displayed stating: Could not start Crystal Reports.
9. A list of all existing GMS report templates will be displayed. Select the template that is closest to meeting your desired design, layout and query requirements. Click OK. A (Crystal Reports-looking) design sheet will appear - enabling you to customize the report to suit your exact requirements. The formatting, content and queries can all be manipulated to suit the users requirements. When you have made the necessary modifications to the report, click the Save or Save As... buttons at the bottom of the screen. You will return to the initial User Defined Reports screen where you can now configure the queries to be associated with your report. Add the desired queries to the report. Refer to Configure the Report Filters & Search Criteria on page 577 for further details. Click the Preview button to see whether the report operates correctly.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Note: You can use the Search/Seek button to look for specific strings that exist within the previewed report. All customized reports will have a Crystal Reports logo in the upper right hand corner of the preview screen.
14. The custom report will be automatically saved when the report was previewed. Click Save As... if you wish to save the report as a different name.

7.9.3. Configure the Report Filters & Search Criteria


A range of criteria can be added to the custom report to make the report meet your exact requirements. The report criteria can be associated with the data in the following table:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

578

Reports

Category
External Alarms

Filter / Condition
Alarm Group Alarm Type

Attribute(s)
Burglar Alarm, Fire Alarm, Holdup Alarm, Raid Alarm, Smoke Alarm, Vault Alarm Alarm during test mode, Collector active, Detector tamper, Device tested, Dummy Alarm, Failed Self Test, Failed Test, Failed Alarm, False Alarm, Fault point status report, Fire Alarm, Fire false alarm, Guard Tour, Isolated, Isolated point status report, Monitored fault point status, Monitored isolated point status, Monitored latched point status, Monitored point status report, Monitored soak point status, Night alarm, Normal, Normal (fallback), Normal (shadow), Open Circuit, Override seal, Point retrieve alarm, Point status report alarm, Short circuit, Shunt alarm, Soak alarm, Soak point status report, Suspect device, Tamper, Test mode alarm, test mode soak alarm, testing overdue, Timeout exit test, Trouble You are required to manually enter the name of the point You are required to manually enter the point number Alarm Button, Door contact, Holdup Button, Infrared Det(ector), Raid Button You are required to manually enter the priority of the point (0-255)

Location Point Number Point Type Priority Table 7-2. Report Search Criteria

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

579

Category
Internal Alarms

Filter / Condition
Alarm Type

Attribute(s)
A/C fail, Accessed, Ajar alarm, Batt test fail, Battery low, Bell fault, Cable fault, Camera faulty, Cleaner key in, D/ line bypass, Data error, Deactivated, Device Trouble, Dialup connection fail, Duress alarm, Early open, Emergency stopped, Failed to close, Failed to exit, Failed to open, Failed to start, Film low, Film out, Fire alarm on, Floor accessed, Forced alarm, Forced offline, Fuse fail, General access, General fail, Independent service on, Invalid response received, LAN Disconnect, Late cls vault, Late open vault, Late to close, Late to open, No battery, Normal alarm, Not configured, Offline, On dial up, Reporting off, Security fail, Supply 2 fail, Switched On, Tamper/unlock, Unlocked, Upload/Download in progress, User lockout, Vibration detectors isolated, Video signal lost, Warning You are required to manually enter the priority of the point (0-255) Card blocked, Card database full, Card database warning (90% full), Card deleted, Card download status update, Card duress, Card enroll, Card in/out error, Card invalid temporary schedule, Card not programmed, Card Q transaction, Card reader interlock, Card supervisor error, Card Type Blocked, Card usage expired, Egress button activated, Expired card, Guard Tour transaction, Invalid day, Invalid department, Invalid dual entry, Invalid issue level, Invalid mode, Invalid Mode Change, Invalid Pin entered, Invalid reader, Invalid Security Level, Invalid system no., Invalid time zone, No dual entry, No escort, Pass back, PIN code error, T&A card entry, T&A card exit, Temporary Access Level deleted, Valid card, Valid PIN entry You are required to manually enter the priority of the point (0-255) You are required to manually enter the priority of the point (0-255)

Priority Card Access Card Status

Priority Status Change Priority

Table 7-2. Report Search Criteria (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

580

Reports

Category

Filter / Condition
RTU Status

Attribute(s)
2nd user auth granted for dual custody, 4 hour battery warning, Action Qualifier, Ajar alarm cleared, Alarm buffer overflow, Alarm lost, Authority denied, Authority modified, Autoset of devices failed, Auto-set time reached, Auto-unset time reached, Cannot change mode zone undefined, Code check fail, Communications reset, Count changed, Critical fault message lost, Data error, Database denied, DES encryption error, Detectors in test, Device alarm, Device all points sealed, Device tested, Device type invalid, Dial in connect, Dial out connect, Dial up test failed, Dial up test passed, Dialler check in, Dialup No. not programmed, DIP switch changed, Dual Port Ram Fault, Duplicate address detected on network, Early heartbeat response, EEPROM error, EEPROM sector erased, Enrolled OK, Erase requested, Excessive errors on port, Exit bypass alarm, External EEPROM updated, Failed to connect, Failed to set, False finger threshold modified, Film replaced, Final set at night, Final set to %2 not received, First entry, Floor changed, Floor chosen, Forced alarm cleared, Format Requested, General status report, Global soak alarm, HUA alarm message lost, HUA test warning, I/O modified, ID deleted, Improper shut down, checking file system, Int Alarm isolated at mode change, Internal EEPROM updated, Internal error, Invalid ID or PIN, Invalid time or date, Key turned to Clear position, Key turned to Reset position, Key turned to Test position, Keypad data sts, Keypad inactivity timeout, Lobby break glass broken, Local setup modified, Low space, Manual output performed, Master code updated, Memory DIMM card detected, No heartbeat acknowledge, No heartbeat response, No master key, No session key, Non-PA alarm during comms fail, Normal alarm cleared, Opening procedure ambush, Operation aborted, PA alarm during comms fail, Password reset, PIN length modified, PIRs armed, PIRs isolated, Poll to line card, Port is looped back or being echoed, Program error, Request schedule off (continuing in next cell)

Table 7-2. Report Search Criteria (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

581

Category

Filter / Condition

Attribute(s)
(continuing from previous cell) Request schedule on, Restart, RTU system status, Schedule executed, Schedule resumed, Schedule suspended/stopped, Second alert, Security modified, Service requested, Service vibration detectors in test, Shut down, Software download: Finished, Software download: Preparing, Software download: Started, Software EEPROM checksum error, Software invalidated in other chip, Software version error, Solenoid time modified, System not reset, Tamper alarm cleared, Tamper message lost, Test mode timeout warning, Threshold modified, Time and/or date changed, Timezone modified, Vault vibration detectors in test, Video Event Captured, Warm restart, Warning-1, Warning-2, Zone currently disabled, Zones currently isolated, Zones in alarm at mode change

Mode Change

Mode Status

A/C fail, Access outside hours, Alarm lost, Area close by user, Area open by user, Arming station menu mode, ATM mode, Auxiliary access mode #1, Auxiliary access mode #2, Auxiliary ATM mode, Backup communications started, Battery low, Camera film alarm, Can't change mode - zone undef, Card access door alarms, Cleaner mode, Close (night mode), Code check fail, Configuration changed, Courier mode, Data line communications failed, DES encryption error, Detectors in test, Device off line, Device off line isolate, Dial out to RTU failed, Dial up communications started, Duress close (night mode), Duress mode, Duress open (day mode), EEPROM error, EEPROM updated, Engineering lockout mode, Engineering mode, Exit bypass alarm, Extended late working to all night, External ATM mode, External cleaner mode, External point isolate, Film replaced, Final set at night, Final set to night not received, Fire test mode, Forced zone window mode, General fail, General log on, General status report, Guard mode, Internal alarm isolated at mode change, Internal ATM mode (continuing in next cell)

Table 7-2. Report Search Criteria (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

582

Reports

Category

Filter / Condition

Attribute(s)
(continuing from previous cell) Internal cleaner mode, Invalid ID or PIN, Invalid time/ date, Invalid/inactive RTU connected, Late to close, Late to open, Late working in vault, Late working on premises, Maintenance mode, Management mode, Master code updated, No heartbeat ack/response, No master key, No session key, Open (day mode), Opening procedure ambush, Other alarm in comms fail, Out of hours access, Output alarm, Output isolate, Partial system reset, Perim/B auto-set time reached, Perim/B auto-unset time reached, Personal attack in comms fail, PIRs armed, PIRs isolated, Program closing time mode, Program ID mode, Reminder alarm, Remote alarm panel restart, Reset film frames, Restricted access mode, Returned to day mode, RTU alarm buffer overflow, RTU day test fail, RTU day test pass, RTU dial up test fail, RTU dial up test pass, RTU night test fail, RTU night test pass, RTU off line, RTU restart, Second alert, Service vibration sensors in test, Sonalert mute, System not reset, System reset / alarm cancel, Tamper, Tamper isolate, Test mode, Test mode timeout warning, Vault vibration sensors in test, View log mode

Priority Event Event No.

You are required to manually enter the priority of the point (0-255) You are required to manually enter the event number based upon either data appearing either in an alarm (Event Manager) or from the transaction log. These options come from the operators response when actioning an alarm: False, Procedure, Real, Test

Event Type

Operator No. Workstation No.

The options displayed will be the operators name and number You are required to manually enter the workstation number (0-32)

Table 7-2. Report Search Criteria (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

583

7.9.3.1.

Filter Conditions
Once a category is selected, you are required to select a Query filter. From the drop-down list, select one of the following filters:

Filter
equal to not equal to less than

Description
The report will display only those results which exactly match the entered criteria The report will display all the records that do not exactly match the entered criteria This filter can operate in two different ways depending on whether it applies to numerical or alphabetical data. For numeric data, records are filtered such that they are small than the entered criteria. For alphabetical data, records are filtered such that letters preceding the entered criteria will appear in the report. This filter acts as if it is a combination of the less than and equal to filter. This filter can operate in two different ways depending on whether it applies to numerical or alphabetical data. For numeric data, records are filtered such that they are larger than the entered criteria. For alphabetical data, records are filtered such that letters following the entered criteria will appear in the report. This filter acts as if it is a combination of the greater than and equal to filter. This filter query allows the selection of multiple attributes. For example, the Card Access > Card Status can be set to be one of for examnple Invalid day and Invalid timezone. The report will display results that contain any of these conditions. This filter query allows the selection of multiple attributes. For example, the Card Access > Card Status can be set to be not one of for examnple Invalid day and Invalid timezone. The report will display results that do not contain either of these conditions.

less than or equal greater than

greater than or equal one of

not one of

Table 7-3. Filter Conditions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

584

Reports

7.9.4. Designing a Custom Report with Complex Queries


In some instances, you may be required to design a complex report using multiple AND / OR operands. This can be accomplished with the GMS Custom Reports.

Note: AND queries can only be done on criteria in the same category. GMS will automatically OR queries together when the category-specific queries are added and Saved to the Custom Report.

7.9.5. Using the Custom Report in other locations of GMS


In many cases, you may wish the customized report to appear in other areas of GMS. For example, if you have designed a new Access Control report, you would probably want it to appear as a standard report in the Card Access module. This can be achieved by doing the following: 1. Open the System Files by clicking the appropriate toolbar icon or selecting System Files from the File menu. Open the file called Report templates. Scroll down the items appearing under the heading [CARD REPORTS]. At the bottom of this list (i.e. the first blank line), add a logical description of this report and the custom report file name (which was previously created) using the following convention. Report Descrption=REPORTNAME.RPT

2. 3.

Note: Ensure that a blank line is left between your report entry and the next item in the file.
4. 5. Save the system file. Open the Card Access Manager and go the Reports tab. Under Standard Reports, check that this new report entry appears in the list. Preview the report again to verify that it operates correctly.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

585

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

586

Reports

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

587

Chapter 8 Map Editor


Map Editor is the GMS drawing program used to create and edit the maps of areas within sites. Use Map Editor to: Create and modify dynamic site maps with alarm point and device locations. Create and modify site, contact, alarm point and device details. Import images or data for inclusion in site maps.

This section contains the following topics and procedures: How to Access Map Editor... Page 587 About the Map Editor... Page 589 How to Close Map Editor... Page 606 Working with Maps in the Editor... Page 607 Importing Content into a Map... Page 620 Manipulating Map Data... Page 637 Drawing Elements on the Map... Page 682 Manipulating Drawings on a Map... Page 734 Organizing Points on a Map... Page 755

8.1.

How to Access Map Editor


1. To access the Map Editor, do one of the following. From the GMS desktops File menu select Site Map.

Figure 8-1. File menu > Site Map

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

588

Map Editor

2.

Alternatively from the GMS desktop toolbar, click on the Map Editor icon

The Open Map File dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 8-2. Open Map File Dialog Box

Parameters
Site No: Area:

Description
Type the site number to open the map file from. If a site has more than one area (e.g. more than one floor), it will have more than one map. Type the number that corresponds to the particular site area. Alternatively, scroll through this list box and select the particular map to open. Use to open Multi RTU Site Maps. This also allows you to create new multi RTU Site Maps. For further information, refer to Working with Maps with Points from Multiple Sites... Page 766.

Map Files: Multi RTU Site Maps

Table 8-1. Open Map File Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions 3. 4. To view a specific site map, select or type the site number and then click OK. The map for the specified site will be displayed in the Map Editor window. (See Figure 8-3)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

589

Figure 8-3. Map Editor Window with a Site Map Open You can also access the Map Editor from within all GMS modules wherever you can view a site area.

8.2.

About the Map Editor


The Map Editor window includes command menus and a variety of tools and palettes. The following describes each of the functional areas on the Map Editor window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

590

Map Editor

Figure 8-4. Map Editor

Area
Menu bar

Description
Click on a menu to display the command options available from that menu. All Map Editor commands can be accessed via the menu bar. For further help on each Map Editor menu options, Using the Menu Bar... Page 591. Toolbar buttons are a shortcut to the most commonly used Map Editor commands. For further information about each button, Using the Toolbar... Page 603. Toolbox buttons are a shortcut for placing items in a site map such as cameras, input points, etc. For further information about each button, Using the Toolbox... Page 603.

Toolbar

Toolbox

Table 8-2. Map Editor Window Description

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

591

Area
Color bar

Description
Use the Color bar to set or change foreground and background colors. For further information about using the Color bar, Using the Color Bar... Page 604. The Point Details pane of the Map Editor screen displays detailed information about the elements in the corresponding site map. For further information about using this pane, Using the Point Details Pane... Page 604. The Site Map pane is where a site map is displayed. For further information about using this pane, Using the Site Map Pane... Page 605.

Point Details pane

Site Map pane

Table 8-2. Map Editor Window Description (continued)

8.2.1. Using the Menu Bar


Map Editor s menu bar contains all of the command options available in the editor such opening, closing, saving, printing, importing etc. of map files. Following describes each of these options. Map Menu... Page 592 Edit Menu... Page 595 View Menu... Page 598 Tools Menu... Page 599 Options Menu... Page 602

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

592
8.2.1.1.

Map Editor

Map Menu

Figure 8-5. Map Menu The following describes the options in the Map menu.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

593

Map Menu Options


New

Description
Use to open a new map. GMS will first prompt for the Site Number. For a new map, it will next enquire for its Site Details.

Associated Toolbar Icon

If the map already exists, GMS prompts a request to overwrite the existing file. If you select Yes, the existing file is discarded. For more information, refer to How to Create a New Map... Page 607. Open Use to open an existing map. GMS will prompt to select a map to open. For more information, refer to How to Open an Existing Map... Page 609. Use to import graphic (DXF file) from AutoCAD for inclusion on the site map. For more information, refer to Importing a Map... Page 621. Use to import site data from a coma-delimited file such as MS Excel file. For more information, refer to Importing Site Data... Page 625. Use to import site contact from a comadelimited file such as MS Excel file. For more information, refer to Importing Site Contact... Page 629. Use to import input point data from a comadelimited file such as MS Excel file. For more information, refer to Importing Point Data... Page 630. -

Import dxf File

Import Site Data

Import Site Contact

Import Input Point Data

Table 8-3. Map Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

594

Map Editor

Map Menu Options


Import Output Point Data

Description
Use to import output point data from a comadelimited file such as MS Excel file. For more information, refer to Importing Point Data... Page 630. Use to save the map. Saves the map as whatever the map was previously called i.e. the name that appears at the top of the window. For more information, refer to How to Save a Map... Page 611. Use to save the map under another name. For more information, refer to How to Save a Map with a New Name... Page 613. Use to print the map. Along with the map you can choose to print site data, site contact, callout lists and point details. For more information, refer to Print a Map... Page 614. Use to email the map as attachment to an email message. For more information, refer to How to Email a Map... Page 619. Use to delete a map file. You can choose the maps to delete from a list of existing maps. For more information, refer to How to Delete a Map... Page 619. Use to backup map files. You can specify a destination to save the backup. For more information, refer to How to make Backup of a Map file... Page 617. Use to restore map files from backups. For more information, refer to How to Restore a Map from Backup... Page 618.

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Save

Save As

Print

Email

Delete

Backup

Restore

Table 8-3. Map Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

595

Map Menu Options


Clear Redraw Exit

Description
Use to erase all contents of the map. Use to refresh the drawings on the map. Use to close and exit out of Map Editor. For more information, refer to How to Close Map Editor... Page 606.

Associated Toolbar Icon

Table 8-3. Map Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

8.2.1.2.

Edit Menu

Figure 8-6. Edit Menu The following describe the options in the Edit menu.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

596

Map Editor

Edit Menu Options


Delete an Object

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Associated Toolbox Icon

Use to delete drawing objects, icons and images on the map. For more information, refer to How to Delete Objects on the Map... Page 748. Use to delete an objects fill on the map. For more information, refer to How to Delete Objects on the Map... Page 748. Use to redo the last delete action on the map. Use to remove the last object added on the map. Use to move an object on the map. For more information, refer to How to Move Objects on the Map... Page 747. Use to resize images on the map. For more information, refer to Image Manipulation... Page 744. Use to duplicate an image that already appears on the map. For more information, refer to Image Manipulation... Page 744. Use to select an object or group of objects on the map. For more information, refer to How to Select Multiple Objects on the Map... Page 750.

Delete Filled Areas

Redo Undo Move an Object

Resize an Image

Copy an Image

Group Select

Table 8-4. Edit Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

597

Edit Menu Options


Bulk Update

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Associated Toolbox Icon


-

Use to add, delete or modify a large range of objects simultaneously on the map. For more information, refer to How to Change a Group of Elements... Page 751. Use to change the colors of selected objects on the map. Use to edit data (alarm point type, serial number, location, etc.) associated with the various points (input, output, camera, device and field controller) on the map. Use to view and edit site contact names and phone numbers of the displayed map. For more information, refer to Site Contacts... Page 637. Use to view and edit the data (site name, address, etc.) associated with the displayed map. For more information, refer to Site Data... Page 640.

Edit Object Colors Edit Point Data

Edit Contacts

Edit Site Data

Table 8-4. Edit Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

598

Map Editor

Edit Menu Options


Edit Guard Tour

Description

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Associated Toolbox Icon


-

Use to view and edit the route and time that it takes for a security guard to tour and investigate the security of the site. For more information, refer to Guard Tour Data... Page 648. Use to add, edit or delete operator instructions for non-alarm situations. Use to define instructions for events that have been configured by the user. Instructions can be defined for events such as bomb threat, medical emergencies. New events can be added from the site map.

Operator Instructions User Defined Event Instructions

Table 8-4. Edit Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

8.2.1.3.

View Menu

Figure 8-7. View Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

599

View Menu Options


Tool Box Status Bar Toolbar Color Bar Zoom To Point Details

Description
Use to view or hide the Tool box. Use to view or hide the Status bar. Use to view or hide the Toolbar. Use to view or hide the Color bar. Use to set the screen resolution of the map display area. Options available are: 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1024 x 768. Use to display the Point Details area of the Map Editor screen in full screen view.

Table 8-5. View Menu Option Descriptions

8.2.1.4.

Tools Menu

Figure 8-8. Tool Menu

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

600

Map Editor

Tool Menu Options


Line

Description
Use to draw straight lines on the map. For more information, refer to How to Draw a Line... Page 682. Use to draw curved lines on the map. For more information, refer to How to Draw an Arc... Page 683. Use to draw circles on the map. For more information, refer to How to Draw a Circle... Page 685. Use to draw rectangle on the map. For more information, refer to How to Draw a Rectangle... Page 686. Use to type in text entries on the map. For more information, refer to How to Add Text... Page 688. Use to fill a closed object such as a circle or rectangle. For more information, refer to How to Fill Objects with Color... Page 687. These options are not available in this version of GMS. Use to place a field controller icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to RTU... Page 690. Use to place a keypad icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to Keypad... Page 695. Use to place an input point icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to Input Point... Page 700.

Associated Toolbox Icon

Arc

Circle

Rectangle

Text

Fill

3D Tools RTU

Keypad

Input Point

Table 8-6. Tool Menu Option Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

601

Tool Menu Options


Output Point

Description
Use to place an output point icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to Output Point... Page 707. Use to place a camera icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to Camera... Page 712. Use to place an device icon on the map and specify its configuration. GMS uses device icons to represent a wide range of devices such as branch network controllers, modems, RAPs, termination units, camera controllers, etc. For more information, refer to Device... Page 717. Use to place a card reader icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to Card Reader... Page 724. Use to place a door icon on the map and specify its configuration. For more information, refer to Door... Page 730. Use to import image files for inclusion in the map. For more information, refer to How to Import an Image into the Map... Page 622. Use to create a button to execute a set of predefined commands.

Associated Toolbox Icon

Camera

Device

Card Reader

Door

Import Image

Command Shortcut

Table 8-6. Tool Menu Option Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

602
8.2.1.5.

Map Editor

Options Menu

Figure 8-9. Options Menu

Options Menu
Grid Size

Descriptions
Use to set up and display a grid so that objects are drawn with respect to scale and positioned appropriately in the site map. For more information, refer to Grid Lines on Maps... Page 740. Use to select a line style. For more information, refer to Pen Styles... Page 735. Use to set the font style and size for text placed on the map using the Text tool. For more information, refer to How to Specify the Font of Text on the Map... Page 736. Use to select and define the possible 16 layers of the map. For more information, refer to Map Layers... Page 761.

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Pen Styles Fonts

Map Layer Selection

Table 8-7. Options Menu Option Description

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

603

Options Menu
Locate a Point

Descriptions
Use to find a specific alarm point on the map. For more information, refer to How to Locate a Point on the Map... Page 756. Use to disable the selection of image files when moving objects. For more information, refer to How to ensure the Image does not Move when Objects on it Move... Page 746. Use to customize the menu items that should be available to users of Map Editor.

Associated Toolbar Icon

Skip Image Selection

Customize Menu

Table 8-7. Options Menu Option Description (continued)

8.2.2. Using the Toolbar


Map Editor s toolbar contains icons for the commonly used commands.

Figure 8-10. Map Editor Toolbar These commands are also available through the menu options. Refer to Using the Menu Bar... Page 591 to find information on these icons.

8.2.3. Using the Toolbox


Map Editor s toolbox contains icons for placing items in a site map such as cameras, input points, etc.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

604

Map Editor

Figure 8-11. Map Editor Toolbox These commands are used for placing objects on the map and are also available through the menu option. Refer to Using the Menu Bar... Page 591 to find information on these icons.

8.2.4. Using the Color Bar


Map Editor s color bar helps to set the foreground and background colors of objects that you draw on the map.

Figure 8-12. Map Editor Color Bar In the above case, black is selected as the foreground color and white as the background color. To change either of these colors select from the available palette. To select a foreground color, left-click on the color palette. To select a background color, right-click on the color palette.

8.2.5. Using the Point Details Pane


The Point Details pane displays the information of the elements in the corresponding site map. Click the + symbol next to an element to expand the tree branch and display further information relating to the element, e.g. camera number, type, model, etc. (See Figure 8-13).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

605

Figure 8-13. Point View Window

Button/Field
Expand Group Search Close

Descriptions
Use to fully expand all branches in the same group as the highlighted element. Use to locate a point. Closes Point View window and displays the two panes of the Map Editor: Points Details pane and Site Map pane. Select this flag to display point data for all areas within the site of the current area map.

Associated Toolbar Icon


-

Include Other Areas

Table 8-8. Point View Window Descriptions

8.2.6. Using the Site Map Pane


The Map Editor s right pane is used for displaying site maps and editing them.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

606

Map Editor

Figure 8-14. Site Map Pane When you select a command option from the menu bar or toolbar, the resulting action takes place on open map in this pane. Similarly when you select an object to draw from the toolbox, the resulting object can be drawn on the map in this pane.

8.3.

How to Close Map Editor


1. To exit, do one of the following: 2. Click on the button on the top right-hand corner of the Map Editor window.

From the Map Editor window Map menu select Exit.

If the open map is already saved you will be returned to the GMS main window. If it has not been saved a dialog box will be displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

607

Figure 8-15. Save Changes In The Map Editor 3. Click Yes to save the map file and you will taken back to the GMS main window. Click No to close without saving and click Cancel to return to the Map Editor.

8.4.

Working with Maps in the Editor


Using the Map Editor you can create and modify maps of sites. Moreover, you can create multiple maps each for an area of a site and save them individually. In this sub-section looks at basic commands that you can perform on maps. How to Create a New Map... Page 607 How to Open an Existing Map... Page 609 How to Save a Map... Page 611 How to Save a Map with a New Name... Page 613 How to Print a Map and its Details... Page 615 How to make Backup of a Map file... Page 617 How to Restore a Map from Backup... Page 618 How to Delete a Map... Page 619 How to Email a Map... Page 619

8.4.1. How to Create a New Map


To create a map, do one of the following: 1. From the Map Editor window Map menu select New, or select the Create icon alternatively from the toolbar,

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

608

Map Editor from the Map Editor window Map menu select Open... to launch the Open Map File dialog box to directly type the number in the Site No. and Area text boxes to create a new map. 2. The Create New Map dialog box appears. Open Map File Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions... Page 588

Figure 8-16. Create New Map Dialog Box 3. 4. GMS first prompts for the Site Number. Type the site number. Either of the two will happen based whether the file already exist or not. For a new map, GMS will next enquire for its site details. If the map already exists, GMS prompts a request to overwrite the existing file. If you select Yes, the existing file is discarded.

Figure 8-17. Map Editor Prompt

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

609

Note: The existing map file with same name as the new map will be DISCARDED (replaced with new blank map) as well as the associated site details and site contacts.
5. Specify the details in the site in the Site Data page and click OK. Site Data... Page 640 An empty map is displayed in the right pane of the Map Editor window.

6.

Figure 8-18. New Site Map

8.4.2. How to Open an Existing Map


1. To open an existing map, do one of the following: From the Map Editor window Map menu select Open. Select the Open icon from the toolbar.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

610

Map Editor 2. The Open Map File dialog box appears. Open Map File Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions... Page 588

Figure 8-19. Open Map File Dialog Box 3. Select the site number for which you want the map to be opened and click OK. Alternatively click Multi RTU Site Maps... to list groups of sites. The Open Multi RTU Site Map... window will be displayed. Select the site maps for which you want the map to be opened and click Open.

Figure 8-20. Open Multi RTU Site Map...

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4. The selected map is displayed in the right pane of the Editor window.

611

Figure 8-21. Map Editor Window with a Site Map Open You can also access the Map Editor from within all GMS modules wherever you can view a site area.

8.4.3. Saving a Map


When saving a map in the Map Editor, always hold down the Shift key. If you have opened a map and not made any changes, and then click on the save button, it will not do anything as GMS will only save if it thinks there has been a change. If you have brought a map in from another system and you are not making any changes to it, you can force GMS to save the contents of the map into the database by holding down the shift key while clicking on the save button.

8.4.3.1.

How to Save a Map


To save a map, do one of the following:

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

612

Map Editor From the Map Editor window Map menu select Save. Select the Save icon from the toolbar.

8.4.3.2.

Save Options for Site Dialog Box

Figure 8-22. Save Options for Site Dialog Box

Note: By default all the options on the Save Options for Site dialog box is selected for saving.

Parameters
Site Details Site Contact

Description
Select this option to save the site details. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select this option to save the site contact. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected.

Table 8-9. Save Options for Site Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

613

Parameters
Callout List Point Details

Description
Select this option to save the callout list of the site. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select this option to save the point (input, output etc.) details of the site. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select this option to save the map. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected.

Map

Table 8-9. Save Options for Site Dialog Box

8.4.3.3.

How to Save a Map with a New Name


1. To save a map with a new name, do one of the following: 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Save As. Select the Save As icon from the toolbar.

You can do either of the following: Type the Site Number to save the map. You can also specify the Area number if the map has to saved for an specific area of the site. Select an existing map from the Map Files list. This will overwrite the existing map file.

3. 4.

Click OK. The following prompt is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

614

Map Editor

Figure 8-23. Save Options for Site Dialog Box 5. Select from the given options the details that are required to be saved with the map. Refer to Save Options for Site Dialog Box... Page 612 for more information on this dialog box. Click OK to save.

6.

8.4.4. Print a Map


You can not only print a map but also data related to the map. Following sections describe this. Print Topics Dialog Box... Page 614 How to Print a Map and its Details... Page 615

8.4.4.1.

Print Topics Dialog Box

Figure 8-24. Print Topics Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

615

Parameters
Site Details Site Contacts Callout List

Description
Select this option to print site details for the displayed site map. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select this option to print site contact details for the displayed site map. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select this option to print a callout list for the displayed site map. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. All instructions for the map are displayed, local as well as global. Select this option to print points details for the displayed site. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select this option to print the site map for the displayed site. A checkmark will be displayed when this option is selected. Select to display a report on topics that are to be printed. This preview is available before the report is printed to the printer.

Points Details Map Preview

Table 8-10. Printing Topics Parameter Descriptions

8.4.4.2.

How to Print a Map and its Details


1. To print a map, do one of the following: 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Print. Select the Print icon from the toolbar.

The Print Topics dialog box is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

616

Map Editor

Figure 8-25. Printing Topics Dialog Box 3. Here select the details of the map that you want printed. Print Topics Dialog Box... Page 614 If the Preview check box is selected then on click of OK a report with the selected print details will be displayed. An example is shown below. (See Figure 8-26)

Figure 8-26. Site Map Report

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

617

Note: From Preview window select the Print icon

to print the report.

If the Preview check box is not selected and then click on OK will print the report and the map (depending on selection) to the default printer.

8.4.5. How to make Backup of a Map file


1. To backup a map, do one of the following: From the Map Editor window Map menu select Backup. Select the Backup icon from the toolbar.

Figure 8-27. Backup Files Dialog Box 2. Select the Map Editor files you want to backup. To select multiple files, hold down Shift key and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click individual files (for a non-contiguous block).

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

618

Map Editor 3. Specify the location for the backup in the Enter Destination Dir text box. Type the destination drive and folder or click on the 4. 5. Click OK to start the backup. Use the Windows Explorer to check if the files are in the destination folder. icon to select the destination folder.

8.4.6. How to Restore a Map from Backup


1. To restore a map from its backup, do one of the following: 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Restore. Select the Restore icon from the toolbar.

Specify the location for the map file that need to restored. Type the source drive and folder. Select the map files from the source. To select multiple files, hold down Shift key and click the first and last files (for a contiguous block), or simply click individual files (for a non-contiguous block). Click OK. If the file(s) that you are restoring already exist then this prompt appears.

3.

4. 5.

Figure 8-28. Restore Files Dialog Box 6. 7. Click Yes for the backup file to replace the current file available to Map Editor. Once the file is restored, you can view the restored file using Open option from the Map menu.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

619

8.4.7. How to Delete a Map


To delete a map, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Delete. Select the map to be deleted from the Map Files list.

Note: The map file being deleted should not be open at the time of its deletion.
3. There is no confirmation or cancellation step so make sure that you have chosen the correct map for deletion before you click OK.

It is possible to delete maps from anywhere within the system where you

8.4.8. How to Delete a Map With Multi Areas


To delete a map with multi areas, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Delete. Select the map to be deleted from the Map Files list.

Note: The map file being deleted should not be open at the time of its deletion.
3. A confirmation window will be displayed asking if you wish to delete the associated files as well. Click No to delete that single area and Yes if you wish to delete that area as well as all the associated files.

8.4.9. How to Email a Map


To email a map, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Email. The New Mail Message window will be displayed with a map file automatically attached.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

620

Map Editor

Figure 8-29. New E-mail Message (Map File Automatically Attached) 3. In the To text box specify a valid E-mail address or click To and select an address from the address book. In the Subject text box Map File will be displayed. If a message is required, type it into the body of the message. Click Send. The New Mail Message window will close when the message is sent.

4. 5. 6.

8.5.

Importing Content into a Map


In this sub-section we will be looking at ways for importing content such as site data into a map from external files. Importing a Map... Page 621 Importing Site Data... Page 625 Importing Site Contact... Page 629 Importing Point Data... Page 630

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

621

8.5.1. Importing a Map


GMS allows import of AutoCAD native files with *.dxf extension or image formats such as *.bmp, *.pcx, *.png, *.jpg, *.tif. The following describe the procedure for importing this formats into a map. How to Import a DXF file... Page 621 How to Import an Image into the Map... Page 622

8.5.1.1.

How to Import a DXF file


To import a *.dxf file into a map, proceed as follows. 1. Open the file in which the dxf has to be imported. How to Open an Existing Map... Page 609 From the Map Editor window Map menu select Import dxf File. Specify the location of the dxf file. Click on Browse to locate the file or type the path of the file. Select the *.dxf file and click OK. The dxf file will be displayed as part of the map. An example is shown in below. (See Figure 8-30).

2. 3.

4. 5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

622

Map Editor

Figure 8-30. dxf File Imported onto a Map

Note: Ensure that the *.dxf file being imported does NOT have more than two layers.

8.5.1.2.

How to Import an Image into the Map

Note: Save the image files in the GMS/Customer/Bitmaps folder before importing them onto the map.
To import a image into a map, proceed as follows. 1. Do one of the following: 2. From the Map Editor window Tools menu select Import Image. Select the Import Image icon from the toolbox.

Position the cursor where you want the image to appear on the map and click the leftmouse button.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

623

Figure 8-31. Position Cursor where the Image has to be Placed 3. The Open dialog box is displayed.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

624

Map Editor

Figure 8-32. Open Dialog Box 4. Select a image file type from the Files of type drop-down list.

Figure 8-33. File Types 5. Select the required image file of the selected type. Click Open.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 6.

625

The image is displayed on the map at the chosen position. An example is shown below (See Figure 8-34).

Figure 8-34. Image appears at the Position of the Cursor

8.5.2. Importing Site Data


Import Site Data option allows the programming of site data in advance, by using another spreadsheet package such as Microsoft Excel or a text file using a delimiting character. This file than can then be imported into GMS.

8.5.2.1.

How to Import Site Data


To import the spreadsheet data into site data proceed as follows.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

626

Map Editor

Note: Ensure that no map file is open when importing site data or site contacts. If a map is open those options will be greyed out in the menu. Open a new map from the GMS main menu to access the Import Site Data and Import Site Contacts options from the Map Editors Map menu.
1. 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Import SiteData.... The Import Site Data from File dialog box opens. (See Figure 8-35)

Figure 8-35. Import Site Data from File Dialog Box with Import File Tab Page Open 3. On the Import File tab page, specify the location of the spreadsheet file. To do this either click on Browse to locate the file or type the path of the file. Type the delimiting character (usually comma is used) in the Enter a separator character text box. Type in the index value in the fields which are concurrent with the Site Data details. Following examples illustrate this.

4.

5.

For example, if in your Excel spreadsheet the column A is specified for field controller number then type 1 as the index value for the RTU No. text box. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching column number.
Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

627

Figure 8-36. Site Data Imported from an Excel file A text file can also be used to import site data into the Map Editor. The text file must have each entry (each unit of data) separated by a comma. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching entry number.

Figure 8-37. Text File containing Site Data

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

628

Map Editor If in your text file the first entry is for the field controller number then type 1 as the index value in RTU No. text box in the Import Site Date from File dialog box. 6. Similarly fill the concurrent text boxes in all the tab pages of the Import Site Date from File dialog box.

Note: Type 0 for text boxes which do not have any concurrence. Type -1 if you want to retain existing data of the field on the map.

Figure 8-38. Import Site Data from File Dialog Box with Details Tab Page Open 7. 8. Click OK once all the text boxes are filled. To check for the imported data, from the Map Editor Map menu select Open and from the list open the map file for which the data was imported. Once the map file is open check its Site Data by selecting Edit Site Data from the Edit menu.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

629

8.5.3. Importing Site Contact


Import Site Contact option allows the programming of site contact in advance, by using another spreadsheet package such as Microsoft Excel or a text file using a delimiting character.

8.5.3.1.

How to Import Site Contact


To import the spreadsheet data into Site Contact proceed as follows.

Note: Ensure NO map is open in the Map Editor window.


1. 2. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Import Site Contact. The Import Site Contact Data from File dialog box opens. (See Figure 8-39)

Figure 8-39. Import Site Contact Data from File Dialog Box with Import File Tab Page Open 3. On the Import File tab page, specify the location of the spreadsheet file. To do this either click on Browse to locate the file or type the path of the file. Type the delimiting character (usual comma is used) in the Enter a separator character text box.

4.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

630

Map Editor 5. Type in the index value in the fields which are concurrent with the Site Contact details.

For example, if in your Excel spreadsheet the column A is specified for field controller number then type 1 as the index value for the RTU No. text box. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching column number.

Figure 8-40. Input Site Contact Data from File For example, if in your text file the first entry is for the field controller number then type 1 as the index value. The text file must have each entry (unit of data) separated by a comma. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching entry number.

Figure 8-41. Text File Containing Site Data

8.5.4. Importing Point Data


Data on both input and output points can be imported from another spreadsheet package such as Microsoft Excel or a text file using a delimiting character. The following procedure describe how to import the point data into a map. How to Import Input Point Data... Page 631

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide How to Import Output Point Data... Page 634

631

8.5.4.1.

How to Import Input Point Data


To import the spreadsheet data into Input Point Data proceed as follows. 1. Open the map file. How to Open an Existing Map... Page 609

Note: Point data can only be imported to a map that is open in the Map Editor.
2. 3. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Import Input Point Data. The Import Input Point Data from File dialog box is displayed. (See Figure 8-42)

Figure 8-42. Import Input Point Data from File Dialog Box 4. On the Import File tab page, specify the location of the spreadsheet file. To do this either click on Browse to locate the file or type the path of the file.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

632

Map Editor 5. Type the delimiting character (usual comma is used) in the Enter a separator character text box. Type in the index value in the fields which are concurrent with the Input Point details. Following examples illustrate this.

6.

For example, if in your Excel spreadsheet the column A is specified for field controller number then type 1 as the index value for the RTU No. text box. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching column number.

Figure 8-43. Input Point Data Imported from an Excel file A text file can also be used to import input point data into the Map Editor. The text file must have each entry (unit of data) separated by a comma. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching entry number.

Figure 8-44. Text File containing Input Point Data

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

633

If in your text file the first entry is for the field controller number then type 1 as the index value in RTU No. text box in the Import Input Point Date from File dialog box. 7. Similarly fill the concurrent text boxes in all the tab pages of the Import Input Point Date from File dialog box.

Note: Type 0 for text boxes which do not have any concurrence.

Figure 8-45. Import Input Point Data from File Dialog Box with Point Details Tab Page Open 8. 9. Click OK once all the text boxes are filled. The points imported will be displayed on the map. You can also use the Point Details to check the point information. Using the Point Details Pane... Page 604

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

634
8.5.4.2.

Map Editor

How to Import Output Point Data


Import Output Point Data option allows the programming of site contact in advance, by using another spreadsheet package such as Microsoft Excel or a text file using a delimiting character. To import the spreadsheet data into Output Point Data proceed as follows. 1. Open the map file. How to Open an Existing Map... Page 609

Note: Point data can only be imported to a map that is open in the Map Editor.
2. 3. From the Map Editor window Map menu select Import Output Point Data. The Import Output Point Data from File dialog box opens. (See Figure 8-46)

Figure 8-46. Import Output Point Data from File Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 4. On the Import File tab page, specify the location of the spreadsheet file. To do this either click on Browse to locate the file or type the path of the file.

635

5.

Type the delimiting character (usual comma is used) in the Enter a separator character text box. Type in the index value in the fields which are concurrent with the output point details. Following examples illustrate this. For example, if in your Excel spreadsheet the column A is specified for field controller number then type 1 as the index value for the RTU No. text box. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching column number.

6.

Figure 8-47. Output Point Data Imported from an Excel file A text file can also be used to import output point data into the Map Editor. The text file must have each entry (unit of data) separated by a comma. Specify index value for concurrent fields with matching entry number.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

636

Map Editor

Figure 8-48. Text File containing Input Point Data If in your text file the first entry is for the field controller number then type 1 as the index value in RTU No. text box in the Import Output Point Date from File dialog box. 7. Similarly fill the concurrent text boxes in all the tab pages of the Import Input Point Date from File dialog box.

Note: Type 0 for text boxes which do not have any concurrence.

Figure 8-49. Import Output Point Data from File Dialog Box with Point Details Tab Page Open 8. Click OK once all the text boxes are filled.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 9.

637

The points imported will be displayed on the map. You can also use the Point Details to check the point information. Using the Point Details Pane... Page 604

8.6.

Manipulating Map Data


You can store various information regarding a site with its map. This section looks at the kinds of data that you can store for a map. Site Contacts... Page 637 Site Data... Page 640 Guard Tour Data... Page 648 Operator Instructions... Page 655

8.6.1. Site Contacts


For a map contact details of the key stake holders (managers, receptionist) of the site can be stored. The following sub-sections deals in detail about site contacts. Site Contacts Dialog Box... Page 637 How to Add Contact Details for a Site... Page 638

8.6.1.1.

Site Contacts Dialog Box

Figure 8-50. Site Contacts Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

638

Map Editor

Parameters
Name Position Address Home Phone Business Phone Mobile Phone Miscellaneous

Description
Use to specify the name of the contact. Use to specify position of the contact. Use to specify address of the contact. Use to specify the home phone number of the contact. Use to specify the business phone number of the contact. Use to specify the mobile phone number of the contact. Use to specify extra information about the contact. You can specify up to 256 characters in this field.

Table 8-11. Site Contacts Parameter Descriptions

8.6.1.2.

How to Add Contact Details for a Site


1. To add contact details of a site to its map, do one of the following: 2. From the Map Editor window Edit menu select Edit Contacts. Select the Edit Contacts icon from the toolbar.

The Site Contact for Site dialog box appears. Site Contacts Dialog Box... Page 637 Type the name(s) of the contact person for the site in the Name text box. Type the relevant position or title of the corresponding contact person in the Position text box. Type address in the Address tab for the corresponding person.

3. 4.

5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

639

Figure 8-51. Site Contacts Dialog Box with Address Tab Page Open 6. Click the Home Phone tab. In this tab, specify the home phone number of the corresponding contact person.

Figure 8-52. Site Contacts for Site Dialog Box with Home Phone Tab Page Open 7. Click the Business Phone tab. In this tab, specify the business phone number of the corresponding contact person. Click the Mobile Phone tab. In this tab, specify the mobile phone number of the corresponding contact person. Click the Miscellaneous tab. In this tab, specify any other detail that you would like to store about the contact person. Select Text and type the details in the User Text dialog box.

8.

9.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

640

Map Editor

Figure 8-53. Site Contacts for Site Dialog Box with Miscellaneous Tab Page Open

Figure 8-54. User Text Dialog Box 10. Click OK.

8.6.2. Site Data


Details about the site such as its location, contact numbers can be stored in the map. The following sub-sections deals in detail with site data. Site Data Dialog Box... Page 641 How to Edit Site Data... Page 645

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

641

8.6.2.1.

Site Data Dialog Box

Figure 8-55. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with Details Tab Page Open

Parameters
Account # Security Level URN (Unique Reference Number) URN2 Site Name Address, Address-1, City, State, Zip Phone, A/H Phone, Fax

Description
Use to specify site identification number. The identification number can be up to 8 characters long. Use to specify level of security perceived for the site. The definition of levels is left to the user to determine. This is user defined text box. Values specified in this field is left for the user to determine. This is user defined text box. Values specified in this field is left for the user to determine. Use to specify a name for the site. Use to specify the address of the site. Use to specify the contact phone and fax of the site.

Table 8-12. Site Data > Details Tab Page Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

642

Map Editor

Parameters
Map Index Time Zone Nearest Corner Linked RTU-1, Linked RTU-2

Description
Use to specify the location of the site in a local map directory. Use to select a time zone of the site. Use to specify nearest corner to the site. This will help to locate the site. Use to specify the connected third party field controller number to the sites Pacom field controller.

Table 8-12. Site Data > Details Tab Page Parameter Descriptions (continued) The Miscellaneous tab allows you to enter information such as a specific contact person and direct telephone number.

Figure 8-56. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with Miscellaneous Tab Page Open

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

643

Figure 8-57. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with User Page -1 Tab Open In this tab page, users can specify their own data as they require.

Figure 8-58. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with User Page-2 Tab Open

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

644

Map Editor In this tab page, a free text box is provided for user to type in their required description of the site.

Figure 8-59. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with Times Tab Page Open In this tab page, users can specify the opening and closing timing of the site for the week days, weekends and holidays. For more information on how to setup these timings, refer to How to Edit Site Data... Page 645. For more information on how you can control alarms beyond the opening and closing timing, refer to How to Setup Outside Hours Access... Page 647.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

645

Table 8-13. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with Panel Page Tab Open

Parameters
Line Card No., Network Type, Version-1, Version2, RAP Type, Dialback No., Dialback Type, Disaster No., Net Address1, NCP Line, Net Address2 User Field 1- 4

Description
This information is read from the field controller and is not available for modification. This information is available only after block sizes, field controller full status and field controller comms parameter are uploaded.

Users can specify their own data as they require.

Table 8-14. Site Data > Panel Page Tab Parameter Descriptions

8.6.2.2.

How to Edit Site Data


Follow the procedure below to specify or modify site data in either of these two situations. When you create a new map. When you want to edit site data.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

646

Map Editor 1. In the Map Editor window Edit menu select Edit Site Data. Alternatively, select the Edit Site Data icon 2. from the toolbar.

The Site Details for Site dialog box appears. Site Data Dialog Box... Page 641 In the Details tab, specify the general details about the site, such as, the name and location. Click the Miscellaneous tab. Here specify details, such as, contact phone numbers for the site. In the pages User Page-1 and User Page-2 specify additional details of the site. Click the Times tab. Specify the opening and closing hours of the site. Drag the lower slide first to specify the closing time of the site. Then drag the upper slide to set the opening time of the site.

3.

4.

5. 6.

Figure 8-60. Site Details for Site Dialog Box with Times Tab Page Open

Note: A blue bar will indicate the range of hours selected with opening and closing hours displayed in their respective columns.
For more information on how you can control alarms beyond the opening and closing timing, refer to How to Setup Outside Hours Access... Page 647.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7.

647

In the Panel Page tab, most information is read from the field controller and is not available for modification. However in the last four fields users can specify their own data as they require. Click OK when all the details have been specified.

8.

8.6.2.2.1.

How to Setup Outside Hours Access


A site with late to open or late to close will create an alarm called outside hours access for anyone opening a branch outside working hours. You can control when the alarms should be generated by setting these two flags under [Parameters] section in the GMS32.INI file. <Cross-reference to another section of help>

Figure 8-61. GMS32.INI File > [Parameters] section

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

648

Map Editor

Flags
OHA Enabled Set to 0 Set to 1 OHAoffset Set a value, for example, 30

Description

for those sites with no time programmed and not wanting an outside hours access alarm. for those sites which want alarms for every entry even if times are programmed. Any entrance into a site before or after working times will create an alarm. This provides a margin in opening time. In a site with working hours of 0900 hrs to 1700hrs with an outside hours access alarm will not be generated between 0830 and 0900 hrs and 1700 hrs and 1730 hrs.

Table 8-15. Flags in GMS32.INI

Note: A site with time programmed for ANY day (at least one) will create an alarm when opened on those remaining days which have not been programmed.

8.6.3. Guard Tour Data


You can setup a tour guide of the site for guards. The following sub-sections deals in how to setup the guard tours. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box... Page 648 How to specify a Guard Tour for a Single Site - Sequenced Route... Page 650 How to specify a Guard Tour for a Single Site - Unsequenced Route... Page 652

8.6.3.1.

Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box


In Map Editor window go to Edit menu and select Edit Guard Tour to display the Guard Tour Configuration window.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

649

Figure 8-62. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box It is used to specify, view or edit the route and time it takes for a security guard to tour and investigate the security of a site. Each guard tour can be made up of a sequential route through each area of the site, or setup as unsequenced with a specific time limit assigned to the tour.

Parameters
Enter Guard Tour No.

Description
Type the number of the guard tour you want to create, view or edit. There are a number of different tours that security guards can take. This is dependent on the individual sites guard tour setup. Click to select a guard tour. Sites can be setup with multiple guard tours for security guards to choose from when touring the security of a site. Select allows you to edit a specified guard tour.

Select

Table 8-16. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

650

Map Editor

Parameters
Unsequenced

Description
For a guard tour that does not follow a set sequence throughout the site, ensure the Unsequenced box is unchecked. For sequenced tours: Type the sequence of stations or select sequence from the map that the guard must follow during their security tour of the site. For unsequence tours: Type the number of each station or select the points from the map that the guard will check at some point during their tour of the site.

Enter Station Sequence

Enter Station Duration (Mins)

Type the amount of time allowed for travelling between each station. The guard must not exceed this time at any stage during their tour or an alarm will be raised. When you enter the Station Sequence, a default time of ten minutes will automatically be entered in the field.

Table 8-16. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box Parameter Descriptions (continued)

8.6.3.2.

How to specify a Guard Tour for a Single Site - Sequenced Route


To specify a guard tour for a single site for a sequence route, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the Map Editor window Edit menu select Edit Guard Tour. The Guard Tour Configuration dialog box appears. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box... Page 648

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

651

Figure 8-63. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box 3. Type the number of the security guard tour in the Enter Guard Tour No. text box. It is possible to store multiple tour routes. Alternatively, click on Select to select a guard tour. When editing a sequenced guard tour, ensure the Unsequenced box is unchecked. You can do either of the following. Type the sequence of stations that the guard must follow during their tour of the site, in the Enter Station Sequence text box. Alternatively, you can use the site map. Move the Edit Guard Tour window to one side of the screen so that the site map is visible. Click each station/point in the map, in sequence, that the guard will visit during their tour. The sequence of stations will automatically appear in the Enter Station Sequence text box.

4. 5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

652

Map Editor

Figure 8-64. Selecting Points from the Map 6. Type the amount of time allowed for travelling between each station in the tour, in the Enter Station Duration text box. The guard must not exceed this time limit at any stage of their tour, or an alarm will be raised. When you enter the Station Sequence, a default time of ten minutes will be automatically appear in this text box. Edit this default time to suite the tour.

7.

Click OK.

8.6.3.3.

How to specify a Guard Tour for a Single Site - Unsequenced Route


To specify a guard tour for a single site for an unsequenced route, proceed as follows. 1. 2. From the Map Editor window Edit menu select Edit Guard Tour. The Guard Tour Configuration dialog box appears. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box... Page 648

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

653

Figure 8-65. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box 3. Type the number of the security guard tour in the Enter Guard Tour No. text box. It is possible to store multiple tour routes. Alternatively, click on Select to select a guard tour. When editing an unsequenced guard tour, make sure the Unsequenced box is checked. You can do either of the following. Type the number of each station that the guard will check at some point during their tour of the site, in the Enter Station Nos. text box. Alternatively, you can use the site map. Move the Edit Guard Tour window to one side of the screen so that the site map is visible. Click each station/point in the map that the guard will visit during their tour. The station numbers will be automatically entered in the Enter Station Nos. field.

4. 5.

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

654

Map Editor

Figure 8-66. Selecting Points from the Map 6. Type the amount of time allowed for the entire security tour, in the Enter Total Guard Tour Duration (Mins) text box. The guard must not exceed this time to complete the tour or an alarm will be raised. When you enter the Station Nos., a default time will be automatically entered in this text box. Edit this default time to suite the tour.

Figure 8-67. Guard Tour Configuration Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide 7. Click OK.

655

8.6.4. Operator Instructions


You can setup specific instructions for operators to take when different alarm messages appear on their monitoring computers. The following sub-sections deals in how to setup the operator instructions. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box... Page 656 How to Add an Operator Instruction... Page 670 How to Associate Operator Instructions to Alarm Messages... Page 673 How to Modify Operator Instructions... Page 675 How to Delete an Operator Instruction... Page 678

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

656
8.6.4.1.

Map Editor

Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box

Figure 8-68. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box

Parameters
Configurable Messages Available Callout List Global List

Description
Choose alarm messages for which operator instructions have to be added, modified or deleted.

Choose from instructions common to all sites.

Table 8-17. Operator Instruction Configuration Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

657

Parameters
Local List Add Edit Delete Callout list for the Point New Edit Delete

Description
Choose from instructions specific to the site. Click to add the selected Global or Local instruction to the alarm message. Click to edit the selected Global or Local instruction. Click to delete the selected Global or Local instruction.

Click to create a new Global or Local instruction. Click to edit the instruction associated to the alarm message. Click to delete the instruction associated to the alarm message. Use to sequence multiple callouts associated with an alarm message.

Table 8-17. Operator Instruction Configuration Parameter Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

658

Map Editor

Figure 8-69. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

659

Parameters
Response Types

Description
Choose the type of response team you want the operator to call, inform or radio in the event of this emergency. Click the appropriate button under the Response Types group box. If you select Others, select the appropriate response person from the displayed list box. If you select Key Holders, select the appropriate response person from the displayed list box. Key holders are the people you enter in the Site Contacts screen. If you select Staff, select the appropriate response person from the displayed list box.

Table 8-18. Operator Instruction Configuration Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

660

Map Editor

Telephone Tab Page

Figure 8-70. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box > Telephone Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

661

Parameters
Phone No.

Description
Type the contact phone number for the response team (where applicable). This is the number that the operator must call during the emergency. Use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the template text, then click Copy. The text will be automatically copied to the Conversation text box. Edit these details as appropriate in the Conversation text box. To save these details as a new template, click Save to Template.

Conversation Template

Conversation

Type the details that the operator must inform the response team during the emergency call (where applicable). Use the conversation template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the template text, then click Copy.

Copy

Click to use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the template text, then click Copy.

Table 8-19. Operator Instruction Configuration > Telephone Tab Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

662

Map Editor

Parameters
Save to Template Time to Arrive Action Validity Time

Description
Click to save the details in the Conversation text box as a new template. Type the time it will take for the response team to arrive to the site (where applicable). Indicate the times that the operator actions are valid between. If an event occurs outside these times, action is not required by the operator and the event can be ignored. To indicate these validity times: Place cursor in the Start Time text box. Choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to begin from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the Start Time text box. Place cursor in the End Time text box. Choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to end from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the End Time text box. Alternatively, you can specify time in the Start Time and End Time text boxes different from the ones available in the Time Template list.

Table 8-19. Operator Instruction Configuration > Telephone Tab Parameter Descriptions (continued)

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

663

Information Tab Page

Figure 8-71. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box > Information Tab

Parameters
Information

Description
Type any specific information that the operator must inform the response team during the alarm situation (where applicable). Use the Information Template as an example of details to include in the Information text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy. The text will be automatically copied to the Information text box. Edit these details as appropriate in the Information text box. To save these details as a new template, click Save to Template.

Information Template

Copy

Click to use the Information Template as an example of details to include in the Information text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy. Click to save the details in the Information text box as a new template.

Save to Template

Table 8-20. Operator Instruction Configuration > Information Tab Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

664

Map Editor

Radio Tab Page

Figure 8-72. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box > Radio Tab

Parameters
Radio No.

Description
Type the contact radio number for the response team (where applicable). This is the number that the operator must radio during the emergency. Type the details that the operator must inform the response team during the emergency call (where applicable). Use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy.

Conversation

Conversation Template

Use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy. The text will be automatically copied to the Conversation text box. Edit these details as appropriate in the Conversation text box. To save these details as a new template, click Save to Template.

Table 8-21. Operator Instruction Configuration > Radio Tab Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

665

Parameters
Copy

Description
Click to use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy. Click to save the details in the Conversation text box as a new template. Type the time it will take for the response team to arrive to the site (where applicable). Indicate the times that the operator actions are valid between. If an event occurs outside these times, action is not required by the operator and the event can be ignored. To indicate these validity times: Place cursor in the Start Time text box. Choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to begin from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the Start Time text box. Place cursor in the End Time text box. Choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to end from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the End Time text box. Alternatively, you can specify time in the Start Time and End Time text boxes different from the ones available in the Time Template list.

Save to Template Time to Arrive Action Validity Time

Table 8-21. Operator Instruction Configuration > Radio Tab Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

666

Map Editor

Pager Tab Page

Figure 8-73. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box > Pager Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

667

Parameters
Pager No.

Description
Type the contact pager number for the response team (where applicable). This is the number that the operator must page to during the emergency. Type the details that the operator must inform the response team during the emergency call (where applicable). Use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy.

Conversation

Conversation Template

Use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy. The text will be automatically copied to the Conversation text box. Edit these details as appropriate in the Conversation text box. To save these details as a new template, click Save to Template.

Copy

Click to use the Conversation Template as an example of details to include in the Conversation text box. Highlight the Template text, then click Copy.

Table 8-22. Operator Instruction Configuration > Pager Tab Parameter Descriptions

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

668

Map Editor

Parameters
Save to Template Time to Arrive Action Validity Time

Description
Click to save the details in the Conversation text box as a new template. Type the time it will take for the response team to arrive to the site (where applicable). Indicate the times that the operator actions are valid between. If an event occurs outside these times, action is not required by the operator and the event can be ignored. To indicate these validity times: Place cursor in the Start Time text box. Choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to begin from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the Start Time text box. Place cursor in the End Time text box. Choose the time you want the Action Validity Time to end from the Time Templates drop-down list. Click Select. The selected time will be displayed in the End Time text box. Alternatively, you can specify time in the Start Time and End Time text boxes different from the ones available in the Time Template list.

Table 8-22. Operator Instruction Configuration > Pager Tab Parameter Descriptions

Print Tab Page

Figure 8-74. Operator Instruction Configuration Dialog Box > Print Tab

Version 1.3, Modified 2/06. Copyright 2006 Pacom Systems Pty Ltd, All Rights Reserved

GMS 3.7x User Guide

669

P